Home

User Manual - minus zero degrees

1. Part III Appendixes 46 0 Video Modes CDS Model Video Modes Internal LCD External Monitor Mode Grid Grid Scan Freq hex Type Resolution pelxpel Colors pelxpel Colors hor vert 38 SVGA 1280 x 1024 8x 16 256 222K 8x 16 256 256K 35 5KHz 87Hz Graph 40 SVGA 640x480 N A N A 8x 16 32K 32K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 72KHz 37 9Hz 75KHz 37 5Hz 41 SVGA 640x480 N A N A 8x16 64K 64K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 72KHz 37 9Hz 75KHz 37 5Hz 42 SVGA 800x600 8x16 N A 8x 16 32K 32K 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph 43 SVGA 800x600 8x16 N A 8x 16 64k 64k 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph 44 SVGA 1024x768 8x16 32K 32K 8x 16 32K 32K 48 5KHz 60Hz Graph 45 SVGA 1024x768 8x16 64K 64K 8x16 64K 64K 48 5KHz 60Hz Graph 50 SVGA 640x480 8x16 N A 8x 16 16M 16M_ 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 52 SVGA 800x600 8x16 16M 16M_ 8x 16 16M 16M_ 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph a These modes are interlaced All others are non interlaced Part III Appendixes cprviteoModes 401 CDT Video Modes This table lists the video modes for the CDT computer 640 x 480 modes will not use the entire area of the built in display In DOS there will be a blank band at the upper and lower edges of the screen using these modes Internal LCD External Monitor Mode Grid Grid Scan Freq hex Type Resolution pelxpel Colors pelxpel Colors hor vert 0 1 VGA 40 x 25 8x8 16 256K 8x8 16 256K 31 5K
2. The Enable Configuration dialog box This dialog box appears when you select an unused configuration button from the Configuration Management dialog box and click Enable Part II Technical Reference 3 2 The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button It provides the following options Option Name Change Image Copy from OK Cancel Usage Provides a place to type in a name for the new configuration Displays the Change Configuration Image dialog box refer to The Change Configuration Image Dialog Box on page 371 Lets you select an existing configuration on which to base the new configuration Saves the new properties and closes the dialog box Discards the changes and closes the dialog box The Advanced Configuration Management Dialog Box changes 4s Configuration whe Configuration whe Configuration whe me 5 Configuration wh FS You can choose to switch configurations automatically on dor tate Disable automatic configuration switching Switch when docking state changes Switch when A C power conn eking or ection changes The Advanced Configuration Management dialog box This dialog box determines when the system automatically switches configurations It provides the following options Part IT Technical Reference Option Disable automatic con figuration switching Switch when docking state changes Switch when A C
3. The Backup window 5 Click the files and folders you want to back up When you select a file or folder an X appears in the check box next to it 6 Click Next Step Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 106 CAUTION Learning the Basics Transferring Files to Another Computer 7 Select the drive to which you are backing up your files the diskette drive or any external drive you connected 8 Click Start Backup 9 Type a name for the backup 10 If you are using diskettes insert new diskettes as Backup instructs you to do so To restore information from your backup to your hard disk use the Restore page in the backup program Look in the on line Help or your Windows 95 documentation for information on restoring files When you re restoring files the backup program prompts you if you try to overwrite a file that already exists on the hard disk Make sure the backup version is the one you want before overwriting the existing file Transferring Files to Another Computer One method for transferring files from one computer to another is to copy them to diskettes The drawback to this method is that each high density diskette can only hold 1 44MB If you want to transfer a large amount of information there are better ways One is to use the Windows 95 briefcase Another is to use the TranXit program included with your computer which lets you transfer files through your computer s serial parallel or infrare
4. 000 eee eeeeee 170 Using External Speakers or Headphones 175 Managing Your CD ROMs 00 seer ee ee 175 The Wide World of Multimedia You ve heard of multimedia but what is it The term multimedia refers to the use of two or more communications media such as text graphics sound animation and video to present ideas A multimedia title is the computer presentation of two or more media elements that are experienced simultaneously You may purchase a multimedia title on compact disc or access one over the Internet Unlike television programs or audio tapes multimedia titles allow you to interact with the information by choosing what to view or listen to and when to see it or hear it Your computer has everything you need to enjoy multimedia a CD ROM drive a high speed Pentium processor a color display and advanced sound capabilities 161 1 62 The Wide World of Multimedia Building Your Compact Disc Library This chapter introduces the multimedia elements you can explore with the CD ROM supplied with the Satellite Pro 430 Without investing in additional hardware or software you can for exam ple capture a video and keep track of your compact discs In addition to the information provided in this chapter you may wish to read any of the several excellent books that explain multi media concepts and procedures in detail Building Your Compact Disc Library The information availab
5. erify Password aa Enter existing password Cancel The Verify Password dialog box 6 In the Enter existing password box type your password If the password matches the one you set the OK button is enabled Click OK The Toshiba System Control Panel displays the Security tab with the System Password listed as Not Registered Click OK to exit the Toshiba System Control Panel Close the Windows Control Panel Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Viruses and How to Cure Them 2 5 Keeping Your Files Safe Viruses and How to Cure Them Over the last few years there have been a number of computer virus scares Immoral pranksters seem to enjoy unleashing these potentially destructive programs on the general public Viruses while a potential problem need not have a devastating effect on your computer By taking a few simple precautions you can avoid infection And by making sure you have a complete backup of all your programs and data files you can ensure a speedy recovery if you do run into problems There are many virus detection removal programs available Ask your dealer for help in selecting one that adequately meets your needs Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Keeping Your Files Safe Viruses and How to Cure Them 2 5 5 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 12 Saving Time with Multiple Configurations 257 Starting Programs Faster wit
6. If a diskette is in the diskette drive remove it If a compact disc is in the CD ROM drive remove it and make sure the drive tray is securely closed Shut down Windows 95 and turn the computer off Disconnect the power cord Disconnect the external diskette drive Disconnect all external optional devices Close the display panel Close all port covers Do not pick up the computer by its display panel or by the back where the ports are located For long trips transport the computer in a carrying case You can purchase a carrying case from your Toshiba dealer or through the Toshiba Accessories Catalog Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 1 7 Caring for Your Computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter s Buying Programs Buying Hardware Before You Go to a Computer Store If you re new to computers buying computer equipment hardware and programs software can be a confusing experience This chapter provides advice and explains what you need to know to purchase programs and devices that will work with your Satel lite Pro 430 Series computer Buying Programs The range of entertainment business and personal programs you can buy is enormous This section Gives you an overview of the types of program you can buy Discusses the question of integrated packages such as Office suites versus individual programs Explains how to understand the i
7. Removing a Compact Disc To remove a compact disc from the CD ROM drive follow these steps 1 With the power on press the CD ROM eject button on the right side of the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 4 Learning the Basics 99 Using the CD ROM Drive The CD ROM drive slides partially open If the CD ROM drive doesn t open for example if the battery is drained and you can t turn the power on you can open the drive manually Use a straightened paper clip or other object to press the manual eject button This button is in the small hole just to the right of the CD ROM eject button Grasp the sides of the CD ROM tray and pull the drive until it s fully open Remove the compact disc and place it in its protective cover Push the CD ROM tray in to close the drive Taking Care of Compact Discs To protect the data stored on your compact discs K Ww Store your CDs in the containers they came in to protect them from scratches and keep them clean Do not bend a CD Do not apply a label or otherwise mar the surface of a CD Hold a CD by its outside edge Fingerprints on the surface of a CD can prevent the drive from reading the data properly Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight or extreme heat or cold Do not place heavy objects on top of CDs To clean a CD that is dusty or dirty wipe it with a clean dry cloth Wipe from the center outwards not in a circle If necessary moisten the clo
8. System Password Registered Not Registered Shows whether you ve set a system password For information about using a system password refer to Using a Password on page 245 Password Prompt This option lets you type in the text you wish the system to display when it starts and prompts you for your password The text you enter here appears on the line before the Password prompt For example you might use Enter your personal password please Part IT Technical Reference 4 0 The Toshiba System Control Panel The Miscellaneous Page The Miscellaneous Page Start Up Options Poweron Timer Security Miscellaneous Warnings Warning Volume J o Of Low Medium High ae j Z Enable audible waming for emergency battery condition BS Enable audible waming when panel closes FZ Enable system beep warning Pointing Devices Enable Accupoint only if PS 2 mouse is not connected at power on time Enable both Accupoint and PS 2 mouse simultaneously Version Information Parallel Port Mode eq BIOS Version ECP 530 O Standard Bi directional TOSHIBA Cancel poy __Defauts The Miscellaneous page This page controls options related to the system s warnings point ing devices and parallel port Option Warning Volume Settings Off Low Medium High Usage Sets the volume at which th
9. The Add Printer Wizard asks you to select your printer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 9 4 Learning the Basics How to Print Something You ve Created 6 From the list of manufacturers and printers select your printer and click Next The Add Printer Wizard asks for the printer port 7 Select the port settings according to the instructions in your printer s documentation and the port to which your printer is connected then click Next The Add Printer Wizard asks you to enter a friendly printer name 8 Enter a name for your printer If you re using more than one printer make sure the name is descriptive enough to help you tell the difference 9 Ifyou want this printer to be The default printer for Windows 95 click Yes then click Next Available when specifically requested click No then click Next Windows 95 prompts you to print a test page 10 If your printer is connected and turned on click Finish to print a test page To finish the setup procedure without printing a test page click No then Finish You re ready to print Printing Your Work Once you have set up your printer and software correctly printing a file from a Windows program is easy Follow these steps 1 Turn your printer on if it s not already on 2 On the File menu of your Windows program choose Print The program displays a Print dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basic
10. 1 Double click the My Computer icon Windows 95 opens the My Computer window 2 Click the Audio CD icon with the secondary button 3 Click Play Windows 95 opens the CD Player and starts playing your audio compact disc Playing Back Sound Video and Animation Files Multimedia files are stored in a variety of formats depending on the type of file Sound Files Traditionally sound is recorded in an analog form For example a magnetic tape recorder uses electrical signals to create a single model of a given sound or waveform Most multimedia computers support two types of sound files wave files and MIDI files Digital Audio Wave Files Digital audio uses computer based technology to record handle and recreate sound Digital audio systems sample the waveform at fixed time intervals for example at 30 times per second and reduce the sound to a sequence of numbers Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 6 5 Playing Back Sound Video and Animation Files When you play back a digital waveform or wave file the software transforms the numeric data back into its original acoustic wave form If you use the microphone to record sounds the computer stores them as wave files Wave files have the extension WAV MIDI Files Musical Instrument Digital Interface MIDD is a standard lan guage used by composers to create music to be played by a syn thesizer MIDI songs consist of commands no
11. Changing How magiCDisc Operates on page 183 Inserting a New CD ROM The first time you insert a CD ROM into the drive magiCDisc displays the Inspector dialog box amp Unregistered CD ROM Detected Register BrowseCD Install CD Close Help The Inspector dialog box This dialog box informs you that you have not previously regis tered the current CD ROM It also includes magiCDisc tools that let you register browse or install the CD ROM This dialog box opens automatically relieving you of the need to remember whether a CD ROM is registered or not Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 7 The Wide World of Multimedia Managing Your CD ROMs Adding a CD ROM to the List To add a CD ROM to your list follow these steps 1 Click the Register button in the Inspector dialog box or from the magiCDisc toolbar The New Registration dialog box opens New Registration Registration Title Version Category Notes Cancel Add Category Help AutoStart None C atoPlay Script C Default Data CD Viewer defined in Options menu Command Line Working Directory WSe Application C Install complete or not required The New Registration dialog box There are three types of CD ROMs data audio and photo The system determines the type of your CD ROM and dis plays the appropriate icon in the upper right cor
12. If you experience any of these problems use the start up options in the Windows 95 Startup Menu to fix the problem Using Start up Options to Fix Problems If Windows 95 fails to start properly you may have to change your system s configuration or verify the start up procedure to fix the problem To do this use the start up options in the Windows 95 Startup menu The following section describes each start up option and when to use the procedure To open the Windows 95 Startup menu 1 Restart your computer 2 Press F8 when your computer starts The Windows 95 Startup Menu displays the following options Normal Logged ABOOTLOG TXT Safe Mode K K K Ww Ww K Ww Step by Step Confirmation K Ww Command Prompt Only Safe Mode Command Prompt Only K If your computer is connected to a network the Startup Menu may display different versions of Safe Mode Part I Getting To Know Your Computer DEFINITION If Something Goes Wrong 3 1 1 Windows 95 Isn t Working Normal Selecting Normal starts Windows 95 under normal conditions Start the computer in Normal mode when there are no apparent problems with the system Logged BOOTLOG TXT Selecting Logged starts Windows 95 under normal conditions and creates a hidden start up log file named C BOOTLOG TXT This file records every step of the system s start up process You or a qualified Windows 95 expert can use this log file to check the loading and i
13. Notice that all the icons you dropped on the Recycle Bin are listed 5 To completely remove an object click it and click File then click Delete The object is gone forever Later on in your real work not in this tutorial you ll use the Recycle Bin to delete other objects such as folders documents and even programs Still the process is the same Drag the object s icon to the Recycle Bin and sometime when you re absolutely certain that you never want to see it again delete it from there If you change your mind and your want to restore an object you sent to the Recycle Bin click the object with the secondary button and click Restore Windows 95 restores the object to the place from which it was deleted To delete all objects from the Recycle Bin at once on the File menu click Empty Recycle Bin Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 70 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 12 Exploring the Toshiba Access Panel Lesson 12 Exploring the Toshiba Access Panel The Toshiba Access Panel at the right side of the desktop is a handy place to check the power usage gauges launch Toshiba util ities and other programs access a variety of on line help features and set up separate configurations for working at home at the office or while traveling When you turn the computer on the first time the panel is in Auto hide mode it disappears when you re not using it To view the panel move the cursor to the right
14. Option Name Change Image OK Cancel Usage Provides a place to type in a new name for the configuration Displays the Change Configuration Image dialog box discussed in the following section Saves the new properties and closes the dialog box Discards the changes and closes the dialog box Part II Technical Reference The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button 3 1 The Change Configuration Image Dialog Box E Images o E e EE E On the Road the Town Sports Filename ned OK Files of type Bitmap files bmp ia Cancel The Change Configuration Image dialog box This dialog box lets you select an image to display on the button for a new or existing configuration It works similarly to the Win dows Open File dialog box Select the folder in which the image is located from the Look in list box then narrow down the search using the File name and Files of type boxes To view an image you ve selected click Preview Once you ve chosen an image click OK to exit the dialog box To exit the dialog box without choosing a new image click Cancel The Enable Configuration Dialog Box r General Properties a OK Name CL aa Image _ Change Image p Base Configuation gmt Choose a configuration from am which to copy hardware and LS application settings Copy from Home z
15. Restart N Part IT Technical Reference omes 419 Part IT Technical Reference Chapter 20 Starting the Diagnostic Test 2 4 44 49 nekeke sees eenaeguedicn 422 Choosing Test Options cause eeaee dua yale ae caus 423 T stSeguence Jajah hie rate Son Gk a te A aA S 425 Exiting the Diagnostic Menus 20 00 ee eee ee 432 The Diagnostic lest This chapter explains how to use the diagnostic test program TDIAGS EXE to determine if your system components are work ing properly Use the diagnostic test if you have a problem you could not iden tify with the tips listed in the chapter If Something Goes Wrong The test verifies that the following system components hardware are in working order System the computer s internal hardware Memory Video Diskette drive Hard disk drive Printer if you have one attached This chapter explains each of these tests in detail 421 42 The Diagnostic Test Starting the Diagnostic Test Starting the Diagnostic Test To test hardware it s important to start the diagnostic test without optional features or programs for example without memory resident programs To do so you should run TDIAGS from the Toshiba Companion Diskette using the Toshiba Companion Util ity even though the TDIAGS program is on the hard disk Before you start the test check all cables for loose connections If any errors occur during the test check all cable connectio
16. Setup displays the Regional Settings screen 2 Select your Regional Settings and click Next The default is English American Setup displays the Keyboard Layout screen 3 Select the keyboard layout and click Next The default is United States Setup displays the User Information screen Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 30 Let s Start at the Very Beginning When You Turn the Computer On the First Time 4 Type your name and company in the appropriate fields then click Next Setup displays the License of Windows 95 screen 5 Read the license information then click Next Setup displays the License Agreement screen 6 Read the license agreement then click the button next to TI accept the agreement 7 Click Next Setup displays the Certificate of Authenticity screen 8 Type in the number from the Certificate of Authenticity affixed to the Windows 95 manual that came with your computer then click Next Setup displays the Windows Version screen 9 Choose your operating system UN Please consider your choice carefully Once you stor choose Windows 95 or Windows for Workgroups the setup K _ A4 program automatically and permanently deletes the operat WARNING ing system you did not select from your system If you choose Windows for Workgroups you cannot change your mind later and install Windows 95 If you choose Windows 95 you cannot go back and install Windows for Workgroups in its place To
17. The battery may be too hot or too cold to charge properly Its tem perature needs to be in the range 50 88F 10 30C If you think this is the probable cause let the battery reach room temperature and try again If the battery has completely discharged it will not begin charging immediately Leave the power cord connected wait 20 minutes and see whether the battery is charging Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 32 3 Fixing Device Related Problems If the battery light is glowing after 20 minutes leave the computer to continue charging the battery for at least another 20 minutes before you turn the computer on If the battery light doesn t glow after 20 minutes the battery may have reached the end of its useful life Try replacing it The battery appears not to power the computer for as long as it usually does If you frequently recharge a partially charged battery it may not charge fully Let the battery discharge completely then try charg ing it again Check the power usage settings in the MaxTime Control Panel or the battery save settings in TSETUP Have you added a device such as a PC Card or memory module that takes its power from the battery Is your software using the hard disk more Is the dis play power set to turn off automatically Was the battery fully charged to begin with All these conditions affect how long the charge lasts For more information on maximizing battery powe
18. This part documents the Toshiba utility programs that come with the Satellite Pro 430 Series computers If you are using the Toshiba Access Panel the Max Time Control Panel the Toshiba System Control Panel or TSETUP and you encounter an option you don t understand you ll find it listed and explained in this part of the guide If you re new to computers you can skip this part until you need it If you re an old hand with computers you may find explanations for the options you re using more quickly in this part than in Part I Chapter 15 Instant Password Security x 44 044 0 2w sn shag eee enon eee 349 POWER aes Oui ine toed arenas ede Ue MAU A MEM tele cats 349 Resume MOE xyoputa st vetoes eel Bact eaten male 350 DOUG nding epee anita ha ag ae o EEE euthae eect pls 350 PowerOn Display tewev te ose ee eeee bate ee een ade te 350 K yboard ncn hit ayo ae Seat a eee te hou al clad 351 The Hotkeys Hotkeys are keys that pressed in combination with the Fn key turn system functions on and off Hotkeys have a dark blue legend on the front of the key indicating the option or feature the key controls Instant Password Security Fn This hotkey locks the keyboard and blanks the dis Ea y y play You must enter your password if registered or press Enter to begin work again Power Fn FS This hotkey displays the power usage pop up win dow and switches among power usage modes Full Power Low Power and Custom S
19. Using a Password Setting a password lets you leave your computer secure in the knowledge that nobody can access your files When you set a password you must enter the password before you can work on your computer again Toshiba supports two types of passwords A power on password requires you to enter the password every time you start or resume the computer An instant password lets you get up and walk away from your computer for a few moments without having to turn the com puter off 245 24 Keeping Your Files Safe Using a Password Creating a Password 1 CAUTION Toshiba System You may create a password using either the Toshiba System Con trol Panel or TSETUP This section describes how to create a pass word in the Toshiba System Control Panel and how to use it as an instant and power on password For more information about set ting a password in TSETUP see TSETUP on page 403 When you register a password in the Toshiba System Control Panel you cannot create a password service diskette If you forget your password you must contact Toshiba US tele phone number 800 999 4273 before you can start your computer again To register a password and create a pass word service diskette follow the steps in Protecting Against Forgetfulness on page 248 to use TSETUP To create register a password in the Toshiba System Control Panel follow these steps Click Start then point to Settings
20. Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel Double click the Toshiba System icon The Toshiba System Control Panel opens Click the Security tab Part I Getting To Know Your Computer CAUTION Keeping Your Files Safe Using a Password 247 Start Up Options Poweron Timer Security Miscellaneou System Password D Not registered Set Password Prompt Prompt text TOSHIBA Cancel py _Defauits The Security tab of the Toshiba System Control Panel 5 In the System Password section of the tab click Set The Toshiba System Control Panel displays the Set Password dialog box Enter new password Cancel The Set Password dialog box 6 In the Enter new password box type a password of one to sixteen characters You may use any combination of letters and numbers in your password Make sure you use a password you can remember easily If you ever forget your password contact Toshiba PC Product Support US teleohone number 800 999 4273 A good way to prevent forgetting your password is to create a password service diskette in TSETUP Refer to the next sec tion Protecting Against Forgetfulness for instructions Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 4 8 Keeping Your Files Safe Using a Password 7 Type the password again in the Re enter new password
21. The Memory Resource Properties Dialog Box on page 362 The Percent Remaining Gauge Properties Dialog Box on page 363 The Power Meter Properties Dialog Box on page 365 and The Time Remaining Gauge Properties Dialog Box on page 366 Part IT Technical Reference The Toshiba Access Panel 3 57 The Dashboard Tear Off Button If you click a gauge with the secondary AccuPoint button a menu appears with the following options Menu Option Gauge Properties Remove from All Remove from current configuration Show Gauge Gallery Hide Title Bar Dashboard Properties Result Displays the Properties dialog box for the gauge you clicked Removes the gauge from the Dashboard window for all configurations Removes the gauge from the Dashboard window for the current configuration Opens the Gauge Gallery refer to The Gauge Gallery Button on page 355 If the Gauge Gal lery is already open this option reads Hide Gauge Gallery Hides the title bar on the Dashboard window If the title bar is already hidden this option reads Show Title Bar Displays the Dashboard Properties dialog box discussed in the following section To close the Dashboard window click its close button The Dashboard Properties Dialog Box This dialog box provides two pages of options each with its own tab To view a page click its tab Part IT Technical Reference 3 5 The Toshiba Access Panel The Das
22. The Satellite Pro 430 Series computer comes with Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 95 can run programs written for Windows version 3 0 or later Windows for Workgroups all versions and MS DOS When possible use programs written specifically for Windows 95 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 2 4 Before You Go to a Computer Store Buying Programs Processor The Satellite Pro 430 Series computer has a 120MHz Intel Pentium microprocessor It will run programs requiring a 286 386 486 or Pentium processor Memory The Satellite Pro 430 Series computer comes with 16MB of Ran dom Access Memory RAM Unless you ve added additional memory use this number when evaluating program requirements Some programs may list two memory numbers an amount which is essential for running the program and a recommended amount for better performance To check your system s RAM follow these steps 1 Click the My Computer icon with the secondary button then click Properties Windows 95 displays the System Properties folder 2 Click the Performance tab Windows 95 displays your computer s performance status including the amount of memory installed in your computer Hard Disk Your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer comes with a 1 35 billion byte 1 26 gigabyte hard drive Although this capacity well exceeds the 55MB stated in the system requirements example it is the amount of available hard disk that matters After you have bee
23. on page 306 If all seems correct treat this as a hardware error and contact your dealer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 32 1 Fixing Device Related Problems Where Do I Go from Here If you determined that you have a problem with a specific device refer to the following sections for lists of problems related to spe cific devices and possible solutions Memory Card Problems 0 00 e eee eee eee 321 Power and the Batteries 0 cee eee eee 322 The Keyboard sesti eraa eee aed edi ee ee 323 The Display 0 cece eee een eee tees 325 The AccuPoint s ore etek Gadi eh ee evened 324 The Disk Drives cnda A EEE a eee nee 326 The CD ROM Dive noris 0585 seee ane oad eraa ER 329 The Sound System 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 330 PC Cards icenen rore teroare ees aoe ote tele ltd 330 Printers sa cag hela delanahs adinasabeeonoackehenrenee gets 334 MGdems 2 92 oladuthhe ides Ses E A iad 335 Memory Card Problems Incorrectly connected or faulty memory cards may cause errors that seem to be device related So it s worthwhile checking for these first 1 Click Start then click Shut Down Windows 95 displays the Shut Down Windows dialog box 2 Click the button next to Shut down the computer then click Yes Windows 95 shuts down and turns the computer off automatically 3 Remove the memory card 4 Reinstall the memory card following the instructions in Install
24. 4 Grasp the drive module and pull it out 5 Ifthe module you removed from the SelectBay is The diskette drive slide it into the external diskette drive case until you feel it click into place The CD ROM drive set it aside Install the Drives To install the drive follow these steps YN Do not insert the CD ROM module into the external diskette stor drive case The drive module operates only when installed in A the SelectBay WARNING 1 Slide the drive module into the SelectBay until you feel it click into place 2 Press down on the bay release until it is flush with the bottom of the computer 3 Slide the lock toward the front of the computer to lock the drive into place Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 1 1 5 How and When to Turn the Computer Off How and When to Turn the Computer Off It s a good idea to turn your computer off when you re not using it for a while There are however several things to keep in mind when you want to turn off the power K Ww K Ww In Windows 95 use either the Shut Down or the Suspend com mand to turn the computer off If you plan to leave the computer off for more than eight hours use the Shut Down command instead Don t turn the power off if the disk light on the indicator panel is on Doing so may damage your hard disk or diskette drive If you close the display panel while the computer is on it beeps loudly You can tu
25. 7 Follow the instructions on the screen to set up PC Card support Removing a PC Card To remove a PC Card follow these steps 1 Click the PC Card button on the taskbar 2 Click Stop xxxx where xxxx is the identifier for your PC Card Windows 95 displays a message that you may safely remove the card oO Sect buttons Locating the PC Card eject buttons 3 Ifthe eject button that corresponds to the slot in which your PC Card installed is folded unfold it and press it to eject the PC Card The top button corresponds to the upper slot the bottom button to the lower slot 4 Grasp the edges of the PC Card and slide it out of the slot Depending on the type of card inserted Windows 95 may need to install additional software For example a network card will need to be set up for your network environment Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Little Cards that Do Big Things Removing a PC Card 1 97 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 9 If You eR Cady 10 Goas senate e e E eee oer TEES 200 CUMS Wl Sd acinclewk lt sae pas E AA A A E E EN 200 Faxing a Document nesnenin eek te ete eles 208 The Internet and Other Fascinating Places 209 Logging On to an On line Service or the Internet 216 Connecting Directly to Another Computer 222 Discovering Toshiba s On line Resources 5 224 Connecting to the World On its own your Sate
26. Consult the dealer from whom you purchased your computer and or program Your dealer is your best source for current information For the number of a Toshiba dealer near you in the United States call 1 800 457 7777 Contacting Toshiba If you still need help and suspect that the problem is hardware related Toshiba offers a variety of resources to help you Start with the Automated Fax Service Chances are you are not the only person to experience this problem Toshiba has prepared use ful information that can be faxed to you automatically For instruc tions See Toshiba s Automated Fax Service on page 339 Next try one of Toshiba s on line services The Toshiba Forum can be accessed through CompuServe and the Toshiba Bulletin Board Service BBS can be reached free of charge from any PC with a modem Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong Tf You Need Further Assistance 339 If you still can t find a solution to your problem you can call Toshiba directly See Contacting Toshiba on page 338 for details Toshiba s Automated Fax Service Toshiba s Automated Fax Service System AUTOFAX provides ready access to useful information about Toshiba computers and accessories You select documents using your touch tone tele phone Toshiba s AUTOFAX System sends the requested infor mation to your fax machine Follow these steps to access the system 1 Dial the Toshiba InTouch Center at 8
27. Menu Option Result Gauge Properties Displays the Properties dialog box for the gauge you clicked Remove from All Removes the selected gauge from all configurations Remove from current Removes the selected gauge from the current configuration configuration Hide Gauge Gallery Hides the Gauge Gallery window If the Gauge Gallery isn t open this option reads Show Gauge Gallery Part IT Technical Reference Menu Option Undock Dashboard Close Toshiba Access Panel What s This TAP Properties daha se O Result Removes the gauges from the Toshiba Access Panel and displays them in a separate Dashboard window Closes the Toshiba Access Panel Displays information about the item you clicked Opens the Toshiba Access Panel Properties dialog box refer to The Toshiba Access Panel Proper ties Dialog Box on page 374 The Hard Disk Properties Dialog Box ard Disk Propertie Display 21x Select the drive you want to monitor Display Mode OME Disk Free Space TIME isk Used Percentage OME Analog Conca The Hard Disk Properties dialog box This dialog box lets you choose how the Hard Disk Gauge displays Option Select the drive you want to monitor Disk free space Usage Lets you select which drive you want the Hard Disk Gauge to monitor When this option is selected the Hard Disk Gauge displays the a
28. Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 204 Connecting to the World Setting Up Installing an External Modem To connect an external modem to the computer follow these steps 1 Turn the computer off Opening the port cover 2 Open the port cover on the left side of the computer Cable Serial port Connecting the cable to the serial port 3 Plug one end of the serial cable into the modem and the other end into the computer s serial port 4 Plug one end of the modem s power cable into the modem and other end into a live wall outlet 5 Plug one end of the telephone cable into the line out jack on the modem and the other end into the wall jack 6 Turn the modem s power on 7 Turn the computer on Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting ete 2 0 5 Setting Up an External Modem Before you can use your external modem you must give Windows 95 the information it needs to communicate with your modem successfully This information includes the model number and manufacturer of your modem To set up your modem follow these steps 1 Click the Start button point to Settings and click Control Panel Windows 95 displays the Control Panel 2 Double click the Add New Hardware icon Windows 95 opens the Add New Hardware Wizard 3 Click Next The Add New Hardware Wizard asks if it should detect the new hardware for you 4 Click Yes and then click Next Windows 95 displays a message advising you to cl
29. That s all there is to it The next time you look at the rack screen your new CD ROM will appear in the list unless you ve set the rack screen to display only CDs of a different type Looking at a List of CD ROMs To examine a list of your registered CD ROMs click the CD Rack button on the main screen The rack screen opens You may look at all the registered CD ROMs or only those that meet certain cri teria To set these criteria see Locating a CD ROM on page 181 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 80 The Wide World of Multimedia Managing Your CD ROMs 8 magiCDisc _ ol x File View CD Rack Tools Help bek E k AICDs MS Office b Windows 95 Retail Disc The rack screen The lower portion of this screen shows a list of registered CD ROMs that meet the criteria you ve entered The toolbar buttons are the same as those on the main screen However the Register Browse and Install buttons have no effect unless you select a CD ROM from the list See the next section for details Selecting a CD ROM from the List To select aCD ROM from the list click it Once an item is selected you can Modify the registration information for the CD ROM by choosing the Register button You can change this information gt at any time See Adding a CD ROM to the List on page 178 K Ww Browse through multimedia and data files on the CD ROM and play one or more of them
30. a Media RE Chi_cb wav E Chi_cls wav KE Chi_dd wav P Chi_du wav D Chi_opn wav KE Chi_pb wav Filename EE Files of type Sound files wav z Cancel Preview ool The Browse for Event Sound dialog box Use this dialog box as you would the Windows 95 Open File dia log box Specify the folder in which the file is located in the Look in box then narrow the search further using the Files of type and File name boxes To play a selected sound file click the play button the triangle To stop a sound file when its playing click the stop button the square Once you ve chosen a sound file for the event click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the dialog box The Animation Dialog Box Animation HE Animation Effects Dialog open and close Dialog controls iLa The Animation dialog box This dialog box controls the animation sequences that are part of the Toshiba Advanced Dialog Interface Part II Technical Reference The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button 383 It provides the following options Option Dialog open and close Dialog controls Configuration button OK Cancel Usage When this option is selected dialog boxes accessed through the TAP animate when opened and closed When this option is selected the dialog controls
31. are animated Displays the Animation Effects dialog box refer to The Animation Effects Dialog Box on page 383 which allows you to set unique anima tion effects for each TAP configuration Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Discards your changes and closes the dialog box The Animation Effects Dialog Box The Animation Effects dialog box This dialog box lets you assign Toshiba Advanced Dialog Inter face effects to specific configurations The options are the same as the Animation dialog box refer to The Animation Dialog Box on page 382 Part IT Technical Reference 3 8 The Toshiba Access Panel The Help Button The Help Button Clicking the help button displays the help slider bar This bar provides access to TAP on line help General help button Video help button About TAP button The help slider bar The following table summarizes the functions of the three buttons on this bar Button Function Video Help Displays the Video Help dialog box allowing you to view a few videos that demonstrate how to use the Toshiba Access Panel General Help Displays a standard Windows 95 Help dialog box About TAP Displays information about the Toshiba Access Panel program Part IT Technical Reference Me aeeheHelpBuin OOD Part II Technical Reference Chapter 1 7 The Power Settings Page y g lt 2 22 uw ai saea eee een eeeeness 388 The Battery Alarms Page 5 5
32. box If the passwords match the OK button is enabled 8 Click OK The Toshiba System Control Panel displays the Security tab with the System Password listed as Registered 9 Ifyou like you may enter a Password Prompt in the Prompt text box This text appears with the password message any time you start or resume the computer 10 Click OK to exit the Toshiba System Control Panel 11 Close the Windows Control Panel Protecting Against Forgetfulness If you ever forget your password a password service diskette lets you bypass the password when starting your computer You can create a password service diskette when you register a password in TSETUP vice diskette contact Toshiba PC Product Support US tele j If you forget your password and have lost your password ser phone number 800 999 4273 CAUTION To register a password in TSETUP and create a password service diskette follow these steps 1 If your diskette drive is not installed in the SelectBay connect the external diskette drive or swap drives in the SelectBay To swap drives see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer otal Base Extended Shadow B D LCD Disp ISPLAY Display Adaptor ay Mode OS ROM Keeping Your Files Safe Using a Password 249 Insert a diskette into the diskette drive Fun TSETUP outside of Windows 95 at a system prompt If you try to run TSETU
33. follow these steps 1 Click the dashboard tear off button on the Toshiba Access Panel I gt The Dashboard window opens and displays the battery gauges Options The Dashboard window 2 To return the gauges to the Toshiba Access Panel click the close button What to Do When the Battery Alarm Sounds Don t panic The Satellite Pro 430 Series computer has three alarms designed to give you sufficient warning before your battery becomes fully discharged This section describes the three battery alarms what they mean and how to set each one to fit your personal computing style Going the Low Battery Alarm When you re beginning to get low on battery power the system beeps once and displays the Low Battery Alarm warning Nor mally this means you have less than 20 battery capacity remain ing To change the level of charge that sets off this warning see Setting the Alarms on page 143 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 42 Taking Your Computer on the Road Running the Computer on Battery Power Taa Warning Your computer s battery is low A Only 20 of your total battery capacity remains The Low Battery Alarm warning This alarm gives you early warning that your battery power is run ning out Unless you ve told the system to display this message at a really low power level or your work involves lengthy processing you can continue with what you are doing To close the alarm dialog
34. nfrared Port Not Used Parallel Port LPT1 378H TRQ7 CH3 Sound System Address IRQ DMA otal 16384KB Base 640KB Extended 15552KB Shadow BIOS ROM 192KB DISPLAY Display Adaptor VGA Compatible LCD Display Mode Color VGA Segment Address E400H OTHERS Power up Mode Resume CPU Cache Enabled Battery Save Mode Full Power Alarm Volume High System Beep Enabled LCD Display Colors 16M Colors Power On Display Internal External ext Mode Stretch Disable Panel Power On Off Enabled Alarm Power On Disabled HARD DISK Keyboard Layout Fn HDD Mode Enhanced IDE Normal Pointing Devices Auto Selected Boot Priority FDD HDD PASSWORD Not Registered Neo Select items Space Bksp Change values Esc Exit without saving Home Set default values End Save changes and exit A sample System Setup screen Making Changes in TSETUP This table lists the keys to use in TSETUP Key s Result lt and gt Moves between the two columns T and J Moves between items in a column Spacebar and BkSp Changes the selected item Esc Quits TSETUP without saving changes End Saves your changes and quits TSETUP restarting the computer if necessary Home Resets each option to its factory preset value Part IT Technical Reference Closing ei 405 Closing TSETUP To close TSETUP and keep your changes press End When TSETUP asks you to confirm your action press Y TSETUP closes with yo
35. other file operations in Windows for Workgroups To start File Manager double click the File Manager icon in Program Man ager s Main program group For information about using File Manager click Help then click Contents Type in the subject you wish to explore or browse through the list of topics provided Running Programs Described in the Guide This guide describes a number of programs that come with your computer Using these programs under Windows for Workgroups is almost the same as using them under Windows 95 This section lists each of the programs describes the differences between the Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups versions and points to the instructions for using them Master Disk Creator Master Disk Creator works as described in Running Master Disk Creator on page 38 with the following exceptions Master Disk Creator also creates program disks for Windows for Workgroups There is no Windows for Workgroups equiva lent for Microsoft s Windows 95 Create System Disks program To start Master Disk Creator double click the Master Disk Creator icon in Program Manager s Toshiba Utilities program group MaxTime MaxTime opens automatically each time you start Windows for Workgroups If MaxTime is not already open double click the MaxTime icon in Program Manager s Toshiba Utilities program group Part III Appendixes Using Windows for Workgroups 469 Running Programs Described in the
36. power connection changes Switch configuration based on hardware profile OK Cancel The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button 373 Usage Disables all automatic switching The system changes configurations only when you select a new configuration from the configuration slider bar refer to The Configuration Slider Bar on page 355 Enables the system to switch configurations when you connect dock or disconnect undock your computer from the optional NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator Selecting this option lets you select the docked configuration name and the undocked configuration name from the two drop down list boxes Enables the system to switch configurations when you change the computer s power source from A C to battery or vice versa Selecting this option lets you select the A C power configuration name and the battery power configuration name from the two drop down list boxes Enables the system to select the configuration based on the current Windows 95 hardware pro file This option appears only if you have multiple Windows 95 hardware profiles on your computer Selecting this option enables the Hardware Profile and TAP Configuration drop down list boxes Select a hardware profile then select the TAP configuration with which you want to associate it Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Part II Technical Reference 374
37. though not quite as sharp as laser output because the ink spreads slightly as it is absorbed by the paper Monochrome inkjet printers are only slightly more expensive than dot matrix printers They are much quieter and they print on stan dard copier type office paper Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Before You Go to a Computer Store 1 3 1 Buying Hardware Color inkjet printers are widely available They work by combin ing cyan magenta and yellow inks to produce a full range of col ors To get a really good black though it s worth choosing a model that has a separate black ink cartridge For printing graphics in color you really need to buy special paper because the amount of ink used causes ordinary paper to wrinkle For low volume use at home an inkjet printer is normally the best choice particularly if you need the ability to print in color Laser Printers These printers use a laser beam to generate an electrostatic charge that attracts toner to a drum which transfers the toner onto paper Because this is a dry process the toner doesn t spread on the paper so the resulting image is very sharp and clear Print resolutions range from 300x300 dpi on budget machines to 1200x1200 dpi which gives almost typeset quality for text Some laser printers have a duplexing feature enabling them to print on both sides of the paper without manual intervention Color laser printers are becoming available but are curren
38. to print the whole topic The program prints to the current printer Before you click Print make sure the printer is on line ready and has paper Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 4 8 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Using the Electronic Guide Changing How the Book Works The Preferences command lets you customize the electronic book s features to meet your preferences Click below to change preferences x Audible Alerts Bookmark Icons Checkpoints Top Icons N Da O aD Text Size Match Color for Find Hi The preferences dialog box Audible Alerts sound for various functions To turn these off click the Audible Alerts option If you would rather not see the Bookmark Icons click here to turn them off If bookmark icons are off click Bookmark to view a list of the bookmarks Checkpoints are dialog boxes that appear when you are about to do something you may not wish to do You can control the size of the text in the book window by clicking the Text Size option The Match Color for Find option changes the color the book uses to highlight the text for which you are searching Reinstalling the Electronic User s Guide If for any reason you need to restore this book to the hard drive you must use the master program diskette that contains the book files For more information about master program diskettes see Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM on page
39. 15 of your hard disk space free for Windows to use in this way If your hard disk is more than 85 full the system will keep crashing as Windows runs out of space for the RAM overflow For optimum performance you need Windows to make as little use of the overflow area as possible The more actual RAM your com puter has the fewer work files will overflow onto the hard disk Normally a Satellite Pro 430 computer is supplied with 16 MB of RAM which is sufficient for most purposes However if you use CAD or DTP software or have a very large database you may find your computer is slower than you d expected If this happens installing more RAM should give you a significant increase in performance Before you rush out and buy a RAM upgrade there is another aspect to consider power consumption RAM chips use a lot of power If you normally run your computer from an AC outlet that isn t a problem But if you travel a lot the extra RAM will mean you need to charge the battery more often In this case ask yourself whether you really need the extra performance If the answer is yes you probably need to buy a battery charger and extra battery packs as well as the memory card Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 29 What s Really Going On How Does a Disk Store Information How Does a Disk Store Information The answer depends on the type of disk Hard Disk and Diskettes Hard disk and diskette drives work in the sam
40. 2 keyboard port and not the PS 2 mouse port on the optional NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator The keyboard locks and the computer will not restart Make sure the power is on and press the reset button The AccuPoint Some of the keyboard conditions listed above may affect the AccuPoint In addition consider the following Your finger slides off the AccuPoint easily The AccuPoint cap may be oily Remove the cap and clean it with a cotton swab dipped in rubbing alcohol Or the cap may have become worn Replace the cap with one of the spares that came with your computer Follow these steps 1 Remove the AccuPoint cap by grasping it firmly and pull ing it straight up The AccuPoint spindle is now visible 2 Position the new cap on the spindle and press it into place Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 32 5 Fixing Device Related Problems The Display Here are some typical display problems and their solutions The display is blank Display Auto Off may have gone into effect Press any key to acti vate the screen You may have activated the instant security feature by pressing Fn F1 If you ve registered a password type it and press Enter If no password is registered simply press Enter The screen reacti vates and allows you to continue working If you re using the built in screen make sure the display priority isn t set for an external monitor To do this press Fn F5 once I
41. 25 04 tei ea aan ET 196 Little Cards that Do Big Things PCMCIA compatible PC Cards greatly increase the capabilities of your computer These cards pack all the performance of full sized expansion boards into a case the size of a credit card There are three types of PC Cards Type I Type II and Type II The difference between each type is the card size Your computer comes with two stacked PC Card slots that let you install up to two Type I or Type II cards or one Type III card Type IH cards are much thicker When you buy a PC Card check the package for the Type of card you re buying Your computer s PC Card slots are Zoomed Video ZV ready allowing you to use PC Cards that comply with this standard 189 1 90 Little Cards that Do Big Things What Do PC Cards Do This chapter describes the different types of PC Cards tells you how to install PC Cards and provides general tips on using them Since each card is different you ll have to read your cards docu mentation to use the card but this chapter will help you get started If your PC Card came with a diskette read Programs that Make Your PC Card Work on page 192 before installing any of its programs The programs on the diskette may conflict with the built in Windows 95 drivers CAUTION What Do PC Cards Do New PC Cards are being introduced every day Among the PC Cards currently available are Modems and fax modems Network adapters Ha
42. 4 Connecting to the World Discovering Toshiba s On line Resources Most computer companies offer a BBS as one way to provide customers with software updates and answers to their questions Toshiba s 24 hour BBS offers Toshiba computing information and is a good source of Toshiba utilities files and technical bulletins Complete information about accessing Toshiba s BBS is found in Toshiba s Bulletin Board Service on page 340 To access a BBS you ll need an all purpose communications pro gram such as Hyperterminal provided with Windows 95 See the following section for information about using all purpose commu nications programs Discovering Toshiba s On line Resources In addition to the Toshiba Internet sites listed under WWW Sites on page 220 Toshiba maintains a number of on line sites to which you can connect These sites can provide information about Toshiba products help with technical questions and keep you up to date with future upgrades On CompuServe type go toshiba To access Toshiba s BBS set your modem to N81 and call 714 837 4408 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting to the World 2 2 5 Discovering Toshiba s On line Resources Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 10 Using an External Monitor a 0 lt 2 lt aw se taeeeee weer eeeness 227 Using an External Keyboard cece eeeceeeeces 230 Using a Serial Mouse Ss veseytshciceite came tee ee Oates 232 si
43. 8 bit Enhanced Capability Port ECP compliant port providing increased performance when you re using an ECP compatible parallel device Integrated 30 watt autosensing AC power supply input voltage 100 240V AC 50 60Hz Removable rechargeable Li Ion battery pack Nickel metal hydride NiMH battery provides power for special memory features such as Resume Mode NiMH battery provides power for the internal real time clock and calendar Detects low battery charge and displays the time remaining Saves battery power by automatically turning off the display hard disk and system when they have not been accessed for a set length of time Storage Capacity 3 1 2 external diskette drive Hard disk Ports Parallel Serial IrDA Monitor PS 2 NoteDock Features and Specifications 4 39 Built in Features Accommodates both 1 44MB high density 2HD and 720KB double density 2DD diskettes 2 1 2 inch integrated Enhanced IDE drive and controller provides non volatile storage for 1 35 billion bytes 1 26 gigabytes Selectable ECP compatible parallel port that provides a Centronics compatible connection to a printer or other parallel output or bi directional device 9 pin RS 232 C compatible high speed buffered UART serial port lets you connect an external modem mouse serial printer or other serial device Serial infrared port supports 115k transfer rate 15 pin analog SVGA port lets you connect an
44. Display Mode Click the Settings tab to move to the Settings page Change the number of colors the display can show by changing the Color palette setting Setting the palette to High Color 16 bit provides 64k colors True Color 24 bit provides 16 million colors Some color modes and resolutions are available only on an external mon itor See Video Modes on page 457 for the modes available on the internal display Change the screen resolution by clicking and dragging the Desktop area slider To change your monitor type click Change Display Type set the new monitor type and click Change When you ve made all your changes click OK To close the Display Properties dialog box without enabling your changes click Cancel The internal display uses virtual display modes to simulate resolu tions beyond its capacity In a virtual display mode the display shows all of the screen image it can To see the rest of the screen image scroll down and to the right Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 2 89 Changing the Display Mode Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 13 What Is a Computer o ai seee teases epekaaeaesores 291 How Does a Disk Store Information 294 How Does the Screen Display Information 296 What about the Batteries 2 Uaguteoniewawe ad os eg eee esi 299 Power Management n n eee eee Bee the ed ct eas 300 What Really Happens W
45. Finding ways to break up the routine can reduce stress and improve your efficiency Take frequent breaks to change position stretch your muscles and relieve your eyes Avoid performing repetitive activities for prolonged periods of time Vary activities from one task to another Focusing your eyes on your computer screen for long periods of time can cause eye strain Look away from the computer frequently and focus your eyes on a distant object Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 6 Finding Your Way around the System Find Out Where Everything s Located Find Out Where Everything s Located If you ve never used a notebook computer before you re probably wondering how an entire computer can fit into so small a case The next few pages take you on a guided tour of the computer and its components Rather than reading through this section you may prefer to use it as a reference as you move through the remainder of the guide and need to locate specific parts of the computer This information is also available in the electronic form of this guide described in Using the Electronic Guide on page 41 Don t worry if you don t know what some parts of the computer do Some items in this tour are for more advanced computing functions that you may want to use as your computing needs and skills increase The Front with the Display Closed Headphone jack Speaker Display latch i J Volume control dia
46. Found dialog box prompting you to set up your PC card Follow the instructions on the screen to set up your PC Card If Windows 95 doesn t detect your card automatically follow these steps 1 Click the My Computer icon with the secondary button Windows 95 opens the System Properties dialog box Click the Device Manager tab to access the Device Manager page The Device Manager page should list a PCMCIA socket If it doesn t return to the Control Panel double click the Add New Hardware icon and follow the instructions on the screen to add a PCMCIA socket controller Click the to the left of the PCMCIA Socket icon in Device Manager Device Manager lists the controller s The controller icon s will appear in one of the following ways gt Ifthe icon appears normally PC Card support is set up cor rectly Close the System Properties dialog box and Control Panel K Ww If there is a red X over the icon you need to set up the PC Card drivers Continue with the remainder of this section K Ww If there is a yellow exclamation point over the icon you need to configure the PC Card drivers Continue with the remainder of this section Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box and return to the Control Panel Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 96 Little Cards that Do Big Things Removing a PC Card 6 Double click the PC Card PCMCIA icon Windows 95 opens the PCMCIA Wizard
47. Getting To Know Your Computer 296 What s Really Going On How Does the Screen Display Information The measures of performance are Transfer rate the speed with which the drive can transfer data to the host PC Seek time the time taken to move the laser read head to a par ticular part of the CD For small files which are read directly from the buffer transfer rates are high But the speed drops once the buffer overflows Although a CD ROM is no match for a hard disk drive in terms of transfer rate and seek time it is faster than a diskette Also it holds afar greater amount of data than a diskette 640 MB against 1 44 MB That means it can hold a complete set of programs a catalog or a multimedia encyclopedia A typical integrated suite of pro grams for the office takes approximately 30 diskettes but it fits comfortably onto a CD How Does the Screen Display Information Your computer s built in screen is a liquid crystal display LCD panel There are two types STN Super Twist Nematic and TFT Thin Film Transistor TFT screens provide richer colors Also if you need to give presentations to one or two people they are a bet ter choice because the screen is easier to read at an angle and in natural light For presentations to larger groups you need to con nect an external monitor to your computer However TFT screens are more expensive that STN screens and consume more power Both types of screen wor
48. Hard disk first then floppy disk p Start Up Mode Boot Resume BD Omo pend when panel closes ope TOSHIBA Cancel aoa Defauts The Start Up Options page The options on this page control how the system starts Option Start Up Sequence Settings Floppy disk first then hard disk Hard disk first then floppy disk Part IT Technical Reference Usage Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage The Toshiba System Control Panel 397 The Power On Timer Page Determines whether the system looks for the operating system first on the hard disk or the diskette drive floppy drive when you turn the computer on This option is equivalent to the Boot Priority option in TSETUP Start Up Mode Boot Resume Turns Resume Mode on and off This option is equivalent to the Power up Mode option in TSETUP Trigger suspend resume when panel closes opens Enabled check Disabled no check Turns the computer on or off when you open or close its display panel This option is available only when Resume Mode is turned on This option is equivalent to the Panel Power On Off option in TSETUP The Power On Timer Page Start Up Options Power on Timer Securit iy Miscell laneous i on o TOSHIBA Cancel Apply Defaults The Power On Timer page This page lets you set the system to turn on automatically at a
49. IRQ7 Not Used Sets the serial port name through which your communications software sends output to the serial port Y Infrared Port COM 3F8H IRQ4 default COM2 2F8H IRQ3 COM3 3E8H IRQ4 COM3 3E8H IRQS COM3 3E8H IRQ7 COM4 2E8H IRQ3 COM4 2E8H IRQS COM4 2E8H IRQ7 Not Used Part IT Technical Reference 410 rors Usage Sets the IrDA port name that your transfer program uses to send and receive information Restart Y Option Parallel Port Settings LPT1 378H IRQ7 default LPT2 278H IRQ5 LPT3 3BCH IRQ7 Not Used Usage Sets the parallel port name through which the computer communi cates with the parallel port Restart Y If you set the Parallel Port to anything other than Not Used a drop down list box appears allowing you to set the Parallel Port Mode to either ECP the default or Standard Bi directional Use ECP for ECP compatible devices If your device operates incorrectly while this option is set to ECP try changing the option to Bi directional If you choose ECP as the Parallel Port Mode this list box also lets you set the DMA Direct Memory Address option The available settings are Channel 1 Channel 2 and Channel 3 Option Sound System Settings Address IRQ DMA Disabled Usage Lets you select a unique I O address an Interrupt Request IRQ number and a Direct Memory Address DMA channel for the sound system or to disable it Restart Y Part IT
50. Performance Power Settings Power Usage Details Hard Disk Auto Off Display Auto Off System Auto Off Processing Speed Sleep Mode Display Brightness Cooling Mode TOSHIBA Cancel poy Her The Power Settings page This page controls the power usage mode and the custom settings for both battery and external power usage Option Power Settings Settings Battery External Usage Lets you choose the power source for which you are selecting power usage settings Part II Technical Reference Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage The MaxTime Control Panel 3 89 The Power Settings Page Power Usage Mode Full Power default Low Power Custom Settings Allows you to select a preset battery save mode or customize the battery save options For more information about choosing a power usage mode see The Easy Way Choosing a Power Usage Mode on page 151 Hard Disk Auto Off 1 Min 3 Min Low Power default 5 Min 10 Min 15 Min 20 Min 30 Min Full Power default Turns the hard disk drive off if it is not used for the time selected For more information see Hard Disk Auto Off HDD Auto Off on page 155 Display Auto Off 1 Min 3 Min Low Power default 5 Min 10 Min 15 Min 20 Min 30 Min Disabled Full Power default Turns the display off if
51. Programs Windows 95 makes installing programs onto your computer s hard disk easy Most programs come with an installation program on diskette or CD ROM By following the steps in this section you ll ensure that your installation program installs the program files completely and sets them up to run with Windows 95 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Before You Go to a Computer Store Buying Programs 1 Ol To install a new program in Windows 95 follow these steps 1 2 Click Start then click Settings Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel Double click the Add Remove Programs icon Windows 95 opens the Add Remove Programs Properties dia log box Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To install a new program from a floppy disk or CD ROM rive click Install Microsof ft Office Q juickTutors for Windows 95 oK Cancel The Add Remove Programs Properties dialog box 4 Click the Install Uninstall tab The Install Uninstall page moves to the front Click Install Insert the program s installation diskette or CD ROM into the drive If you re installing a program from diskette and your diskette drive is not installed in the SelectBay connect the external dis kette drive or swap drives in the SelectBay To swap drives see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 Click Next Part I Getting To Know Your
52. Technical Reference Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart vororrs 411 The following sound system options are in a drop down list box that appears when you highlight Address IRQ DMA for the Sound System option 1 0 Address 220H default 230H 240H 250H Lets you assign a unique Input Output I O address to the sound system Y Interrupt Level IRQS IRQ7 IRQ9 IRQ10 default Allows you to assign a unique interrupt level to the sound system Y DMA Channel Channel 0 Channel 1 default Channel 3 Lets you assign a unique Direct Memory Address DMA channel to the sound system Y Part IT Technical Reference 412 TSETUP OTHERS OTHERS Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart This group allows you to set many other configuration options Whether or not you need to use these options depends primarily on the software and devices you use Power up Mode Resume Boot default Alternates between Resume Mode and Boot Mode N CPU Cache Enabled default Disabled Improves system performance Disable this option only if your software or optional devices require you to do so If you set the CPU Cache to Enabled a drop down box lets you choose between Write back default and Write through Write back prov
53. The Gauge Gallery 2 To add a gauge to the dashboard simply click on the gauge in the Gauge Gallery and drag it onto the dashboard sec tion of the panel The Toshiba Access Panel displays a shortcut menu prompt ing you to choose whether to add the gauge to all configura tions or just the current configuration 3 To add the gauge to the dashboard for all configurations click Add to All To add the gauge to your current configuration only click the second menu item for example if you re currently using the Home configuration click Add to Home 4 Toremove a gauge from the dashboard click it with the secondary button The Toshiba Access Panel displays a shortcut menu 5 To remove the gauge from the dashboard for all configura tions click Remove from All To remove the gauge from your current configuration only click Remove from Home Office Travel The dashboard shows the gauge s you selected Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 4 1 Running the Computer on Battery Power Removing the Dashboard from the Toshiba Access Panel Perhaps you prefer to work with the Toshiba Access Panel hidden but still want to monitor your current battery charge using the dashboard battery gauges If so you can easily remove the dash board from the Toshiba Access Panel so the gauges display in their own window To view the dashboard battery gauges separately from the Toshiba Access Panel
54. URL or you can click a hypertext link indicated by a different color of text or some other obvious means and jump to the con necting page Mail servers store and forward electronic mail e mail In many ways e mail works like regular mail but it can be much faster and more convenient Part I Getting To Know Your Computer DEFINITION K kod K Kod K Ww K Ww K Ww K Kod Connecting to the World 2 3 The Internetand Other Fascinating Places FTP sites store computer files You can download files from an FTP site For example many computer companies distribute minor upgrades to their programs through FTP sites When you download a file you copy the file from another computer or an FTP site to your computer Usenet sites maintain newsgroups which are lists of messages dedicated to a particular topic Subscribers to a newsgroup can read and respond to messages posted by others and post mes sages of their own LISTSERV sites administer mailing lists which are lists of people who are interested in the same topics Individuals send their message to the centralized LISTSERV site The LIST SERV server broadcasts the message to all the members of the mailing list This way one person can correspond with lots of people all at once Mailing lists are different from news groups in that you receive all messages automatically Chat sites allow people to talk in real time Whereas you send you
55. World 21 5 The Internetand Other Fascinating Places The second type of address is the Universal Resource Locator URL used to locate specific sites on the Internet A sample URL is http aaa bbb ccc dir I dir2 dir3 page where http aaa bbb ccc dd dir L dir2 dir3 page is the type of server the client is requesting HTTP stands for Hypertext Transfer Pro tocol and indicates a site on the WWW Other server types you might see ina URL include FTP File Transfer Protocol and NNTP Network News Transfer Protocol is the host aaa optional subdomain bbb and domain ccc of the server where the information is stored Country code dd is optional and usually indicates a server outside the USA For example addresses ending in ca are in Canada is the folder directory on the host com puter in which the information is located the name of the page or file WWW pages usually end in htm or html If no page is specified the browser displays a file called index html which is usually the home page ina WWW site or a list of files in an FTP site Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 1 Connecting to the World Logging On to an On line Service or the Internet Etiquette On line When you use the internet it s important to remember that you re dealing with people You should give other people and local cus toms the same respect on line as you would face to face Keep the following points in
56. Your CD ROMs Customizing CD ROM Registration To customize the registration process follow these steps 1 Click the Options button on the main or rack screen The Registration Options dialog box displays with the CD Inspector page selected Click the CD Registration tab to move to the CD Registration page Registration Options CD Inspector CD Registration Media Players Data CDs Audio COs Photo CDs Audio CD Current Categories Classical Contemporary New Category Cancel pl Help The CD Registration page 3 Choose one type of CD ROM to display the current categories for that type Change the list of categories as necessary To remove a category select it and click the Remove button To add a category click the Add Category button Click OK to close the Registration Options dialog box with your settings in effect Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 186 The Wide World of Multimedia Managing Your CD ROMs Customizing the Media Player Setting a default media player lets you change or upgrade the media player for all CD ROMs of a specific type rather than changing the AutoStart settings for each individual CD ROM Setting the default media player only affects an individual CD ROM if AutoStart is set to Default Media Player in the CD ROM s registration information To set the default media player for each type of CD ROM
57. a few seconds before turning the computer back on Starting the Computer in Resume Mode To start your computer when you are using Resume Mode follow these steps 1 2 Turn on any external devices connected to the computer Press the power button and hold it until the power speed light comes on The system starts and displays the same screen as when you turned off the power If the system displays the WARNING RESUME FAILURE mes sage when you turn the computer back on in Resume Mode the computer s backup battery is probably discharged This may happen if you ve had the computer turned off for a long time Since the backup battery receives its charge from the battery pack you ll need to charge the main battery first then wait approximately seven hours for the backup battery to charge completely Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 8 5 How to Adjust the Display How to Adjust the Display MaxTime Where you use the computer affects how easily you can see the images on the display panel For example the display panel may be more difficult to read outdoors in full sunlight than in a dimly lit room Adjusting the display panel angle often helps but you may also need to adjust the display brightness On the Satellite Pro 430CDS and the Satellite Pro 435CDS you can adjust the contrast of the display by rotating the contrast con trol dial on the right side of the display panel The Satellite Pro 430C
58. a printer or other parallel device including ECP compatible devices For more information see Connecting a Parallel Printer on page 24 The NoteDock port allows you to connect the optional NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator The NoteDock Enhanced Port Replica tor provides all the ports of the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer plus a PS 2 keyboard port PS 2 mouse port line out jack joy stick MIDI port and two additional type HI PC Card slots For more information see Using the Optional NoteDock on page 235 Keep foreign objects away from this port Pins and other small objects can slip inside the port and damage computer circuitry The power socket is where you plug in the power cord For more information see Connect to a Power Source on page 15 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer CAUTION Finding Your Way around the System 9 Find Out Where Everything s Located The CPU fan prevents the computer s central processing unit CPU from overheating so it can continue to perform at its maximum speed To prevent possible overheating of the CPU make sure you don t block the fan 5 The PS 2 port provides access to an optional external PS 2 com patible mouse or keyboard You can attach an optional Y cable that allows you to use a PS 2 mouse and a PS 2 keyboard simultaneously The Right Side Contrast control dial CD ROM eject button Manual eject button Battery rele
59. a resolution of 200x200 dpi For photocopying the lower resolution is offset by the use of plain paper so the copies don t curl and fade For scanning the resolution is adequate for text But you need a dedicated high resolution scanner for image editing work Port Replicator The NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator enables you to connect your Satellite Pro 430 notebook to your printer and other external devices in one simple operation Besides duplicating all the ports on your computer the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator provides two PC Card slots Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Before You Go to a Computer Store 1 33 Buying Hardware Tips on Buying Hardware If a device is cheaper than you think it should be it may be an older version On the other hand depending on your needs an older version may suit you just fine Check the warranty and support policy Make sure the device is supported by Windows 95 or that Windows 95 drivers are provided with the device If you have access to the Internet check the World Wide Web and relevant newsgroups for information about the product Access Toshiba s BBS or the Toshiba Forum on CompuServe refer to Contacting Toshiba on page 338 for instructions and search for information about using the new hardware with your computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 6 Toshiba s Energy Saver Design 000eeeeeee eee 135 Running the C
60. a sys tem diskette into the diskette drive and press F10 while you turn the power on The computer displays the WARNING RESUME FAILURE message The backup battery is discharged To charge the backup battery plug the computer in and turn it on for about seven hours The computer displays the Non System disk or disk error message Make sure there is no diskette in the diskette drive If there is one remove it and press any key to continue If pressing any key does not work press Ctr Alt Del or press the reset button to restart the computer If the problem persists try restarting the computer with the Toshiba Companion Disk or another reliable system disk in the diskette drive Windows 95 Isn t Working Once you are familiar with the desktop and used to the way Windows 95 responds to your work routine you can easily detect if Windows 95 isn t working correctly For example K Ww Windows 95 fails to start after the Starting Windows 95 message displays K Ww Windows 95 takes a long time to start 1 Ww Windows 95 responds differently from the normal routine K Ww Your display doesn t look right Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 1 0 If Something Goes Wrong Windows 95 Isn t Working Unless a hardware device has failed problems usually occur when you change the system configuration add a device install a new program or do something that changes the system s established routine
61. accessed the hard disk for the time selected System Auto Off This option saves power by turning the computer off if it hasn t been used for a selected period of time This option is available only if Resume Mode is turned on You have seven choices Disabled leaves the computer on until you use the power but ton to turn it off og 10 Min 20 Min 30 Min 40 Min 50 Min and 60 Min turn the computer off if you haven t used it for the time selected Display Brightness LCD Brightness This option saves power by reducing the brightness of the com puter s display You have two choices eg Semi bright reduces the brightness of the display Bright sets the display to its maximum brightness Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 56 Taking Your Computer on the Road Looking After Your Battery Cooling Mode Cooling Method If the computer s central processing unit CPU starts to overheat the CPU fan provides additional cooling to the CPU This option lets you control how active the CPU fan is in cooling the processor chip oni Performance uses the fan to cool the processor chip maintain ing maximum system performance If the fan turns on fre quently you may want to set this option to Quiet to conserve battery life Quiet cools the system by reducing processing speed first If the system remains too hot the system turns on Resume Mode and shuts down automatically Looking After Your Battery It doesn t take mu
62. alarm message If you enable the alarm message you can choose the sound that occurs when the alarm message appears No Sound Play System Beep or Play wav file For more information about setting the battery alarms refer to Setting the Alarms on page 143 The Miscellaneous Page Power Settings Battery Alarms Miscellaneous Automatically adjust the Power Usage Mode Power Source Change s Select the action to take when a power source change occurs Prompt to adjust the Power Usage Mode Power Source Indicator Use the Power Source Indicator to tell you the computer s current P power source battery or extemal power and for quick access to ZY MaxTime Z Enable the power source indicator on the Windows 95 taskbar TOSHIBA Cancel col __Heb The Miscellaneous page This page controls the following options Option Power Source Change Settings Automatically adjust the Power Usage Mode Prompt to adjust the Power Usage Mode Usage Controls how the system behaves when you change the computer from battery power to AC power or vice versa Part IT Technical Reference The MaxTime Control Panel 39 3 The Miscellaneous Page Option Enable the power source indicator on the Windows 95 taskbar Settings Enabled check Disabled no check Usage Turns the Toshiba power source indicator on the taskbar on and off Part IT Technical R
63. all there is to it Windows Explorer closes removing its button from the taskbar 2 Close Paint and any other windows folders or programs that might be open by clicking their close buttons You can close all folders programs documents and most win dows by clicking the close button on the title bar Now that you know how to close programs and folders go on to the next lesson to learn how to save time when you are working on the desktop Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 6 4 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 8 Creating Shortcuts Lesson 8 Creating Shortcuts By adding shortcuts to your desktop you can open programs or files with the click of a button You ll probably want to create shortcuts for the programs you use most frequently This lesson explains how to create shortcuts to two Windows 95 accessories Calculator and Character Map To create a shortcut follow these steps 1 Move the pointer to an empty area of the desktop and click the secondary button Windows 95 displays the desktop shortcut menu Click New then click Create Shortcut Windows 95 displays the Create Shortcut dialog box In the Command line box type c windows calc exe and click Next Windows 95 prompts you to select a name for the shortcut Type Calculator and click Finish Windows 95 displays the new shortcut on your desktop Now assume you want to create a shortcut but don t know the location of the program Click Start t
64. are prepared should a problem occur Save your work frequently You can never predict when your computer will lock forcing you to close a program and lose unsaved changes Many software pro grams build in an automatic backup but you shouldn t rely solely on this feature Save your work See How to Save Your Work on page 90 for instructions Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 3 Develop Good Computing Habits On a regular basis back up the information stored on your hard disk Here are a few ways you can do this Copy files to disk in Windows 95 following the steps in How to Copy Something to a Diskette on page 103 or How to Back Up Your Work on page 104 Connect a tape drive to the system and use specialized soft ware to copy everything on the hard disk to a tape Some people use a combination of these methods backing up all files to tape weekly and copying critical files to disk on a daily basis If you ve installed your own programs you should back up your programs as well as your data files If something goes wrong that requires you to format your hard disk and start over reloading all your programs and data files from a backup will save time Read the manuals It s very difficult to provide a fail safe set of steps you can follow every time you experience a problem with the computer Your ability to solve problems will improve as you learn about how the
65. automatically For more information see Determining the COM Port on page 206 3 Install the communications program This may be a general purpose communications program or one supplied by a specific service provider For more informa tion see Connecting to a Telephone Line on page 207 4 Sign up If you re planning to use an on line service or the Internet you ll need to register with a provider For more information see Etiquette On line on page 216 Setting Up To communicate with the outside world you ll need A modem see the next section for information A telephone line Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting ete 20 1 A communications program see What Software Do You Need on page 212 if you re planning on using an on line ser vice or the Internet or Connecting Directly to Another Com puter on page 222 for information about general communications programs K Ww If you re planning on using the Internet you II need an Internet service provider ISP see Etiquette On line on page 216 Choosing a Modem A modem converts the digital signals from a computer into the analog signals required by a voice grade telephone line Two types of modems work with your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer You can use either A PCMCIA compatible PC Card modem that slips into one of your computer s PC Card sockets PC Cards that support the cell
66. book Cross References The topic you located using the Index Contents or Find may still not be the one you are looking for but as you read the text a cross reference may point you to the section you need Cross references are shown in green underlined text To view a cross reference follow these steps 1 Position the pointer over the cross reference The pointer changes to a pointing hand symbol Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 44 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Using the Electronic Guide Satellite Pro 430 Series Electronic User s Guide Contents Index Find Go Back Hist Hell TOSHIBA S20 Back n tee _ Bookmark Copy Print Preferences Exit ma Satellite Pro 430 Series User s Guide Bea Chapter 1 Finding Your Way aound the System ip ing y st Chapter 1 P Finding Your Way around the System You ve bought your new computer and taken everything out of the box Now you may be asking yourself OK what do I do Well this chapter helps you set up your computer gives you tips on working comfortably and takes you on a tour of the computer s features Make Sure You Have Everything Cross references Select a Place To Work Find Out Where Everything s Located Using a cross reference 2 Click the cross reference The program displays the section that contains the information relating to the cross reference you selected When you have finished reading the cro
67. box click OK Going the Critical Battery Alarm When you re getting fairly low on battery power the system beeps once and displays the Critical Battery Alarm warning This means you have less than 10 battery capacity remaining To set the level of charge that sets off this warning see Setting the Alarms on page 143 MaxTime Battery Alarm GEA Warning Your computer s battery is critically low toh Only 10 of your total battery capacity remains The Critical Battery Alarm warning When this alarm goes off start planning your remaining battery time carefully Think about what you absolutely must do before you either find a place to plug in the power cord or turn the com puter off To close the alarm dialog box click OK Gone the Emergency Battery Alert Now it s serious When the battery runs down and you have only about five minutes of time left the computer starts beeping continuously Part I Getting To Know Your Computer MaxTime Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 43 Running the Computer on Battery Power When you reach this point plug the computer into a live power outlet or save all your files and turn the computer off immediately Doing this ensures that you won t lose any work If you don t manage to plug the computer in or turn it off before the battery completely runs out of power the computer automati cally enters Resume Mode more fully described on page 145 and turns itsel
68. by choosing the Browse button U You cannot browse an audio CD ROM You can only browse the CD ROM you selected in the rack if it is the same as the one in the drive See Looking at and Playing the Files on a CD ROM on page 181 Install the CD ROM by choosing the Install button You can K Ww m ade only install the CD ROM you selected in the rack if it is the 529 same as the one in the drive See Installing Programs from a CD ROM on page 183 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 8 1 Managing Your CD ROMs Locating a CD ROM If you have a large number of CD ROMs you can set the rack to show only one type of CD ROM only those CD ROMs in a par ticular category or those CD ROMs whose description contain one or more key words All of these options are available through the CD Rack menu as described below To show all your CD ROMs click Display All CDs on the CD Rack menu To show only one type of CD ROM click Display type CDs only on the CD Rack menu where type is Data Audio or Photo K Ww To show all the CD ROMs in one or more categories choosing Search by Category from the CD Rack menu opens the Search by Category dialog box Select the desired category or categories from the list and click OK 1 Ww To display those CD ROMs whose descriptions use a key word choosing Search by Text from the CD Rack menu opens the Search for Text dialog box Enter on
69. computer The power connector that provides power to the computer when you connect the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator to a power source K kod The guide pins that help align the computer with the Note Dock Enhanced Port Replicator ensuring a proper connection Connecting the Computer to the NoteDock To attach the computer to the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replica tor follow these steps 1 Turn the computer off 2 Remove all cables from the back of the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Using Your Computer on Your Desk 2 39 Using the Optional NoteDock Guide pin Attaching the computer to the NoteDock 3 Lift the locking latch on the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator 4 Align the two holes on the bottom of the computer with the guide pins on the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator 5 Gently press the locking latch down The computer slides into place and connects to the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator 6 Attach the power cord to the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator s power socket 7 Connect the power cord to a wall socket Disconnecting the Computer from the NoteDock To disconnect the computer from the NoteDock turn the com puter s power off lift the locking latch and remove the computer Remember to life the back of the computer straight up to avoid damaging the guide pins on the NoteDock Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 40 Using Your Computer on Your Desk Using t
70. computer and its software work together Get familiar with all the manuals provided with your computer as well as the manuals that come with the programs and devices you purchase Your local computer store or book store sells a variety of self help books you can use to supplement the information in the manuals If problem solving is taking a long time take a break If you ve been fighting to solve a problem for a long period of time you re probably frustrated by now Stand up and take a deep breath Often you can find a new solution to a problem just by stepping away from it for a few moments Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 3 8 If Something Goes Wrong If You Need Further Assistance If You Need Further Assistance If you have followed the recommendations in this chapter and are still having problems you may need additional technical assis tance This section contains the steps to take to ask for help Before You Call Since some problems may be related to the operating system or the program you re using it s important to investigate other sources of assistance first Try the following before contacting Toshiba Review the troubleshooting information in your Windows 95 documentation Ifthe problem occurs while you are running a program con sult the program s documentation for troubleshooting sugges tions Contact the software company s technical support group for their assistance K Ww
71. diskette drive test you see a prompt that asks you to insert a disk into each drive you want to test Insert a formatted write enabled diskette into each drive s This test may destroy all information on the diskettes Make sure there is no information you want to keep on the diskettes you use To skip this test and return to the diagnostics menu press Ctrl Pause After you insert the diskette s in the drive s press Enter The test begins and displays this message FLOPPY DISK IN PROGRESS 503000 If an error occurs the test displays the ABORTED message Write down the highlighted numbers and return to the main menu by pressing Ctrl Pause If a diskette drive fails the test check the following fo Does the drive contain a diskette K Ww Is the diskette properly formatted K Ww Is the diskette write enabled K Ww Is the diskette undamaged Repeat the test with another diskette If the test displays the ABORTED message again see your dealer If the test completes successfully and you selected the hard disk test the diagnostic test begins checking the hard disk If you did not select the hard disk or printer test the diskette drive test con cludes by displaying the TDIAGS screen To exit TDIAGS go to Exiting the Diagnostic Menus on page 432 Part IT Technical Reference 43 Hard Disk 1 CAUTION Printer The Diagnostic Test Test Sequence If the diskette drive s tes
72. double click the folder icon Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 59 Lesson 5 Starting Programs A window opens and displays the contents of the folder including your document icon 8 Close the window by clicking its close button Lesson 5 Starting Programs After you ve gained some experience and added some programs of your own you ll know exactly which program to use for a par ticular task This lesson teaches you how to start programs from the desktop using two of the programs built into Windows 95 Follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Programs Windows 95 displays a list of program folders 2 Point to Accessories then click Paint Windows 95 opens Paint a simple drawing program File Edit View Image Options Help For Help click Help Topics on the Help Menu 109 389 A Start E My Computer G untitled Paint Ge 1 57AM The desktop with Paint open Your desktop now looks something like the above illustration Notice again the new addition to the taskbar Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 6 0 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 5 Starting Programs 3 To open a second program click Start then click Programs 4 Click Windows Explorer Windows 95 opens the Windows Explorer and adds another button to the taskbar Fe untitled Paint File
73. edge of the desktop TOSHIBA al Dashboard tear off button Configuration button Gauge x S Dashboard E Splitter Application icons Options button Help button The Toshiba Access Panel The preceding illustration identifies the sections of the Toshiba Access Panel Follow these steps to explore some of the panel s features 1 To move the panel from the right side of the desktop to the left side click the panel and while holding the primary button drag the panel to the new position When the panel is where you want it release the primary but ton You can place it on the right or left sides of the desktop only Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 7 1 Lesson 12 Exploring the Toshiba Access Panel The Toshiba Access Panel allows you to set up separate con figurations to use while you re at home at the office or travel ing For example if you use the battery while traveling and the power cord when you re at the office you could set up a travel configuration that turns on the computer s battery saving fea tures and an office configuration that turns those features off You keep track of which configuration you re using by looking at the icon on the configuration button 2 Tochange which configuration you re using click the con figuration button Office configuration Home configuration Travel configuration The confi
74. few letters of the word you re looking for 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display 12 hour clock changing to 2 to indicator stalling support for Conca The Help window on the Index page Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 7 4 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 13 If m Lost What Do I Do Most of the window contains a list of topics The upper part of the window where the pointer is flashing lets you type in a topic 3 Type picture Notice as you type that the topic list adjusts to locate what you typed When you type the letter p the topic list moves to the first entry that begins with P etc There are a number of topics listed under picture One of them drawing looks promising 4 Double click drawing Help opens a topic window that explains briefly how to draw pictures and includes an icon to start the Paint program Windows Help oix Fop roes ees mions Using Paint to create pictures You can use Paint to create edit and view pictures You can paste a Paint picture into another document you ve created or use it as your desktop background You can even use Paint to view and edit scanned photos gt To start Paint click here L For information about how to use Paint click the Help menu in Paint The Drawing help window 5 Click the click here icon Windows 95 opens the Paint progr
75. follow these steps 1 Click the Options button on the main or rack screen The Registration Options dialog box displays with the CD Inspector page selected 2 Click the Media Player tab to move to the Media Player page Registration Options CD Inspector I CD Registration Media Players Command Line S Browse Working Dir C WINDOWS Applications Audio CD Player Command Line MPLAYER EXE Browse Working Dir C WINDOWS Applications Photo CD Viewer Command Line Browse Working Dir Applications Cancel ap Help The Media Player page Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 87 Managing Your CD ROMs 3 Enter the Application name and Working Directory for the player of each type of CD ROM Data Audio and Photo You may use the Browse or Applications buttons to locate and select the desired media player 4 Click OK to close the Registration Options dialog box with your settings in effect Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter O What Do PC Cards DO i 4 442 vo ew nee aa s 190 Cards You Can Buy From Toshiba 06 191 Programs that Make Your PC Card Work 4 192 HOLS Wapplne a s 24484 os tA eh ametawer eee A Aes 193 Inserting PC Cards icvee teeta rnana be awe ee eee ceed aa 193 Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer 194 Removine aPC Card x4 lt 5
76. follow these steps Loop The Noteworthy Computer Lock 1 Loop the cable through or around some part of a heavy object Make sure there is no way for a potential thief to slip the cable off of the object 2 Pass the locking end through the loop ra i Security lock slot M rerea Locking end Key Inserting the locking end into the security lock slot Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 42 Using Your Computer on Your Desk Applying Physical Restraints 3 Insert the cable s locking end into the security lock slot on the left side of the computer 4 Turn the key a quarter turn and remove it The computer is securely locked If you re using an optional NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator you ll want to purchase two of these cables one for the computer and another for the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Using Your Computer on Your Desk 2 4 3 Applying Physical Restraints Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 11 Usnea Password 234 45 64 gedai e EEA RRA RENTE es Viruses and How to Cure Them 05 Keeping Your Files Safe At some time you ll almost certainly have files on your computer that you want to keep private Your Satellite Pro 430 Series com puter comes with several options that can help you keep your com puter and files safe from unwanted intrusion This chapter describes the security options for your notebook computer
77. icon you want to use click OK to exit the dialog box with the change in effect 8 Click OK to close the Configuration Properties dialog box Click Close to close the Configuration Management dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 26 3 Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Choosing When to Automatically Change Configurations The computer can change configurations automatically under these conditions When using AC power C7 When using battery power K When using a specific Windows 95 hardware configuration if multiple configurations exist To define when you want the configuration change to occur 1 In the Configuration Management dialog box click Advanced The Advanced Configuration Management dialog box opens JS You can choose to switch configurations ly on de ower state automatically on docking or power stat hanges Disable automatic configuration switching The Advanced Configuration Management dialog box 2 Select the appropriate setting Choose Disable automatic configuration switching if you plan to change the configuration yourself by clicking the configuration button on the Toshiba Access Panel Choose one of the other settings to cause the system to change configurations automatically 3 Click OK to close the Advanced Configuration Manage ment dialog box 4 Click Close to close the Confi
78. in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight Additional Power Options Depending on the amount of time you spend away from external power sources the capacity of one battery pack may be sufficient for your needs However if you need more portable power Toshiba provides two options You can buy extra battery packs You can buy a battery charger that charges more than one bat tery at a time Additional Battery Packs Extend Battery Time Having one or more extra batteries gives you the opportunity to replace a discharged battery with a charged spare This can greatly increase the amount of time you can work without having to find a power outlet Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 158 Taking Your Computer on the Road How about a Carrying Case Charging More than One Battery at a Time CAUTION The optional battery charger provides an easy way for you to take more than one charged battery with you when you travel You can charge up to two spares at a time in the battery charger while con tinuing to work on the computer Don t leave batteries in the battery charger for more than a week at a time Doing so may reduce the potential charge of the battery Use only Toshiba battery chargers to charge your battery packs You can order a Toshiba battery charger through the Toshiba Accessories Catalog Charging the Computer s Battery in Your Car The optional Noteworthy automobile power adapter lets you plug the c
79. interrupt the meeting Later at home you may want the alarms to sound at full volume If you ve customized your office and home configurations with this in mind all you need to do when you arrive at your meeting is click the office configuration button and you re ready to take notes without fear of interruption Perhaps you always use the power cord to power the computer when you re at home or at the office In both places you have no need for the power usage options because you re not using the bat tery When you travel however you want to take advantage of the computer s battery saving features One click on the travel config uration button and your system is ready to go on the road Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 260 Making Life Easier Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Managing Configurations To access the configuration options follow these steps 1 2 Click the Options button at the bottom of the Toshiba Access Panel A bar of options slides out Click the Configuration Management button on the slider bar The panel opens the Configuration Management dialog box TAP Configurations Cmmi Home fice Travel Move Left Move Bight Configuration Management dialog box 3 To modify an existing configuration click its button then click Properties The panel displays the Configuration P
80. it is not used for the time selected For more information see Display Auto Off on page 154 Part IT Technical Reference 390 Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage The MaxTime Control Panel The Power Settings Page System Auto Off 10 Min 20 Min 30 Min 40 Min 50 Min 60 Min Disabled default Turns the system off if you haven t used the computer for the time selected For more information see System Auto Off on page 155 Processing Speed High Full Power default Low Low Power default Sets the speed at which the Central Processing Unit CPU pro cesses information For more information see Processing Speed on page 154 Sleep Mode Enabled Low and Full Power default Disabled When enabled temporarily shuts down the processor when there are no processing requests such as keyboard input or pointing device movement For more information see Sleep Mode CPU Sleep Mode on page 154 Display Brightness Bright Full Power default Semi Bright Low Power default Sets the brightness of the display For more information see Dis play Brightness LCD Brightness on page 155 Part IT Technical Reference Option Settings Usage The MaxTime Control Panel 39 1 The Battery Alarms Page Cooling Mode Performance Full Power default Quiet Low Power default Determin
81. mind If you re unsure about what might or might not be proper behavior most newsgroups have a list of FAQs Frequently Asked Questions There s also a list of general Internet FAQs on the news announce newusers newsgroup K Ww If you re still unsure read the offerings from others before you post something of your own this is called lurking This way you can get a feel for what s going on without letting anybody know you re there or making a major social blunder K2 Ww Whenever you post something on the Internet include your name and e mail address It s a common courtesy to let others know who they re dealing with and gives them a chance to respond K Ww Be considerate Just as nobody likes being insulted face to face it s no fun on line either This isn t to say you can t dis agree with anybody on the Internet A wide variety of differing viewpoints is one of the things that keeps the Internet so vital and alive Logging On to an On line Service or the Internet This section gives some tips for logging on to an on line service or the Internet The basic steps you need to take are as follows Set up an account with an Internet Service Provider ISP or on line service and obtain your user name and password for more information see Installing TCP IP Networking on page 217 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer K kod K Ww K Ww Connecting to the World 21
82. number of other programs already installed on the hard disk If any of these programs is ever damaged or deleted you ll need program dis kettes to reinstall it You must buy blank diskettes and run Microsoft s Create System Disks program to make a set of Windows 95 diskettes Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 36 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM There are two ways of obtaining program files for your other pre installed software excluding Windows 95 Buy blank diskettes and run Toshiba s Master Disk Creator program Purchase the Toshiba drivers utilities on CD ROM using the order form that came with your computer If you chose Windows for Workgroups use Master Disk Creator to make its program diskettes Preparing to Create Master Diskettes Disk image files on your hard disk contain all the information to create program diskettes for the factory pre installed programs on your computer Microsoft Create System Disks and Master Disk Creator copy these disk images to the diskettes You cannot reinstall programs from the disk image files on the hard disk You must use program diskettes created with Create System Disks to reinstall Windows 95 and either dis kettes or the CD ROM for other pre installed programs To run both these programs you need A few hours Up to 70 blank 3 1 2 inch high density 1 44MB diskettes The diskettes for Microsoft Windows 9
83. of Multimedia 1 7 1 Recording Sounds as Wave Files Microphone Locating the built in microphone 5 Speak normally into the microphone 6 When you ve finished recording click the stop button The Sound Recorder window displays a waveform display of the new sound file 7 Tohear what you just recorded click the play button On the File menu click Save to save the file Using an External Microphone The computer has a built in microphone for recording sounds To record higher quality sounds you may wish to use an external monaural microphone To attach an external monaural micro phone follow these steps ix CS ae lj Microphone jack The microphone jack 1 Locate the microphone jack on the left side of the computer 2 Plug the microphone cord into the microphone jack Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 72 The Wide World of Multimedia Recording Sounds as Wave Files 3 Turn the microphone on The built in microphone is automatically disabled Once the external microphone is connected the recording process is the same as for the built in microphone See Using the Built In Microphone on page 170 for instructions To adjust the quality of the recording see Adjusting Recording Quality on page 174 Recording from the Computer s CD ROM Drive To record from an audio compact disc follow these step
84. of information An on line service such as CompuServe or AOL is operated by a governing corporate body The Internet on the other hand is much more random No governing body controls who may access its resources or what information may be published on it Every user is free to contribute and participate without restriction As more users log on contributing their own personal styles the Internet continues to change The open international nature of the Internet makes it impossible to regulate or control effectively Here are some of the things you can do on the Internet K Search for information on any topic K Ww Send and receive electronic mail e mail oe Join a written conversation in progress with one or more other people fo Shop and do your banking K Ww Get computer programs and other information files K Ww Listen to the radio K Ww Play games with people from around the world K Ww Watch live concerts and interviews K Publish your own articles books and multimedia works Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting to the World 2 1 1 The Internet and Other Fascinating Places On line Service vs Internet Service Provider Deciding which option is best for you may not be easy Fortu nately you can always change your mind When making a deci sion consider the following On line services combine an easy to use interface and a wide range of us
85. one Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Before You Go to a Computer Store 1 29 Buying Hardware 8 Click OK Windows 95 copies the files onto the new diskette 9 If you have more than one diskette to copy repeat steps 2 through 8 for each diskette 10 Store the original diskettes in a safe place Buying Hardware One item of hardware you will almost certainly need if you don t already possess it is a printer Other items you may need include A network adapter to link your Satellite Pro 430 with other computers on a local area network LAN An external monitor if several people need to view the screen at the same time A removable hard disk drive for additional storage capacity and increased data security A port replicator to simplify connecting your computer to the rest of your system These items are available as add on devices for your computer What Kind of Devices Can Buy Many devices such as removable hard disk drives and network adapters are available as PC Cards which fit into your computer For more information about these cards see Little Cards that Do Big Things on page 189 Other devices such as printers are usually too large to be portable and need to be connected to an AC outlet The Toshiba Accessories Catalog lists the add on devices you can purchase from Toshiba Talk to your dealer about these Toshiba options and other third party devices Part I Getting To Know
86. or CD player follow these steps G Line in jack The line in jack 1 Locate the line in jack on the left side of the computer 2 Using any necessary adapters plug the cord from the audio device into the line in jack Once an external audio device is connected the recording pro cess is the same as for the built in microphone See Using the Built In Microphone on page 170 for instructions To adjust the quality of the recording see Adjusting Recording Quality on page 174 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 7 The Wide World of Multimedia Recording Sounds as Wave Files Adjusting Recording Quality You can adjust the quality of your recordings However the better the quality of the recording the more disk space the sound file will require Experiment a bit to find a balance that fits your needs To adjust the recording quality follow these steps 1 If you already have the Sound Recorder open skip to step 5 Click Start then point to Programs Point to Accessories then point to Multimedia Click Sound Recorder Windows 95 opens the Sound Recorder window Click Edit then click Audio Properties Sound Recorder opens the Audio Properties dialog box Adjust the Recording Volume Preferred device and Pre ferred quality according to your needs Click OK Your new settings will take effect the next time you record Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multi
87. or trackball you can connect one to the computer s serial port or PS 2 port You may also use the mouse port on the optional NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator AccuPoint C Primary button c mA Secondary button EA The AccuPoint pointing device To move the cursor gently push the AccuPoint in the direction you want the cursor to move Pushing harder on the AccuPoint moves the cursor faster When a step instructs you to click or choose an item move the cursor to the item then press and release the primary button To double click click the primary button twice in rapid succession The primary button corresponds to the left button on a mouse The function of the secondary button depends on the programs you re using It corresponds to the right button on a mouse Check your programs documentation to find whether they use the right mouse button Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 8 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Turn the Computer On Turn the Computer On Finally the preparation is over It s time to turn the computer on and get to work To turn the computer on follow these steps 1 Make sure there s no diskette in the diskette drive or that the drive isn t connected to the computer 2 Ifyou have a printer connected to your computer turn the printer on and wait until the printer is ready on line 3 Locate the power speed light on the indicator panel oA Power button Turnin
88. panel select Trigger suspend resume when panel closes opens 6 Click the Power On Timer tab Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 2 87 Changing the Display Mode Start Up Options Power on Timer Is ecurit iy Miscellaneous r Status TOSHIBA Cancel Defautts The Power On Timer tab of the Toshiba System Control Panel 7 To turn the computer on at a particular time select On 8 Select the Time Format you wish to use then click the up and down arrows until the Time box displays the desired time 9 To select a specific date select Set timer for specific date then select the month and date from the calendar 10 Click OK to exit the Toshiba System Control Panel Changing the Display Mode Perhaps you would like to change how much information your screen displays or adjust the number of colors it uses You can control these options through the Display Properties dialog box Any changes you make affect Windows 95 only and will not change how your screen looks in DOS To open the program follow these steps 1 Position the pointer over a blank area of the desktop then click the secondary button Windows 95 displays a shortcut menu 2 Click Properties Windows 95 open the Display Properties dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 288 Making Life Easier Changing the
89. port Use the parallel port to connect a parallel printer or other parallel device This port replaces the computer s parallel port Use the power socket to connect the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator to AC power using a power cord Use the security lock slot to attach a security cable to the Note Dock Enhanced Port Replicator This cable is discussed in Applying Physical Restraints on page 241 Volume dial Diskette drive port PC Card slots The right and left sides of the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator Use the two PC Card slots to install Type III PC Cards The slot on the right of the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator is referred to as Slot 2 The slot on the left side is referred to as Slot 3 For more information see Using PC Cards in the NoteDock on page 240 Use the volume dial to adjust the loudness of the system speaker Use the external diskette drive port to connect the external 3 1 2 inch diskette drive Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 3 8 Using Your Computer on Your Desk Using the Optional NoteDock Guide pin Computer connector Power connector The front of the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator The view of the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator above identifies The locking latch and metal latches that secure the computer to the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator The computer connector that connects to the NoteDock port on the back of your
90. select Normal or Alternate 6 Click Ok to exit the dialog box 7 Close the Windows Control Panel Using Device Manager to Configure Your System The Windows 95 Device Manager lets you set up many of the individual components of your system You ll need to use it if for example you want to change the COM port name assigned to the Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 284 Making Life Easier Using Device Manager to Configure Your System serial port or the range of memory reserved for the display adapter This section gives a brief overview of how to use Device Manager To change a component s setting in Device Manager follow these steps 1 Click the My Computer icon with the secondary button then click Properties Windows 95 opens the System Properties dialog box 2 Click the Device Manager tab The Device Manager page moves to the front System Properties BE General Device Manager Hardware Profiles Performance View devices by type View devices by connection m isk drives Display adapters 2y Floppy disk controllers SS Standard Floppy Disk Controller H Hard disk controllers 1 23 Keyboard e Monitor 1 Mouse 21 PCMCIA socket a Ports COM amp LPT i 48 Sound video and game controllers ll System devices Properties Refresh Remove Print The Device Manager This page lists all of the components of the sy
91. steps 1 Position the pointer over the cross reference The pointer changes to a pointing hand icon 2 Click the cross reference The program displays the section containing the information that relates to the cross reference you selected When you have finished reading the cross referenced material clicking Go Back returns you to the original topic Searching for a Topic The quick start book has a full text search feature which can locate every topic that contains a word or phrase you are looking for To use the full text search feature follow these steps 1 Click Search and type the word or phrase in the Search Word field You can substitute the last characters in a word with an asterisk to find all the forms of the word For example typing bat would find batch battery batteries battery powered and battery save 2 Click OK to start the search The program displays the list of topics that contain the text Part III Appendixes 3 Using Windows for Workgroups 47 5 Getting Help With Windows for Workgroups Select the topic to view and click Go To The program displays the topic with the word or phrase highlighted To exit the Search Results dialog box click Cancel To start a new search click To Search Reinstalling On line Documentation To restore a deleted or damaged electronic book use the master program diskette that contains the electronic book files For mor
92. the business world becomes more accustomed to busy executives and their portable computing needs it s becoming much easier to find these jacks For example many hotels that cater to business travelers have one or more phone jacks in each room Plug one end of the telephone cable into the modem fax jack and the other end into the wall jack If you are using the telephone line at home disable call wait ing before you connect through the modem Call waiting interrupts transmission Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 208 Connecting to the World Faxing a Document If you have a modem that is capable of transmitting over the cellu lar network you can use any cellular line You need to remain sta tionary while transmitting data over a cellular phone Transmitting data while you are moving will cause problems when the cellular network hands off the call to the next cell Now that you re set up it s time to communicate You re ready to send a fax see the following section or use the modem to connect to the exciting virtual world of the Internet or an on line service see The Internet and Other Fascinating Places on page 209 Faxing a Document Sending a fax through your computer s fax modem is almost as simple as printing a document All you need is a fax program such as MS Fax which is included with Windows 95 Windows 95 treats your fax program as if it is another printer To send a fax 1 Set up your fax mod
93. the computer immediately with your changes in effect No allows you to save open files After you save restart the computer to make your changes take effect Using the Optional NoteDock The NoteDock port allows you to connect your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer to an optional NoteDock Enhanced Port Replica tor The NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator is an excellent investment if you re using your computer both in and out of the office Imagine that you re a salesperson who frequently works away from the office When you return to your desk you want to be able to connect to your network print reports from your computer and use a mouse instead of the AccuPoint Connecting cables for each of these devices every time you return to the office is time con suming and inconvenient Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 36 Using Your Computer on Your Desk Using the Optional NoteDock By connecting external devices to the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator instead of directly to your computer you can leave the devices connected while you are using your computer away from your desk When you return you can quickly connect your com puter to the port replicator and have immediate access to the devices NoteDock Features This section identifies and describes the features of the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator Headphone jack Line in jack Line out jack Power socket MIDI joystick port Keyboard port Mouse
94. the computer off unplug it from the AC power source and let it dry completely before turning it on again If the computer does not operate correctly after you turn it back on contact a Toshiba authorized service provider K Ww Objects that generate a strong electromagnetic field such as stereo speakers except ones you have connected to the com puter or speakerphones K Ww Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of tem perature changes such as air conditioner vents or heaters K Ww Extreme heat cold or humidity Operate the computer within a temperature range of 40 to 95 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 35 degrees Celsius and 20 to 80 non condensing humidity Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Finding Your Way around the System 3 Selecta Place To Work Keep Yourself Comfortable Strain and stress injuries are becoming more common as people spend more time using their computers However with a little care and proper use of the equipment you can work comfortably throughout the day CAUTION Using the computer keyboard incorrectly can result in dis comfort and possible injury If your hands wrists and or arms bother you while typing discontinue using the com puter and rest If discomfort persists consult a physician In addition to the hints provided in the following sections there are a number of books available on ergonomics repetitive strain injury and repetitive stress syndrome P
95. time set N System Auto Off 10 Min 20 Min 30 Min Low Power default 40 Min 50 Min 60 Min Disabled Full Power default Part IT Technical Reference Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart omens 41 Turns the system off if you haven t used the computer for the time set This option is available only if Resume Mode is on For more information see System Auto Off on page 155 N LCD Brightness Bright Full Power default Semi Bright Low Power default Sets the brightness of the display For more information see Dis play Brightness LCD Brightness on page 155 N Cooling Method Performance Full Power default Quiet Low Power default Sets the cooling method For more information see Cooling Mode Cooling Method on page 156 N The following sound options are in a drop down list box that appears when you select Low Medium or High for Alarm Volume Low Battery Alarm Enabled default Disabled Enables and disables the system s built in audible battery alarm N Part IT Technical Reference 418 Grizes Option Panel Close Alarm Settings Enabled default Disabled Usage Enables and disables the alarm that sounds when you close the display panel while the computer is on For more information see How and When to Turn the Computer Off on page 115
96. to home shopping travel arrange ments stock quotes and forums on a wide variety of topics You can send e mail to other subscribers ask questions on almost any subject and access a variety of reference materials Information on most of these services is available through an easy to use user interface Most on line services also provide complete access to the Internet Information about the Internet is contained in the fol lowing section Other on line services are aimed at a much more specific audi ence For example the Dow Jones Personal Journal delivers an electronic version of the Wall Street Journal containing only arti cles that match conditions you set up to suit your interests Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 1 Connecting to the World The Internet and Other Fascinating Places Exploring the World of the Internet more information look through the books on the Internet that F This section contains only a brief overview of the Internet For are available at your local book or computer store NOTE The Internet is a network of computers located all around the world Information available on the Internet is actually contained on one or more of the member networks The Internet s origins trace back to the ARPANET a system created by the U S Defense Department The National Science Foundation NSF greatly expanded the system providing researchers at various sites such as universities access to one large body
97. to the power socket on the back of the computer 2 Connect the other end of the power cable to a live wall outlet The AC power light on the indicator panel glows green Once the battery is charged for the first time don t leave the computer plugged in and turned off for more than several hours at a time Ld NOTE Adding Memory Optional Your computer comes with enough memory to run most of today s popular applications However you may want to increase the com puter s memory With additional memory the computer Can run more programs and open more documents at the same time Runs Windows 95 and Windows applications faster Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 1 7 Adding Memory Optional By installing extra memory now yov ll be able to operate your computer at its maximum capacity from the start Of course you can always come back to this section if you decide to add memory at a later time Sizes of Memory Modules Additional memory is easy to install Memory modules available from your dealer come in the following sizes Memory Module Size Total Memory in System No module installed 16MB 8MB 24MB 16MB 32MB 32MB 48MB Install the Memory Module The memory module installs into the memory expansion slot on the bottom of the computer You ll need a small Phillips screw driver for this procedure 1 Turn Resume Mode off if it s on Refer to S
98. uses to commu nicate with the serial port or other serial devices If you re using a Windows 95 communications program such as Hyperterminal it determines the COM port automatically Skip to the following section If you are going to install and set up a non Windows 95 communi cations program you must tell it which COM port your modem is using To find out which port your modem is connected to follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 8 Connecting ete 207 Double click Modems Windows 95 displays the Modem Properties dialog box Click the Diagnostics tab Your modem should be listed next to one of the computer s COM ports Make a note of the COM port number To verify that the modem is set up properly click the port to which your modem is connected and then click More Info to run the Windows 95 Modem Diagnostics Windows 95 communicates with the modem and displays identifying information reported by the modem If Windows 95 can t communicate with the modem it displays an error message Consult the troubleshooting sections of your modem and Windows 95 documentation Click OK to close the Modem Properties dialog box Close the Control Panel Connecting to a Telephone Line 1 CAUTION You need to connect the modem to a voice grade telephone line with a standard modular phone jack As
99. 0 84 92 Talavera Road Buenos Aires 1097 North Ryde NSW Argentina 2113 Sydney Australia Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 42 If Something Goes Wrong If You Need Further Assistance Austria Toshiba Europe GmbH Gesch ftsbereich Deutschland sterreich Hammfelddamm 8 D 41460 Neuss Austria Brazil Sistema Operacional Rua Helena 170 8 Andar V Olimpia CEP 04552 050 Sao Paulo Brasil Czech Republic CHG Toshiba spol s r o Sumavska 31 612 64 Brno Finland Scribona System OY Sinimdentie 14 02631 Espoo Finland Germany Toshiba Europe GmbH Gesch ftsbereich Deutschland sterreich Hammfelddamm 8 D 41460 Neuss Germany Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Belgium Toshiba Information Systems Belgium S A N V rue Colonel Bourg straat 123 125 B1140 Brussels Belgium Canada Toshiba of Canada Ltd 191 McNabb Street Markham Ontario L3R 8H2 Canada Denmark Scribona Denmark AS Naverland 27 DK2600 Glostrup Denmark France Toshiba Syst mes France SA 7 Rue Amp re 92804 Puteaux C dex France Greece Ideal Electronics S A I 103 Michalacopoulou St 115 27 Athens Greece Tf You Need Further Assistance Hungary Technotrade Trodatechnikai Kft Ov u 185 1147 Budapest Hungary Ireland Same as United Kingdom Italy continued Computer 2000 S p A Via Gaggia 4 1 20139 Milano Italy Japan Toshiba Corporation International Operations Personal Computers
100. 00 999 4273 2 Press 1 access the AUTOFAX system 3 Follow the automated instructions provided by the system When entering the area code for your fax number do not include the 1 prefix The AUTOFAX System automatically calls your fax number and sends the requested information The process usually takes min utes however please allow up to 24 hours to receive the informa tion due to varying load conditions If your fax machine telephone number is busy or otherwise unavailable the system makes up to three attempts to complete a transaction Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 40 If Something Goes Wrong If You Need Further Assistance Toshiba s Bulletin Board Service Toshiba s Bulletin Board Service BBS is available 24 hours a day and is free of charge to anyone with a PC and a modem From Toshiba s BBS you can download files and obtain other useful information to keep your computer running at peak performance Be sure you set your modem to Toshiba s BBS protocol Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 You may use the following telephone number 714 837 4408 Accessing Toshiba On Line You can reach Toshiba on CompuServe CIS or the Internet World Wide Web WWW On CompuServe type go toshiba to access the Toshiba Forum Along with twenty or so dedicated Team Toshiba volunteers who are on line at all hours Toshiba s technical support staff provides interactive technical support
101. 000h default Lets you set the memory location for video BIOS The default of E000 EFFF uses 64KB of UMB upper memory block memory The other options use only 48KB of UMB memory Y LCD Display Colors CDT Models 16M Colors default Displays the number of colors available to the display You cannot change this setting N A Part IT Technical Reference Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart pispiay 407 LCD Display Colors CDS Models 222K Colors default 4096 Colors Controls the number of colors available to the display Y Power On Display Internal External default Simultaneous Controls whether the system sends output to the internal display the external display or both when you turn the computer on in boot mode Y Text Mode Stretch Enable Disable default The screen has a height of 600 pixels In a text mode which uses 400 pixels this leaves a small amount of space above and below the text on the screen Enabling this mode stretches the text to fill the entire screen N Changes you make to the VGA Segment Address setting in TSETUP will not affect Windows 95 To set this option for Windows 95 use the Display adapters icon in Windows 95 Device Manager Refer to Using Device Manager to Config ure Your System on page 283 Part IT Technical Reference 408 mron HARD DISK This se
102. 1 1 Shibaura 1 Chome Minato Ku Tokyo 105 Japan Mexico Toshiba de Mexico Paseo de la Reforma no 30 4 Piso Centro 06048 D F Mexico City Mexico If Something Goes Wrong 343 Iceland HKH Skipholti 50c 105 Reykjavik Iceland Italy CELO S p A Via Saronnese 16 1 20025 Legnano MI Italy Italy continued Ingram Micro Via Roma 74 1 20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI Italy Luxembourg Same as Belgium Morocco C B 22 Rue de Bethune Casablanca Morocco Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 344 The Netherlands Toshiba Information Systems Benelux B V Rivium Boulevard 41 2909 LK Capelle a d Ijssel The Netherlands Norway Scribona Norge A S Posboks 51 Kalbakken 0901 Oslo 9 Norway Poland VIA Computer Poland Sp zo o ul Wilcza 35 41 PL00 678 Warszawa Poland Portugal continued NEXT DS Distribuicao e Servicos Quinta Grander de Alfragide Lote36BeC P 2700 Amadora Portugal Portugal continued HA Solucoes Informaticas Lda CNAT Centro National de Asisten cia Tecnica Urb Quinta Grande Lote 6 Loja A Alfragide P 2700 Amadora Portugal Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong If You Need Further Assistance New Zealand Toshiba New Zealand Pty Limited Level 4 3 Ferncroft Street Grafton Auckland New Zealand Papua New Guinea Fujitsu PNG Pty Ltd PO Box 4952 Boroko NCD Papua New Guinea Portugal DLI Distribuicao Av do
103. 1 26 gigabytes How Big Is a Gigabyte Anyway You may be wondering what the terms kilobyte megabyte and gigabyte mean In normal metric terminology kilo means thou sand mega means million and giga means billion But computer terminology is different Computers use base two arithmetic also called binary arithmetic Because of this all numbers in computing are based on powers of two One megabyte is actually equal to 1 048 576 bytes 27 the closest binary number to 1 000 000 One gigabyte is 1 024 megabytes Compact Discs Like an audio CD a CD ROM is an optical storage medium Data is stored on concentric tracks on one side of the disc and the read head incorporates a laser beam Unlike hard disk drives which rotate at a constant speed a CD ROM drive changes its rotational speed according to which part of the CD it is accessing This allows the laser to read data at a constant speed regardless of whether it is accessing an inner or an outer track Because of the momentum of the disc this continuous acceleration and deceleration means that accessing data is slower than for a hard disk Your computer is supplied with a 10x speed CD ROM That means it rotates ten times faster than an audio CD However the rotational speed of the drive is only one factor in the performance equation The size and type of the drive buffer the head movement mechanism and the type of interface all affect performance 1 10X average Part I
104. 285 N Part II Technical Reference 414 Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart TSETUP OTHERS Int Keyboard Key Layout Normal default Alternative Lets you select the layout of the internal keyboard s Caps Lock Ctrl and Alt keys For more information see Selecting the Keyboard Layout on page 283 Y Ext Keyboard Fn Key Equivalent Disabled default left Ctrl left Alt right Ctrl right Alt left Alt left Shift right Alt right Shift left Alt CapsLock If you choose either of the options marked by an asterisk you cannot use the assigned keys to restart the computer Ctrl Alt Del Allows you to use the selected key combination to emulate the computer s Fn key on an external keyboard For more information see Making Your External Keyboard Pretend it Has the Fn Key on page 231 N Pointing Devices Auto selected default Simultaneous Sets which pointing device is active when you connect an external PS 2 pointing device to the computer This option does not affect serial pointing devices Y Part IT Technical Reference Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart omens 419 Boot Priority FDD HDD default HDD FDD Determines whether the system looks for the operating
105. 30 Series notebook computer at the time of this guide s production However succeeding computers and guides are subject to change without notification Therefore Toshiba assumes no liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors omissions or discrepancies between the computer and the guide Trademarks MaxTime and Noteworthy are registered trademarks and AccuPoint Discovery Center Fn esse magiCDisc NoteDock Satellite Pro and SelectBay are trade marks of Toshiba America Information Systems IBM is a registered trademark and PS 2 is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation MS DOS Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation SoundBlaster Pro is a trademark of Creative Labs Inc TranXit is a trademark of Puma Technology Inc America Online is a registered trademark of America Online Inc Compuserve is a registered trademark of Compuserve Computer Corporation All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Chapter 1 Make Sure You Have Everything 0eeeeeeeeeee Select a Place To Work ov chug hed tee eee VAN uN aden aun Find Out Where Everything s Located 00 00 eee Finding Your Way around the System Yov ve bought your computer and taken everything out of the box You may be asking yourself OK now w
106. 35 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 49 Using the Electronic Guide Follow these steps to reinstall on line documentation 1 Ifthe CD ROM drive is in the SelectBay replace it with the internal diskette drive or connect the external diskette drive To exchange drives in the SelectBay see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 2 Insert the master program diskette that contains the book Click Start then click Run Windows 95 displays the Run dialog box 4 In the Run dialog box type the command line a install and click OK Always install the book into the C DOCS folder 5 When the installation is complete eject the diskette from the drive Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 3 Lesson 1 Exploring the Desktop 000 eee e eee 52 Lesson 2 Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device 53 Lesson 3 Creating a New Document 000000 56 Lesson 4 Creating a New Folder 00 cee ee eeeeee 58 Lesson 5 Starting Programs 00 0c cece cece eee eee 59 Lesson 6 Resizing and Reshaping Windows 61 Lesson 7 Closing Your Programs and Files 63 Lesson 8 Creating Shortcuts 2 ota vise eeinbetceota es 64 Lesson 9 Changing the Wallpaper 0 0ee eee eee 65 Lesson 10 Setting the Date and Time 0005 67 Lesson 11 Removing Objects from the Desktop 68 Les
107. 4 or LPT2 3 1 2 inch diskette drive LPT1 COM3 or COM4 Real time clock Software redirect to INT OAh Reserved Reserved PS 2 Mouse AccuPoint or PC Card Numeric Data Processor Hard disk or PC Card CD ROM drive default if installed or PC Card Notes Choice for Sound System IrDA ECP or PC Card Choice for Sound System IrDA ECP or PC Card Choice for Sound System or PC Card Choice for Sound System default CD ROM drive or PC Card PC Card Direct Memory Access DMA allows some devices to transfer data to and from memory at high speeds without using the CPU Such devices are each assigned a unique DMA channel The Sat ellite Pro 430 Series computer has two DMA controllers with four channels on each controller a total of eight DMA channels Part III Appendixes System Resources 4 5 1 Input Output Port Address Assignments The following table lists the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer s DMA channel assignments DMA Use Notes 0 Reserved Choice for Sound System 1 Reserved This is the Sound System default or ECP 2 3 1 2 diskette drive or ECP 3 Reserved Choice for Sound or ECP default 4 Cascade from DMAC 1 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Reserved Input Output Port Address Assignments The CPU accesses input output devices such as modems by read ing from them or writing to them Each command to read or write must specify the address in memory for the port Each device that
108. 5 Running the Computer on Battery Power If you select this option you can also select a sound event to occur when the Critical Battery Alarm warning displays No Sound Play System Beep or Play wav File 9 Click OK to save your settings and close the MaxTime Control Panel Starting Again Where You Left Off If you want to turn your computer off without going through the start up procedure when you turn it on again Windows 95 s Sus pend command and Toshiba s Resume Mode are for you These features store the current state of the computer including all your open files and programs in memory until you turn the computer on again The computer uses power supplied by the backup battery to store this information If the backup battery ever discharges completely as it will if the main battery has discharged and you leave the computer off and unplugged for over eight hours your informa tion is lost So although suspending will store your open files you should still save all your work before you turn the computer off There are two ways to suspend the computer Click the Start button then click Suspend gt Turn on Toshiba s Resume Mode and press the power button The Windows 95 Suspend feature is the easiest way to suspend the computer However you ll have to use Resume Mode if you want to configure your system to Automatically suspend resume when you open close the dis play panel This option is available thro
109. 5 must be formatted but the others need not be All the diskettes must be write enabled the write protect tab at the left corner of the diskette must cover the square hole Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 37 Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM j m Write protect tab E E A write enabled diskettes It s a good idea to create your program diskettes the first time you start the computer That way you don t risk accidentally deleting a program file and having no master diskettes available from which to reinstall it Running Microsoft Create System Disks CAUTION If you chose not to create Windows 95 diskettes when you turned the computer on the first time you should do so now Since Microsoft Create System Disks requires you to make all the Windows 95 diskettes at one time you need to have at least 30 new formatted high density diskettes available before you start the program Label the diskettes using the pre printed Windows 95 diskette labels provided with your computer You can only run Create System Disks one time After you create the diskettes the program deletes the images from your hard disk To run Create System Disks follow these steps 1 Make sure the diskette drive is connected to the computer If you re unsure how to do this see Connect the External Dis kette Drive on page 21 You may also swap the CD ROM and diskette drive
110. 68 8x 16 16 256K 8x 16 16 256K 35 5KHz 87Hz Graph 48 4KHz 60Hz 57 5KHz 70Hz 60 0KHz 75Hz 28 SVGA 1280x 1024 8x 16 16 222K 8x 16 16 256K 35 5KHz 60Hz Graph 30 SVGA 640 x 480 8x 16 256 256K 8x16 256 256K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 37 9KHz 72Hz 37 5KHz 75Hz 32 SVGA 800 x 600 8x 16 256 256K 8x16 256 256K 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph 48 1KHz 72Hz 46 9KHz 75Hz 34 SVGA 1024x768 8x 16 256 256K 8x 16 256 256K 35 5KHz 87Hz Graph 48 4KHz 60Hz 57 5KHz 70Hz 60 0KHz 75Hz 38 SVGA 1280x 1024 8x 16 256 222K 8x 16 256 256K 35 5KHz 87Hz Graph 40 SVGA 640 x 480 8x 16 32K 32K 8x 16 32K 32K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 72KHz 37 9Hz 75KHz 37 5Hz 41 SVGA 640 x 480 8x 16 64K 64K 8x 16 64K 64K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 72KHz 37 9Hz 75KHz 37 5Hz 42 SVGA 800 x 600 8x 16 32K 32K 8x 16 32K 32K 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph 43 SVGA 800 x 600 8x 16 64K 64K 8x 16 64K 64K 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph Part III Appendixes corvideoMores 408 Internal LCD External Monitor Mode Grid Grid Scan Freq hex Type Resolution pelxpel Colors pelxpel Colors hor vert 4 SVGA 1024x768 8x16 32K 32K 8x 16 32K 32K 48 5KHz 60Hz Graph 45 SVGA 1024x768 8x16 64K 64K 8x 16 64K 64K 48 5KHz 60Hz Graph 50 SVGA 640 x 480 8x 16 N A 8x16 16M 16M_ 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 52 SVGA 800 x 600 8x 16 16M 16M 8x16 16M 16M_ 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph a These modes are interlaced All others are non interlaced Part II Appendi
111. 7 Logging On to an On line Service or the Internet Request PPP Point to Point Protocol service as it is faster and more secure than SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol If you are connecting to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN that has direct Internet access you may have remote access to the Internet through your network Ask your network administrator Install configure and verify your modem for more informa tion see Using a PC Card Modem on page 202 or Using an External Modem on page 203 Add Microsoft s TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol networking protocol to your computer for more information see Installing TCP IP Networking on page 217 Install Dial Up Networking and setup your Internet connection for more information see Installing Dial Up Networking on page 218 Installing TCP IP Networking To set up Microsoft s TCP IP networking protocol follow these steps 1 Click Start point to Settings click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel Double click Network Click Add Select Protocol and click Add The system will display the Select Network Protocol dialog box Under Manufacturers select Microsoft Select TCP IP and click OK Windows installs TCP IP on your computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 1 8 Connecting to the World Logging On to an On line Service or the Internet Restart Windows to activate
112. Accu Point This option is equivalent to the Pointing Devices option in TSETUP This option does not affect serial pointing devices Parallel Port Mode ECP Standard Bi directional Lets you choose the parallel port mode Set this option to Standard Bi directional if the documentation for your parallel device instructs you to do so or if you are having problems with your printer or other parallel device Part IT Technical Reference Chapter 19 Making Changes in TSE POURS 4 c2 0 0 sa saeaeoe tena eene st 404 Closiig MSE VOIP ssscenre deal cease eye ule ecu es 405 MEMORY eae oor tagcat oti a al are eres Buns 405 DISRLAY tereraa aa aat Uae Roa ip inna Guns hata eg Ee 406 HARDDISK sa ccnasve te tees imene he r aA ANEELA 408 PASSWORD erepti au cert ose T EE 408 VOPORIS eeraa 4 oon e ante yee ee Raps 409 OTHERS sau iesed valu ye ne R tush on cic eds 412 TSETUP Run TSETUP outside of Windows 95 at a system prompt If you try to run TSETUP from an MS DOS session under Windows 95 results can be unpredictable If you re currently in Windows 95 click Start then click Shut Down Click the button next to Restart the computer in MS DOS mode and click Yes Windows 95 shuts down the computer then restarts it in MS DOS mode and displays a system prompt Type c dos tsetup TSETUP displays a System Setup screen 403 404 gs Changes in TSETUP SYSTEM SET an BIOS VERSION X XX 1 0 PORTS Serial Port COM1 3F8H IRQ4
113. BLE STRIKE PRINT ALL CHARACTERS PRINT IBM compatible printer output If you specified a non IBM compatible printer the test sends the following output to the printer 1 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ _ abcdefghijk1mno 1 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ _ abcdefghijklmnop 55 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ _ abcdefghi jklmnopg 53 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ _ abcdefghijklmnopgr 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ _ abcdefghi jklmnopgrs 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY2Z _ abcdefghijklmnopgrst 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ _ abcdefghijklmnopqrstu 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY2Z _ abcdefghijklmnopgrstuv 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ _ abcdefghijklmnopaqrstuvw Non IBM compatible printer output If an error occurs the test displays the ABORTED message Write down all messages and highlighted numbers and check the follow ing items 1 Ad Is the printer power cord securely plugged into a live wall outlet KO Ww Is the printer cable properly connected to the computer 1 Ww Is the printer turned on 1 Sd Is the printer ready on line or selected Part IT Technical Reference 4 32 The Dia
114. Battery Alarm Actions IZ Display an alarm message No Sound Play System Beep O Play wav File iba TAP Me O Play way File No Sound Play System Beep Critical Battery Alarm Actions Z Display an alam message r i S j iba TAP Mei TOSHIBA y Help The Battery Alarms tab of the MaxTime Control Panel 5 Click the configuration button in the Battery Alarm Thresholds section The MaxTime Control Panel displays the Battery Alarm Threshold dialog box e Office Travel Battery Alarm Thresholds Based on Percent Remaining Low w Based on Time Remainin g Cica d i Cancel The Battery Alarm Threshold dialog box This dialog box displays a tab for each configuration 6 Click the tab for the configuration you wish to change 7 Select the threshold that will trigger the battery alarm K Ww K kod To set the alarm to sound when the battery charge reaches the Time Remaining Threshold click Based on Time Remaining To set the alarm to sound when the battery charge reaches the Percent Remaining Threshold click Based on Percent Remaining Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 268 Making Life Easier Saving Time with Multiple Configurations 8 Select the threshold levels that will trigger the alarms by moving the Low and Cri
115. Colors To choose colors for each of the three assigned key tasks follow these steps 1 To change the color of the assigned keys select the desired color from the Assigned Keys list box 2 Tochange the color of the triangle that indicates program folders select the desired color from the Program Folder list box 3 To change the color of the triangle that indicates custom folders select the desired color from the Custom Folder list box 4 Click Apply to apply the new colors to your Fn esse keyboard 5 Exit the dialog box Click OK to save your new settings and exit the dialog box Click Cancel to cancel your new settings and exit the dialog box Using Fn esse with an External Keyboard You can use Fn esse even if you re working with an external key board that doesn t have an Fn key To set a key combination to emulate the Fn key follow these steps 1 Click the Options button on the Fn esse keyboard Fn esse displays the Fn esse Options dialog box with the Options tab in front 2 Click the Ext Keyboard Fn Key tab Fn esse displays the tab Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 80 Making Life Easier Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse Click the button next to the external key combination you wish to emulate the Fn Key Click OK The key combination is assigned When you use the external keyboard use this key combination instead of pressing Fn Making the Key Assignment Configuration Awar
116. Computer 1 2 Before You Go to a Computer Store Buying Programs 8 9 Windows 95 searches the installation diskette or CD ROM for the installation program If Windows 95 doesn t find the installation program or searches the wrong drive click the Browse button and find the installation program manually Click Finish to run the installation program Continue with the program s normal installation process Creating a Backup Copy of Program Diskette s It s important to create backup diskettes for any programs you install on your computer in case you accidentally damage or lose the original program diskettes You ll need one blank formatted diskette for each program diskette you have to copy Follow these steps 1 If your diskette drive is not installed in the SelectBay con nect the external diskette drive or swap drives in the Select Bay To swap drives see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 Place the original diskette into the diskette drive From the desktop double click the My Computer icon Windows 95 opens the My Computer window Click the A icon Click File then click Copy Disk In the Copy Disk dialog box click Start Windows 95 copies the files on the diskette into memory and displays a message asking you to insert the destination diskette the one you re copying to into the diskette drive Remove the original diskette from the diskette drive and replace it with your blank
117. DT does not have a contrast control dial You may also adjust the brightness of the display To adjust the brightness follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the MaxTime icon The MaxTime Control Panel opens Power Settings Battery Alarms Miscellaneous Power Settings O Battery 3 Piena TOSHIBA Cancel poy Help The MaxTime Control Panel Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 86 Learning the Basics How to Start a Program 4 Set the Display Brightness option to Bright You can do this in two ways Set the Power Usage Mode to Full Power This automati cally sets the Display Brightness option to Bright and changes the other battery settings to maximize system per formance K Ww Set the Power Usage Mode to Custom Settings then click Modify Custom Settings The Modify Custom Settings dialog box opens Move the Display Brightness slider to Bright Click OK 5 Click OK to save your settings and exit the MaxTime Con trol Panel For more information about the MaxTime Control Panel see The MaxTime Control Panel on page 387 How to Start a Program In Windows 95 there are two ways to start programs from an icon or from the Windows Explorer To start an MS DOS program from a system prompt refer to Starting Som
118. Device Manager under Modems for PC Card modems under Ports for an external modem Check the communications parameters baud rate parity data length and stop bits specified in the communications program It should be set up to transmit at 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 or 28800 bps bits per second Refer to the program s documenta tion and modem manual for information on how to change these settings Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 336 If Something Goes Wrong Develop Good Computing Habits The modem is on set up properly and still won t transmit or receive data Make sure the line has a dial tone Connect a telephone handset to the line to check this The other system may be busy or off line The PC Card modem used to work but doesn t anymore Check in Device Manager to see if the modem is listed If it is listed but has an X next to it the modem is disabled Dou ble click the device and then check the Undocked and Docked if present options before clicking OK If the modem is listed and has and exclamation point next to it there may be a conflict with another device and that Windows 95 is unable to resolve the conflict See the next section for sugges tions on solving the conflict Develop Good Computing Habits Sometimes we re in such a hurry to use a computer that we fail to adequately prepare for the inevitable problems that occur This section suggests some good habits to develop so you
119. Edit View Image Options Help BX Exploring C FELI File Edit View Tools Help All Folders Contents of C 7 23 Desktop My Computer B 3 Floppy A ee C J Mouse Program Files 1 Windows E Winutis H 8 0 amp Control Panel G Printers E Dial Up Networking E E Network Neighborhood i Recycle Bin C My New Folder pege 7 object s plus 11 hidden 795KB Disk free space 705MB For Help cick Help Topics on the Help Menu A Start E My Computer E untitled Paint Exploring C Bde 1 58AM Windows Explorer open on the desktop The Windows Explorer provides access to all your computer s resources For example it lets you see all the files in a particu lar folder on the computer s hard drive Notice the taskbar now has two buttons on it one for Paint and one for Windows Explorer 5 Click the Paint button on the taskbar Windows 95 displays the Paint program You can move back and forth between the two programs by alternately clicking each button Windows 95 places the active window on top of other win dows on the desktop unless you have resized the windows Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 6 1 Lesson 6 Resizing and Reshaping Windows Lesson 6 Resizing and Reshaping Windows If you ve been following the steps in this chapter you now have a screen c
120. FCC Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interfer ence will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures 1 Ww Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna K Kd Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver K Ww Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected K Ww Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help YN This equipment has been certified to comply with the limits for a Class B sTo digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 FCC Rules Only peripher NS als certified to comply with the Class B limits may be attached to this WARNING computer Operation with non certified peripherals or peripherals not rec ommended by Toshiba is li
121. Fn F10 The cursor control light on the indicator panel shows whether the cur sor control overlay is on or off You can use the overlaid keys to type alphabetic characters while the overlay is on To do this For lower case letters press and hold Fn while you type For upper case letters press and hold Fn Shift while you type To use the numeric keys when the cursor control overlay is on press and hold Shift while you use the overlaid keys To return to the cursor control overlay release Fn Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 2 8 3 Using Device Manager to Configure Your System Selecting the Keyboard Layout Depending on what type of computer keyboard you are accus tomed to the position of the Caps Lock Ctrl and Alt keys on your computer may seem odd to you You can change the layout of these keys by setting the Int Keyboard Key Layout option in the Windows Control Panel or TSETUP Peni fen Alternative Normal The Alternative and Normal keyboard key layouts To set this option in TSETUP refer to TSETUP on page 403 To change the keyboard layout using the Windows Control Panel follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the Keyboard icon Windows 95 displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box 4 Click the Toshiba tab 5 Inthe Internal Keyboard Layout section of the tab
122. Forte n 3 Piso 4 Ed Suecia ID P 2795 Linda a Velha Portugal Portugal continued PERCOM Lda Rua Prof Vitorino Nemesio 189A P 2765 Estoril Portugal Slovakia HTC s r o Toshiba PC Kukucinova 26 831 03 Bratislava Slovakia Slovenia INEA Ljudljanska 80 61230 Domzale Slovenia Sweden Scribona System AB Sundbybergsvdegen 1 171 27 Solna Sweden United Kingdom Toshiba Information Systems U K Ltd Toshiba Court Weybridge Business Park Addlestone Road Weybridge Surrey KT15 2UL United Kingdom If Something Goes Wrong Tf You Need Further Assistance 345 Spain Toshiba Information Systems Parque Empresarial San Fernando Edificio Europa la planta Escalera A 28831 Madrid Spain Switzerland Ozalid AG Herostrasse 7 8048 Ziirich Switzerland United States Toshiba America Information Systems Inc 9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine California 92618 United States For the most recent list of addresses access Toshiba s AUTOFAX system see page 339 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer PART Il CONTENTS The Hotkeys io Sen gan Sy pein aia a eatery YEU 349 The Toshiba Access Panel 0 00 ccc eee e eee eeee 353 The MaxTime Control Panel 0c cece eee eee 387 The Toshiba System Control Panel 004 395 PSE WP eea ates care E tenet ane S wats 403 The Diagnostic Test scssee cence zee eee ee uy Nae ed oe 421 PART Il TECHNICAL REFERENCE What s In Part Il
123. GHIJKLMNMOG POURSTUVWXYZ __ abcdefghijklmnoparstuyvy xyz Ya Gu aaadc6eei 11 A ae 00000 7OUseY Pt fF a j lHddlaaallla 4 H H FIH thA tbrr Hel os Bo Ec uriase skip eres ee PRESS CENTER KEY First character set test screen If the screen matches this illustration go to the next character set test by pressing Enter If your screen doesn t match the diagnostic test display write down the differences and contact your dealer The second test checks that the screen can display characters in an 80 column by 25 row format The display should look like the following 80 25 CHARACTER DISPLAY 9123456789012315678901234 5678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789 m3 1 gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORS _ abcde fghijkimno ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORS __ abcdefghi jk1mnop abcde fghijklmnopq abcdefghijklmnopgqr bedefghijklmnopgrs 2 GHIJ VWXYZ cdefghijklmnopqrst lt Se GAnCHEFCHT JKTMNOEO WXYZ _ abcdefghijklmnopqrstu ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ _ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY2 _ abcdefghi jklmnopqrstuvw CDEFGHI JKLMNOPORS TUVWXYZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXY2Z ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRST UVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwx abcde fghi jklmnopgrstuvwxy abcdefghi jklmnopqrstuvwxyz abcdefghijklmnopgrstuwxyz cdefghijklmnopgrstuwxyz abcde fghijklmnopgrstuwxyz abcde fghijklmnopgrstuwxyz D abcdefghi jklmnopgrstuwxyz DC cde
124. Guide MaxTime controls your system s power saving options These options are also available through TSETUP For information about what each option does read TSETUP on page 403 Hardware Setup TSETUP CAUTION Fn esse To start Hardware Setup double click the Hardware Setup icon in Program Manager s Toshiba Utilities program group Use Hardware Setup to control your hardware configuration These options are also available through TSETUP For informa tion about what each option does read TSETUP on page 403 To open TSETUP follow these steps 1 Close any programs you are running and exit Windows if it s open Fun TSETUP outside of Windows at a system prompt If you run TSETUP from an MS DOS session under Windows by clicking the MS DOS prompt icon results can be unpredictable 2 At the system prompt type c dos tsetup and press Enter Once you ve opened TSETUP it operates as described in TSETUP on page 403 To open Fn esse double click the Fn esse icon in Program Man ager s Toshiba Utilities program group Once you ve opened Fn esse it operates as described in Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse on page 270 Part III Appendixes 470 Using Windows for Workgroups Turning the Power Off magiCDisc To open magiCDisc double click the magiCDisc icon in Program Manager s Toshiba Utilities program group Once you ve opened magiCDisc it operates as described in Man
125. Hz 70Hz Text 2 3 VGA 80 x 25 8x8 16 256K 8x8 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 07 1 VGA 40 x 25 8x14 16 256K 8x 14 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 2 3 VGA 80x25 8x 14 16 256K 8x14 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 0 1 VGA 40 x 25 89 x 16 16 256K 9x 16 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 2 3 VGA 80 x 25 8 9 x 16 16 256K 9x16 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 4 5 VGA 320 x 200 8x8 4 256K 8x8 4 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph 6 VGA 640 x 200 8x8 2 256K 8x8 2 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph 7 VGA 80x25 8x 14 Mono 9x14 Mono 31 5KHz 70Hz Text T VGA 80 x 25 8x 16 Mono 9x16 Mono 31 5KHz 70Hz Text D VGA 320 x 200 8x8 16 256K 8x8 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph E VGA 640 x 200 8x8 16 256K 8x8 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph F VGA 640 x 350 8x 14 Mono 8x 14 Mono 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph 10 VGA 640 x 350 8x 14 16 256K 8x14 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph Part III Appendixes 462 rn Modes Internal LCD External Monitor Mode Grid Grid Scan Freq hex Type Resolution pelxpel Colors pelxpel Colors hor vert 11 VGA 640 x 480 8x16 2 256K 8x 16 2 256K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 12 VGA 640 x 480 8x16 16 256K 8x16 16 256K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 13 VGA 320 x 200 8x8 256 256K 8x8 256 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph 20 SVGA 640 x 480 8x 16 16 256K 8x 16 16 256K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 37 9KHz 72Hz 37 5KHz 75Hz 22 SVGA 800 x 600 8x8 16 256K 8x8 16 256K 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph 48 1KHz 72Hz 46 9KHz 75Hz 24 SVGA 1024x7
126. Non operating 20 C 4 F to 65 C 149 F 10 to 90 non condensing 60 to 10 000 m 60G 50G with CD ROM drive installed 1G 1G with CD ROM drive installed Features and Specifications 445 Specifications Part IIT Appendixes Appendix B Power Cord Connectors The Satellite Pro 430 Series computer features a universal power supply you can use worldwide This appendix shows the shapes of the typical AC power cord connectors for various parts of the world USA and Canada United Kingdom 0 UL approved CSA approved BS approved Australia Europe w d VDA approved SD APPIOVe NEMKO approved 447 pendix C IRQ Level Assignments lt 0 lt 2 lt 2 nw aiesatea eee eoena ogee sien 449 DMA Channel Assignments 000ce seen eee eee 450 Input Output Port Address Assignments 451 System Resources This appendix lists the pre assigned IRQ levels DMA channels and T O port addresses IRQ Level Assignments IRQ The direct line to the CPU is called an Interrupt ReQuest IRQ level or channel You ll hear both terms used by technical experts They mean the same thing The following table lists the IRQ level assignments for the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer Use Notes Timer Keyboard PIC 2 COM2 IrDA PC Card COM1 COM4 IrDA PC Card 449 450 IRO 10 11 12 13 14 15 DMA Channel Assignments System Resources DMA Channel Assignments Use COM3 COM
127. Not used Not used Bisynchronous 1 LPT3 CGA EGA VGA Not used 3 1 2 inch diskette drive TO ports 3F6 and 3F7 are controller used for the HDC also Serial Port or Infrared Port COM3 Part III Appendixes 4 5 4 System Resources Input Output Port Address Assignments Port address h Device function Notes 3F8 3FF Serial Port or Infrared Port COM1 400 47F Not used 480 49F DMA High Page Register Part III Appendixes System Resources 4 5 5 Input Output Port Address Assignments Part III Appendixes pendix D CDS Model Video Modes 020 c ee ee ee ee eee 458 CDT Video Modes a4 0640 eG ety aa eee nccdet ao 461 Video Modes This appendix lists the video modes supported by the Satellite Pro 430 Series display adapter and identifies the characteristics of each mode The columns of the following tables are defined as follows Mode is the mode number in hexadecimal and is generally used by programmers to specify video modes in programs Type identifies the display adapter that first supported the mode and specifies whether the mode is text or graphics Resolution is the measure of the screen s dimensions in terms of hori zontal and vertical pixels in graphics modes or rows and col umns of characters in text modes Grid is the default number of pels per character LCD Colors is the maximum number of simultaneous colors or shades of gray that the mode can display on the built in scr
128. Option The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button The Toshiba Access Panel Properties Dialog Box p Panel Display Always onton p Special Effects Use TAP s Z Use TAP animation effects Schemes Brushed Steel fal _ The Toshiba Access Panel Properties dialog box This dialog box lets you define the characteristics of the Toshiba Access Panel itself It provides the following options Always on top Auto hide Immediately After brief delay Usage When this check box is selected the TAP displays on top of all other windows When this check box is cleared the panel can be covered by other windows When this check box is selected the panel recedes into the edge of the desktop when it s not being used The options in the Display Method section of this dialog box control when the panel reappears Causes the panel to reappear as soon as you place the cursor at the edge of the screen where the panel displays This option is available only if you selected Auto hide Causes the panel to reappear two seconds after you place the cursor at the edge of the screen where the panel displays This option is available only if you selected Auto hide Part IT Technical Reference Option Left click Right click Use large dashboard gauges Use large application icons Configuration button in Gauge Icon Size section Use TAP sound effects The Toshiba Access Pa
129. P from an MS DOS session under Windows 95 results can be unpredictable If you re currently in Windows 95 click Start then click Shut Down Click the button next to Restart the computer in MS DOS mode and click Yes Windows 95 shuts down the computer then restarts it in MS DOS mode and displays a system prompt Type c dos tsetup TSETUP displays a System Setup screen SYSTEM SETUP BIOS VERSION X XX 1 0 PORTS Serial Port COM1 3F8H IRQ4 nfrared Port Not Used 16384KB 640KB 15552KB 192KB Parallel Port LPT1 378H IRQ7 CH3 Sound System Address IRQ DMA OTHERS Power up Mode CPU Cache VGA Compatible Color E400H Resume Enabled Full Power LCD Disp Power On Display ext Mode Stretch ay Colors Ne Select items Esc VGA Segment Address Exit without saving 16M Colors Internal External Disable HARD DISK HDD Mode Enhanced IDE Normal PASSWORD Not Registered Battery Save Mode Alarm Volume System Beep Panel Power On Off Alarm Power On Keyboard Pointing Devices Boot Priority Space Bksp Change values Home Set default values A sample System Setup screen 6 Press p to highlight the Password section End Save High Enabled Enabled Disabled Layout Fn Auto Selected FDD HDD changes and exit Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 50 Keeping Your Files Safe Using a Password 7 Press the spacebar TSETUP asks y
130. Time ibe You customize hardware settings after you ve created a new con figuration Both the MaxTime Control Panel and the Toshiba Sys tem Control Panel include configurations buttons for assigning the current settings to your chosen configuration Changing Power Usage Settings All power usage settings are controlled by the MaxTime The easi est way to configure the system s power settings is by clicking the MaxTime Wizard button on the Toshiba Access Panel This starts the MaxTime Wizard which asks you a series of questions then selects power settings based on how you prefer to work and assigns the settings to the appropriate configurations If you prefer to control each power usage option individually you can do so through the MaxTime Control Panel To access the MaxTime Control Panel follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the MaxTime icon The MaxTime Control Panel opens You can also open the MaxTime Control Panel by double clicking the Toshiba Power icon on the right corner of the Windows 95 taskbar 4 Click the configuration button to assign settings to a specific configuration The computer displays this icon any time you can assign an option to a specific configuration MaxTime displays a power usage dialog box for the current power source in this example the External Power Usage dialog box Part I Getting T
131. To Know Your Computer 2 4 Making Life Easier Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse 9 Choose a Run Mode Clicking Normal starts the program in a normal window on the desktop Clicking Minimized starts the program without opening a window on the desktop It also adds an icon to the taskbar Clicking Maximized starts the program in a window that fills the desktop 10 To re activate a program rather than open a second copy if it is already running when you press its assigned Fn key combination select Switch to running target application if one exists This option does not function with the Windows Explorer 11 Click OK to save your key assignment and exit the dialog box The program or document is now associated with the key you just selected To open the program or file press Fn plus the appropriate key from within Windows Assigning a Key to a Program Folder To assign a key the task of opening a program folder follow these steps 1 Open Fn esse 2 Click the desired key in the Fn esse keyboard Fn esse displays a shortcut menu 3 Point to Assign To Fn esse allows you to choose between File Program Folder and Custom Folder 4 Click Program Folder Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 27 5 Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box with the Assignment Type set to Program Folder Fill in the Description and Target text boxe
132. You Turn the Computer On Using the Suspend Command To turn the computer off using Windows 95 s Suspend command 1 Save any files you re using over a local area network Your network connection may be lost when you suspend your computer 2 Click Start 3 Click Suspend The Suspend command saves the current system settings shuts down Windows 95 and turns the computer off Using Resume Mode There are several ways to turn Resume Mode on and off This section describes how to use a key combination called a hotkey to select Resume Mode This is the quickest method Turn to Start ing Again Where You Left Off on page 145 for some other methods To select Resume Mode follow these steps 1 Press Fn F3 to display the Resume Mode pop up window Resume On The Resume Mode pop up window 2 While continuing to hold Fn press F3 until the Resume Mode icon is selected 3 Release the Fn key The system is now in Resume Mode Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 8 4 Learning the Basics When You Turn the Computer On Turning the Computer Off in Resume Mode To turn your computer off when you are using Resume Mode fol low these steps 1 2 3 4 Save your files to the hard disk or a diskette Check that the disk and CD activity lights are off Turn off the computer Turn off the power to any external devices connected to the computer If you realize you d like to continue working after all wait
133. Your Computer 1 3 Before You Go to a Computer Store Buying Hardware Choosing a Printer There are four main types of printer impact inkjet laser and thermal Impact Printers In these printers the characters are formed by a printhead hitting the paper The commonest form of impact printer is the dot matrix with a printhead consisting of 9 18 or 24 pins Dot matrix printers are the cheapest you can buy and also the cheapest to run But the print quality is inferior to non impact printers and budget priced models are slow typically printing 25 60 characters per second Also impact printers are noisy Although you can fit an acoustic hood to some models to make them quieter this may make access awkward when you need to replace the paper Impact printers are the only type that can handle multipart statio nery such as purchase requisitions and delivery notes However you would probably need a heavy duty commercial model for this To sum up impact printers are suitable for data listings particu larly if you want to use continuous stationery an option rarely offered on other types of printer and they are essential for multi part forms They are not suitable for correspondence reports and other documents where print quality is important Inkjet Printers These printers use bubblejet technology spraying ink onto paper Typically an inkjet printer has a resolution of 300x300 dpi dots per inch So print quality is good
134. according to the instructions in Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 8 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM 2 Click Start then point to Programs 3 Point to Accessories then point to System Tools 4 Click Create System Disks Windows 95 opens the Create System Disks program 5 Follow the instructions on the screen to create the program diskettes Running Master Disk Creator Master Disk Creator creates program diskettes for the rest of the programs pre installed on your computer if you decide not to buy the CD ROM It is a very simple program to use You ll need up to 40 high density diskettes to hold a complete set of program files more if you re using Windows for Workgroups Label the dis kettes as indicated by Master Disk Creator To run Master Disk Creator follow these steps 1 Make sure the diskette drive is connected to the computer If you re unsure how to do this see Connect the External Dis kette Drive on page 21 You may also swap the CD ROM and diskette drive according to the instructions in Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 2 Click Start then point to Programs 3 Point to Toshiba Utilities then click Master Disk Creator Master Disk Creator displays a welcome screen 4 Click OK Master Disk Creator displays a list of available disk images Part I Getting To Know Your Comp
135. act disc icon and title 4 Double click the icon If you double click the icon and the compact disc isn t in the CD ROM drive Windows 95 prompts you to insert the disc Adding New Titles When you buy a new compact disc always run the installation program that comes with the disc This program installs the icon that will access the contents of the compact disc For information about managing CD ROM titles see Managing Your CD ROMs on page 175 Playing an Audio CD When you insert an audio CD into your computer s CD ROM drive Windows 95 loads CD Player a program that automatically plays the CD To view the CD Player window click CD Player on the taskbar 5 F z ally z b m Artist New Artist lt E gt f Title New Title Track Track 4 lt 04 gt r Total Play 61 40 ms __ Track 03 45 m s The CD Player window Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 6 4 The Wide World of Multimedia Playing Back Sound Video and Animation Files To adjust the volume turn the volume control dial on the front of the computer To stop the CD click the stop button To eject a CD click the eject button in the CD Player window or press the CD ROM eject button on the right side of the computer If Windows 95 didn t start CD Player automatically when you inserted the audio CD follow these steps to start it now
136. agiCDisc you must have the CD ROM drive installed in the SelectBay Opening magiCDisc To open magiCDisc follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Programs 2 Point to magiCDisc 3 Click magiCDisc There are two primary screens in magiCDisc The main screen is shown in the following illustration The other is the CD Rack which contains a list of your CD ROMs The CD Rack is described in Looking at a List of CD ROMs on page 179 d magiCDisc File View Tools Help Browse CD Register Install CD The main screen Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 TI Managing Your CD ROMs From here you may perform a number of tasks You can add the CD ROM to your list by choosing the Regis ter button See Adding a CD ROM to the List on page 178 You can look through the files on the CD ROM and play one or more of them by choosing the Browse CD button See Looking at and Playing the Files on a CD ROM on page 181 K Ww K Ww If the CD ROM contains files that need to be installed on your hard disk you can start the installation process by choosing the Install CD button See Installing Programs from a CD ROM on page 183 K Ww You can view your list of CD ROMs by choosing the CD Rack button See Looking at a List of CD ROMs on page 179 K Ww You can customize magiCDisc by choosing the Options but ton See
137. aging Your CD ROMs on page 175 Turning the Power Off This section describes different ways to turn the computer off Using Resume Mode This guide describes two ways for you to turn the computer off and return to work in the same place the Suspend command and Resume Mode The Suspend command is a feature of Windows 95 In Windows for Workgroups you ll need to use Resume mode instead You can turn Resume Mode on with a hotkey in MaxTime or in TSETUP Turning the Computer Off When you re ready to turn the computer off assuming Resume Mode isn t turned on follow these steps 1 Save your files and close any programs you re using 2 In Program Manager press Alt F4 to exit Windows 3 Wait for MS DOS to display the command prompt Always wait until you see the command prompt before you turn the computer off You may see unpredictable results the next time you start Windows if you don t let it shut down opr completely 4 Turn the computer off Part III Appendixes Using Windows for Workgroups 47 1 Using Optional Devices in Windows for Workgroups Using Optional Devices in Windows for Workgroups Windows for Workgroups does not support the plug and play standard described for Windows 95 This means that when you connect an optional device such as a PC Card you ll need to set it up yourself This section provides information you ll need to use optional devices with Windows for Workgroups Using PC Car
138. alog box 8 Click OK to exit the Toshiba System Control Panel Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse You may think that when you have one Windows program open and want to open a different program you must click Start point to Programs and click the icon for the program you want to open Not necessarily Windows 95 shortcuts and Toshiba s Fn esse program provide quick ways to open programs documents and folders from within any Windows program For more information on making Windows 95 shortcuts see Lesson 8 Creating Short cuts on page 64 The following section describes how to use the Fn esse program to quickly access your programs and files You can assign a Fn key combination to Open a Windows program Open a file in its associated Windows program Display a customized folder of Windows programs and or files from which to choose Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 271 Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse You can assign any key that is not associated with a hotkey or a keyboard overlay This section explains how to assign your Fn key combinations and use them to open programs and documents quickly Starting Fn esse To start Fn esse click the Fn esse button on the Toshiba Access Panel Fn esse opens and displays the Fn esse keyboard x z cO PPR BEET EE PEE fof Options LERLE LL Pope ec PE F Help The Fn esse keyboard The keys are coded as follo
139. am Not every help topic window contains an icon to start a pro gram However when you do encounter one it s a great way to move from reading about your question to an instant solution 6 Just to clean up the desktop close both Help and Paint by clicking their close buttons Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 7 D Lesson 14 Turning Your Computer Off Toshiba Access Panel Help The Toshiba Access Panel provides three types of help In addition to traditional text help it provides video help which not only explains but demonstrates how to use its features Follow these steps 1 Click the help button at the bottom of the panel General help button Video help button About TAP button The help slider bar The help slider bar extends to the left displaying the video help general help and about TAP buttons 2 Click one of the buttons and follow the instructions on the screen You re almost done The next and last lesson tells you how to shut down Windows 95 and turn your computer off Lesson 14 Turning Your Computer Off It s very important that you let Windows 95 shut down your com puter As it shuts down Windows 95 performs a number of tasks that ensure that everything s in place the next time you turn the computer on This lesson teaches you how to shut down Windows 95 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 76 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 14 Turning Your Compu
140. and drag it until it s over the Recycle Bin 2 Release the primary button The icon disappears But with Windows 95 it isn t really gone It s merely set aside in the Recycle Bin from where you can restore or delete it later 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for any other icons you created dur ing this tutorial Each icon disappears as you drop it on the Recycle Bin icon 4 Double click the Recycle Bin icon Windows 95 opens the Recycle Bin window Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 11 Removing Objects from the Desktop 69 ee toes Sr NGF TUS TUS EVA OSEA SEA TOSSA Ue Dianalecateh 23 2 CJS SHBA e SI BAe eS EJAT cawanoows 5 m E34 Wes See Os SEJE OS rE Spr EVA Os SMIB T SHIZ ATOS HE KI J o SMEA mite Snare MDS MEA gzl n Ke iesta ary TOSIA Tos IBA Wo ISA IOS Seg 7 Vos POS rave POS nieve ols SHS FOs Cram ae OS riley yo Sale Sr A TOSSA gpl VA WOR VA OS reve os SHIBA T95 MIBA tira Sry Yny To SSA Os Shien VIG SHEA Bir OSEA OS SAY ae ey Vos IEA HOS te eat OSHIB TO SMBAVOSHIBA VTE SrA ost Pci AA WosrnleyA os SIE zA ios SMEA ues HRA Ws Jnly os IEA OSEA TO SME Vos raya Wo OSV T I onli JA u Sb As ross JA VOUS TIA T POS rE JEMEN Os Slee oj SMEA ANO SHIBA AStart Ej Recycle Bin S zam The desktop with the Recycle Bin window open
141. anel the Panel Power On Off option This option not only makes it easier to turn the computer s power on but makes it impossible to close the display panel while the com puter is on This option is called Trigger suspend resume when panel closes opens in the Toshiba System Control Panel and Panel Power On Off in TSETUP and is only avail able if you turn Resume Mode on This section shows you how to change the options using the Toshiba System Control Panel For information on using TSETUP refer to TSETUP on page 403 Follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 86 Making Life Easier Different Ways to Turn the Computer On and Off 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the Toshiba System icon Toshba The Toshiba System Control Panel opens with the Start Up System Options tab on top Start Up Options Poweron Timer Security Miscellaneous Start Up Sequence Floppy disk first then hard disk Hard disk first then floppy disk Start Up Mode Boot Resume B Trigger suspend resume when panel closes opens TOSHIBA Cancel boob __Detauts The Start Up Options tab of the Toshiba System Control Panel 4 Inthe Start Up Mode section select Resume Mode 5 To set the computer to turn on or off when you open or close the display
142. ards into either the upper or lower socket You may only insert a Type III card into the lower socket Inserting a Type III card takes up all the space for both slots you cannot have a Type III card installed with any other card To insert a PC Card follow these steps 1 Locate the PC Card slot on the left side of the computer Inserting a Type II PC Card into the PC Card slot 2 Insert the PC Card If you have a Type III card insert the connector into the lower part of the socket If you have a Type I or Type II card insert it into either the top or bottom half of the slot 3 When the card is almost all the way into the slot push firmly but gently to ensure a firm connection with the computer When the card is fully seated an eject button pops out the top button for the upper slot and the bottom button for the lower slot 4 Pull the eject button out slightly and fold it down to the left Do not force the card into position Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer Some PC Cards such as many fax modems are ready to use as soon as you install them Others such as network cards and SCSI adapters require additional steps to set them up to work with your computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Little Cards that Do Big Things 1 9 5 Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer Windows 95 makes setting up your PC Cards quick and easy When you insert your PC Card Windows 95 should display the New Hardware
143. art II Technical Reference The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button 381 system to create new schemes or remove any scheme other than Default It provides the following options Option Scheme Save As Delete Events Disable Enable Name Browse Play button triangle Stop button square Save Cancel Usage Displays the currently selected scheme You can select another scheme from the drop down list box Lets you save the selected scheme with a new name Removes the selected scheme from the system You cannot delete Default The sound files are not deleted from the system Displays all possible sound events in the selected scheme A loudspeaker icon indicates an event is currently enabled Changes the state of the event If the selected event is enabled this button has the caption Disable If the even is disabled this button has the caption Enable Shows the current sound file name You can edit the file name in this text box Displays the Browse for Event Sound dialog box refer to The Browse for Event Sound Dialog Box on page 382 Plays the sound file currently listed in the Name box Stops playing the sound file Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Part IT Technical Reference 3 8 The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button The Browse for Event Sound Dialog Box Look in
144. ase latch CD ROM drive in SelectBay CD activity light The right side The battery release latch prevents the battery from falling out accidentally This release is locked when it is moved down For more information see Changing Batteries on page 147 The SelectBay holds either a CD ROM drive or diskette drive An external diskette drive case holds the diskette drive when it s not currently installed For more information about the SelectBay see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 The contrast control dial adjusts the contrast of the display CDS models only The CD activity light glows when the system is accessing a disc in the CD ROM drive The CD ROM eject button opens the 5 25 inch CD ROM drive in the SelectBay when the computer s power is on Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 0 Finding Your Way around the System Find Out Where Everything s Located The manual eject button provides a way for you open the CD ROM drive when the computer s power is off If you left a com pact disc inside and have already turned the power off use a straightened paper clip or other slender object to press this button release the catch and open the drive The Underside Battery cover Memory slot cover Bay release Bay release lock NoteDock guides The underside The battery cover protects the battery which provides power to the compute
145. ble container to protect them and keep them clean You can use the boxes in which the diskettes were supplied or you can purchase special containers from your computer store Do not slide back the protective metal cover Do not touch the magnetic surface of a diskette Fingerprints can prevent the drive from reading the data held on a diskette Do not twist or bend a diskette Keep diskettes at room temperature and don t expose them to direct sunlight Otherwise data may be lost Do not place heavy objects on your diskettes Do not eat smoke or use erasers near your diskettes Foreign particles inside a diskette s protective jacket can damage its surface Keep your diskettes away from speakers radios television sets and other sources of magnetic fields which could damage the data on the diskettes If a diskette is dirty clean it with a soft cloth moistened in water Do not use cleaning fluids Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 1 0 3 How to Copy Something to a Diskette How to Copy Something to a Diskette Diskettes provide an easy means of transferring files from one computer to another Copying a file to a diskette also gives you a backup copy in case something happens to the original on your hard disk This section describes how to use the My Computer window to copy a file from the hard disk to a diskette To copy a file from the hard disk to a diskette follow these steps 1 If your
146. call charges also apply Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 1 2 Connecting to the World The Internet and Other Fascinating Places Some services charge by the hour If your service charges by the hour make sure you know how long you ve been on line It s easy to lose track of time and run up the costs when you re exploring the Internet or an on line service Some services offer both flat and hourly rates What Software Do You Need To sign up with an on line service or log on to the Internet directly you need a suitable communications program L K Ww If you re subscribing to an on line service or an Internet service provider you need a start up kit for the service The start up kit includes everything you need to set up your account along with the program you use to access the service It may be supplied free as an inducement to use that service or you may need to buy it If you re using a local Internet service provider the provider will likely offer or recommend a software package for access ing the Internet Types of Internet Services Each network that belongs to the Internet is a site on the Inter net There are different types of Internet sites K K2 Ww A World Wide Web WWW site is a place where people can publish their own home pages Each page has a unique address in the form of a Universal Resource Locator URL You can locate a specific home page by entering its
147. cally shows the current chapter in the Bookmark Name field as the default name and displays a list of currently defined bookmarks Type the name and click OK If you click OK without typing a name the current chapter name becomes the bookmark If the name is already assigned to another bookmark the pro gram displays a message Type the new bookmark name and click OK The electronic book program creates a consecutively numbered bookmark and places it in the text at the upper edge of the book To view a marked section click its assigned bookmark and the program switches to the corresponding text location Deleting a Bookmark To delete a previously defined bookmark follow these steps 1 On the Bookmark menu click Define or click the yellow bookmark icon in the lower right corner of the screen The program displays the Define Bookmark dialog box which includes the list of currently defined bookmarks Select the bookmark name you wish to delete Click delete and click OK Part III Appendixes 47 4 Using Windows for Workgroups Getting Help With Windows for Workgroups Using Cross References Cross references which display as underlined text allow you to move quickly to sections containing information related to the material in the current section For example from the batteries sec tion you can go directly to the MaxTime discussion by clicking the cross reference To view a cross reference follow these
148. card even while the computer is on This is called hot swapping For example if you want to switch between a hard disk and a modem PC Card you can do it while you re working without turning the computer off and back on again While you can insert a PC Card at any time applying a bit of com mon sense about when you remove a card will make your comput ing life much happier Just remember not to remove a card while it s in use You probably won t break anything but you could lose valuable information For example Do not remove a modem card while it is communicating Do not remove a hard disk card while the system is accessing the card Do not remove a SCSI card while any of the SCSI devices con nected to it are operating Do not remove a network card while you are connected to the network Use Windows 95 to stop the PC Card before removing it according to the instructions in Removing a PC Card on page 196 Inserting PC Cards CAUTION OK You ve bought your first PC Card and want to install it This section describes how to install the card Windows 95 provides the Card and Socket Services for your PC Card Even if your PC Card comes with its own version of Card and Socket Services you should use the files included in Windows 95 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 9 4 Little Cards that Do Big Things Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer You may insert Type I or Type II c
149. ch effort but by treating your battery right you can make sure it provides maximum power storage for a long time The following sections offer tips on how to take care of your battery Safety Precautions K Ww K Ww K Ww K Ww Never try to disassemble a battery pack Don t overcharge or reverse charge a battery Overcharging will shorten its life and reverse charging could destroy it caus ing the release of toxic fumes Don t touch the metal terminals of the battery with another metal object Short circuiting the battery will cause it to over heat and may do permanent damage Never incinerate a spent battery as this will cause it to explode releasing toxic materials If a battery is leaking or damaged replace it immediately Use protective gloves when handling a damaged battery When you need to replace the main battery use an identical battery from the same manufacturer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 57 Additional Power Options Five Steps to a Happy Battery Don t leave the computer plugged in and unused for more than a few hours Overcharging the main battery may shorten its life If you re not going to use the computer for a long period remove the battery pack Alternate between battery packs if you have a spare Make sure your computer is turned off or suspended when youre replacing the battery pack Store spare battery packs
150. choose Windows 95 the default click Next To choose Windows for Workgroups click Change Setup displays the Operating System Choice screen Click No I want to install MS DOS 6 22 and Microsoft Windows for Workgroups 3 1 then click OK Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 3 1 When You Turn the Computer On the First Time Setup displays a Windows 95 Setup Wizard screen even if you chose Windows for Workgroups and installs the devices it found on your system This screen displays the message Please wait while Setup prepares your Windows 95 computer whether you chose Windows 95 or not If you chose Windows for Workgroups and still see this message don t be alarmed Setup displays the Finishing Setup screen prompting you to restart your computer 10 Click Finish to restart the computer The computer restarts and loads the operating system you selected If you chose Windows for Workgroups follow the instructions in the following section Finish the Windows for Workgroups Setup Procedure to complete the setup proce dure If you chose Windows 95 follow the instructions in Fin ish the Windows 95 Setup Procedure on page 33 to complete the setup procedure Finish the Windows for Workgroups Setup Procedure After the computer restarts and loads Windows for Workgroups the system displays a Windows Setup screen prompting you for your name company and product numb
151. click Add Fn esse displays a directory tree that allows you to select a pro gram or file Select the program or file you want to add to your custom folder The browser displays the file name you select in the text field Click Open Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box and adds the selected program or file to the list of files in the custom folder Assignment BE r Assignment for FreF Assignment Type Custom Folder Re Assign Tow Description My Folded File Selection Curent Fil TASONY Player ere CASONY Dunzip cll CASONY ToshO003 vid CAMAGICD Magicd32 exe Add Remove Remove a r Popup display options No Path displayed Ki I No Extension displayed NA Most Recently Used Sort The Assignment dialog box with the added files 9 In the Popup display options section of the dialog box select how the items in the pop up list will display No Path displayed displays the program or file without the path No Extension displayed displays the program or file with out the file extension Most Recently Used Sort displays the programs and files ordered by most recent usage Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 277 Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse 10 To remove a file from the list of current files select the file and click Remove To remove all files from the current list click Rem
152. communicates with the CPU must have a unique I O port address The following table lists the device names and their assigned I O port addresses for the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer Port address h Device function Notes 000 01F 82C37 DMA Controller 1 020 03F 82C59 PIC 1 Part III Appendixes 4 5 2 System Resources Input Output Port Address Assignments Port address h Device function Notes 040 05F 82C54 Timer 060 06F Keyboard Controller 060 and 064 are KBC 061 is system status port 070 NMI mask register 070 07F Real Time Clock 080 09F DMA page register 0A0 OBF 82C59 PIC 2 0C0 0DF 82C37 DMA Controller 2 OEO OEF Special Register OFO OF7 Math Coprocessor 100 1EF VGA 1FO 1FF Hard Disk Controller 201 Joy Stick 202 21F Not used 220 22F Not used Sound System default 230 23F Not used Available for Sound System 240 24F Not used Available for Sound System 250 25F Not used Available for Sound System 260 277 Not used 278 27F LPT2 280 2E7 Not used Part III Appendixes Port address h 2E8 2EF 2FO 2F7 2F8 2FF 300 33F 340 35F 360 377 378 37F 380 387 388 38B 38C 38F 390 39F 3A0 3AF 3B0 3BF 3C0 3DF 3E0 3E7 3F0 3F7 3E8 3EF System Resources 4 5 3 Input Output Port Address Assignments Device function Notes Serial Port or Infrared Port COM4 Not used Serial Port or Infrared Port COM2 Not used Not used Not used LPT1 Not used Sound System OPL3 MIDI
153. ction shows that the hard disk is set to Enhanced IDE mode Option HDD Mode Settings Enhanced default Standard IDE Usage Use Enhanced for MS DOS or Windows 95 Use Standard for Novell Netware or Unix environments that do not recognize hard disks larger than 540MB Restart Y PASSWORD This group lets you set or reset the user level system password For more information about the computer s password features see Using a Password on page 245 Settings Restart Registered N Not Registered default If you set a new password TSETUP offers you the chance to cre ate a password service diskette This diskette lets you start the computer even if you forget your password For complete infor mation about creating and using a password service diskette see Protecting Against Forgetfulness on page 248 Part IT Technical Reference voros 409 I O PORTS Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings This group allows you to configure communications port settings for the serial and parallel ports Changes you make to these settings in TSETUP will not affect Windows 95 To set these options for Windows 95 use the Ports icon in Windows 95 Device Manager Refer to Using Device Manager to Configure Your System on page 283 Serial Port COM 3F8H IRQ4 default COM2 2F8H IRQ3 COM3 3E8H IRQ4 COM3 3E8H IRQS COM3 3E8H IRQ7 COM4 2E8H IRQ3 COM4 2E8H IRQS COM4 2E8H
154. d MEMORY TEST xxxxKB Successful Test Results If the system verifies that all components connected to the system are functional the computer beeps once then starts Windows 95 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 320 If Something Goes Wrong Fixing Device Related Problems Unsuccessful Test Results If the system verification test fails the computer does one of the following Stops updating the memory counter and does not proceed to display information or messages Beeps once but displays no new messages Displays random characters and does not function normally Displays an error message Turn the computer off and make sure all optional devices are con nected properly and turned on Then turn the computer on and run the test again If the test fails a second time you have demon strated that you can reproduce the problem and it s time to contact a trained technician Other Circumstances The computer normally beeps at the conclusion of a successful system verification If the system speaker is set to Disabled this beep will not occur If the speaker is turned on enabled and the system verification completes but you don t hear a beep the speaker may be faulty Though this does not affect the computer s operation you may wish to contact your dealer and have it repaired If the system verification is successful but the operating system won t load refer to Problems When You Turn the Computer On
155. d Work PC Cards require Card and Socket Services software While this title sounds rather complex it s nothing to worry about it s merely a set of programs that acts as a translator between the PC Card and the computer and makes hot swapping switching cards while the computer is on possible Windows 95 comes with all the Card and Socket Services pro grams already installed To ensure complete compatibility with all the features of Windows 95 use the Windows 95 built in Card and Socket Services rather than the version that came with your PC Card Using a ZV PC Card requires the CardWizard software to be loaded in addition to the built in Windows 95 Card and Socket Services To set up the Card and Socket Services programs for your PC Card see Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer on page 194 PC Cards and Suspending the Computer Windows 95 s Card and Socket Services software is designed to support Toshiba s Resume Mode and Windows 95 s Suspend command If you use another manufacturer s Card and Socket Services software instead the system may not recognize your PC Card when you turn the computer on in Resume Mode If this happens shut down and restart the computer and the system will recognize the card Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Little Cards that Do Big Things HotSwapping 1 93 Hot Swapping One of the really great things about PC Cards is that you can exchange one PC Card for another
156. d ports The steps in this section provide an overview of how to use TranXit to transfer files For more detailed information about TranXit refer to the program s on line help Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 1 07 Transferring Files to Another Computer To use TranXit to transfer files through The serial port you ll need a null modem serial cable The parallel port you ll need a LapLink compatible parallel cable The infrared port you ll need another computer with either an internal or external infrared port Set Up Your File Transfer To set up your file transfer follow these steps Ce ss f 5 Uomo a ae C C e Je Serial port Port cover Infrared port Parallel port The left side and back of the computer 1 Use one of these methods to connect the two computers For a serial connection connect the serial cable to each computer s serial port Fora parallel connection connect the parallel cable to each computer s parallel port For an infrared connection aim the computer s infrared port directly at the infrared port on the other computer The two computers must be within 3 feet 1 meter of each other On one of the computers click Start then point to Programs Point to TranXit2 then click TranXit Windows 95 opens the TranXit program On the S
157. dea eke ye le Wunee cute 391 392 The Iviiscellane us Pagestcsc 0 i jean teeta ee The Maxlime Control Panel MaxTime You can use the MaxTime Wizard or the MaxTime Control Panel to customize the computer s power saving features To use the MaxTime Wizard click its button on the Toshiba Access Panel and follow the instructions on the screen To enter your power settings using the MaxTime Control Panel follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the MaxTime icon The MaxTime Control Panel opens The MaxTime Control Panel provides three pages of configuration options arranged like a stack of file folders Each page of options has its own tab To view or change these options click the corresponding tab 387 388 The MaxTime Control Panel The Power Settings Page The four buttons at the bottom of the MaxTime Control Panel per form the following functions Button Function OK Saves current settings and exits the MaxTime Control Panel Cancel Ignores current settings and exits the MaxTime Control Panel Apply Applies the settings to the current session Help Opens on line help The Power Settings Page Power Settings Battery Alarms Miscellaneous hal O Battery 3 Exteinal r Power Usage Power Usage Mode Full Power E 4 Low High T 30 minutes Disabled Disabled High Speed Enabled Bright T
158. dem If it does not display the correct information you may have to reinstall your modem see Using a PC Card Modem on page 202 or Using an External Modem on page 203 for more information Click OK twice to exit modem diagnostics and then close the Control Panel Click Start point to Programs point to Accessories and click Dial Up Networking The system opens the Dial Up Networking Wizard Click Next to begin the setup Type a name to identify the location you are calling For example My Office if you are calling your office s local area network LAN or XXX where XXX is the name of your Internet service provider The modem you installed should be listed under Select a Modem Click Next to continue Type the telephone number of the network you are calling including the area code and click Next Select the appropriate country code if you are dialing an inter national number You can set up additional Dial Up Network ing locations after you have completed the setup for the first location Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 220 Connecting to the World Logging On to an On line Service or the Internet 9 Click Finish to add the connection to your Dial Up Net working folder 10 To set specific connection options click the connection in the Dial Up Networking folder then right click and select Properties De select Use country code and area code for local calls 11 Click Server type
159. device The Resources tab lists the resources assigned to the device If you have a device conflict it is shown in the Conflicting device list The Drivers tab displays the drivers being used by the device For further information about Device Manager refer to Windows 95 on line help Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 1 9 Fixing Device Related Problems Fixing Device Related Problems If you don t have a hardware conflict but you think your problem could be related to one of your computer s devices the first thing to do is run a system verification test A system verification test confirms that the factory installed devices connected to the com puter are working This includes testing the memory hard disk diskette drive display and additional devices you may have con nected to the system After running the test read the rest of this section that describes problems and solutions related to specific devices For more exten sive testing see The Diagnostic Test on page 421 Running the System Verification Test To verify the system follow these steps 1 Turn the computer off 2 If Resume Mode is off hold the spacebar as you press the power button If Resume Mode is on hold the spacebar as you press the reset button System verification displays the following message for a few seconds as the computer tests memory C Copyright 19 gt xx Toshiba Corp All rights reserve
160. diskette drive is not installed in the SelectBay connect the external diskette drive or swap drives in the SelectBay To swap drives see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 Insert a formatted diskette into the diskette drive If you re unsure how to format a diskette refer to How to Pre pare Diskettes for Use on page 100 Double click My Computer Windows 95 opens the My Computer window Double click the drive that contains the file you want to copy Windows 95 displays the contents of the drive Double click the folder that contains the file then click the file you want to copy As in earlier versions of Windows you can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select more than one file Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 0 4 Learning the Basics How to Back Up Your Work 6 Click File then click Send To 7 Click the icon for the diskette drive drive A Windows 95 copies the file s You can also copy a file to diskette by clicking the file or files you want to copy with the secondary button then point ing to Send To and clicking 3 1 2 Floppy A How to Back Up Your Work Murphy s law applies to everything even computers Therefore it s a good idea to make periodic copies of everything on your computer s hard disk and store them in a safe place This is called backing up your files Murphy s Law If anything can go wrong it will at the worst possible moment 7 DEFINITION You
161. dows 95 You use its features to start programs find docu ments set up system components and most other computing tasks The following illustration identifies the major features of the desktop PIBA TISTSs TISSA TIN om JONI TSAA TOSHMYATOSr a BA ee IBA no Sj LWosrnleys vosrlava To Tosi BA To SISA TOS sree TOSA Icons ee SMIE i TY JIRA A TOSIRA TOSHI DP rosHise i T9 rllz A gs Srl z TOSHIBA 7 HAT Recycle Bin icon Says Poss TO Sle TOSHSA TOSA TOS ey Site ad FENN OSH TOSMIBA posi SA TOSHIBA TOS ae A TOS 1 TOS Tgn VD sjn SAS OSHIBE Sr ljeyve us SSA l HIBA ojs SJE DE Seen HEA e T SHIBA Oe IBA SOS ZSE SMIBA JHE SHEN Ms oj FIBA TOSHSA JSIBHA vos HE MeOH Ba SWRA jos S TY HBA TOSHIBA 1 Os Sl BA TOSHSA TOSSA Tosi SISA TOE ame TOSHI ATOSHBATOS x EATI ISN a OSTA TOSHIBA TO rie Taskbar L m Start button tascen Toshiba Access Panel The desktop The Start button does just what it says You can use it to start pro grams and open documents files and folders within Windows 95 see Lesson 5 Starting Programs on page 59 The taskbar lets you know what documents you currently have open It may also display the time Right now the taskbar is blank because you haven t started anything As you
162. ds Little Cards that Do Big Things on page 189 describes the pro grams required to use PC Cards These programs are part of Windows 95 For Windows for Workgroups CardWizard provides the Card and Socket Services programs you need to use PC Cards on your sys tem See the CardWizard documentation for instructions for set ting up PC Card support These programs were specifically designed for your Toshiba computer Even if your PC Card comes with its own Card and Socket Services programs try the programs included with your computer first Resolving Resource Conflicts If you add a device that uses the resources already assigned to another device your system stops working and you must resolve the resource conflict For an introduction to the resources used by the system see Resolving Hardware Conflicts on Your Own on page 315 Make a list all the resources used by your optional devices The documentation for each device will tell you how to determine these Part III Appendixes 472 Using Windows for Workgroups Getting Help With Windows for Workgroups Once your list is complete check it against the lists in System Resources on page 449 Make sure that none or your optional devices conflict with the preset system assignments If you can t locate the source of the conflict remove all optional devices and add them on at a time checking after each to see if the conflict reappears Getting Help With Windo
163. dule partially ejects from the external dis kette drive case External diskette drive case Diskette drive module Removing the diskette drive from the external diskette drive case 3 Pull the diskette drive module out of the external diskette drive case and set it aside Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 1 1 3 Swapping Drives in the SelectBay Prepare the Computer Follow these steps to prepare the computer for switching drives 1 Shut down the computer YTN Make sure the power is off before you swap a drive module sr0P into or out of the SelectBay Removing or inserting a drive DA module while the computer is on may damage the computer the drive module or both 2 Disconnect the power cord and any other cables Remove the Drive from the SelectBay Follow these steps to remove the drive from the SelectBay 1 Turn the computer upside down with the front of the com puter facing you Bay release y Drive module Bay release lock Releasing the drive from the SelectBay 2 Slide the bay release lock toward the rear of the computer 3 Pull up on the bay release until the drive module ejects slightly Pull the release only as far as needed to eject the drive mod ule The release is not intended to be pulled straight up CAUTION Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 1 4 Learning the Basics Swapping Drives in the SelectBay Removing the drive module from the SelectBay
164. e You can assign key combinations to different tasks in each of your Toshiba Access Panel configurations To assign a Fn key combina tion to a task in a specific configuration follow these steps 1 2 Open Fn esse Click the desired key in the Fn esse keyboard Fn esse displays a shortcut menu Point to Assign To Select File Program Folder or Custom Folder Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box Click the configuration button Fn esse displays the Assignment for Fn x dialog box where Fn x is the key combination to which you re assigning the task This dialog box provides tabs for each of the configurations Click the tab for the configuration in which you want to assign the Fn key combination Follow the instructions in Assigning a Key to a Program or a File Assigning a Key to a Program Folder or Assigning a Key to a Custom Folder to finish assigning the key combination Click OK Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 2 8 1 Working with the Keyboard 9 Fn esse returns you to the Assignment dialog box 10 Click OK to save your key assignment and exit the dialog box The program folder is now associated with the Fn key combi nation To open the program folder press Fn plus the appropri ate key from within Windows Working with the Keyboard This section introduces additional keyboard options Making Your Keyboard Pretend it Has More Keys The 101 key enhanc
165. e information about master program diskettes see Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM on page 35 Follow these steps to reinstall the Windows QuickStart 3 11 Edition 1 If your diskette drive is not installed in the SelectBay con nect the external diskette drive or replace the CD ROM drive with the diskette drive in the SelectBay To exchange the drives see Swapping Drives in the Select Bay on page 111 On the File menu click Run then type the command line a install Windows for Work Groups displays the Run dialog box In the Run dialog box and click OK and follow the instructions on the screen to define the location of the files If the directory you select does not exist the installation program creates it for you Part III Appendixes
166. e properties of a configuration create a new configuration or remove an existing configuration It provides the following options Option Move Left Move Right Properties Remove Enable Usage Moves the selected configuration button on the configuration slider bar one position to the left Moves the selected configuration button on the configuration slider bar one position to the right Displays the Configuration Properties dialog box for the selected configuration refer to The Con figuration Properties Dialog Box on page 370 Removes the selected configuration from the sys tem You cannot remove the currently active configuration Displays the Enable Configuration dialog box when an inactive configuration button is selected allowing you to create a new Toshiba Access Panel configuration refer to The Enable Config uration Dialog Box on page 371 Part IT Technical Reference 3 The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button Option Close Advanced Usage Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Displays the Advanced Configuration Manage ment dialog box for the selected configuration refer to The Advanced Configuration Manage ment Dialog Box on page 372 The Configuration Properties Dialog Box The Configuration Properties dialog box This dialog box displays the properties of the selected configuration It provides the following options
167. e Control Panel 3 Double click the Date Time icon The system displays the Date Time Properties dialog box 2x 126456 i E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ae 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 9 02 16AM E Current time zone Pacific Standard Time Conca The Date Time Properties dialog box This dialog box has two tabs Click a tab to bring it to the front To open this dialog box more quickly click the time display on the taskbar with the secondary button then click Adjust Date Time 4 On the Date amp Time tab select the correct month year day and time Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 68 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 11 Removing Objects from the Desktop 5 On the Time Zone tab select your time zone from the drop down list box 6 When you ve finished click OK Go on to the next section to finish cleaning up the desktop Lesson 11 Removing Objects from the Desktop Earlier in this tutorial you created some new icons on the desktop Since everything you ve done up to this point has been for prac tice you Il want to return the desktop to its original uncluttered state This lesson explains how to remove objects from the desktop and introduces the Recycle Bin To remove your new icons from the desktop follow these steps 1 Click the icon for the folder you created in Lesson 4 Cre ating a New Folder
168. e External Diskette Drive and gently pull the connector out of the external diskette drive port after disconnecting the drive you will get a disk error care message E If you try to access a diskette in the external diskette drive Inserting and Removing Diskettes Disk eject button Diskette drive Protective cover gt gt Label Disk insertion slot Inserting a diskette A protective flap inside the disk insertion slot automatically retracts when you insert a diskette The previous illustration shows the correct insertion procedure Make sure your fingers are touching the label and that the protective cover points toward the diskette drive When the dis kette is almost completely in the drive you will feel a slight resis tance Push the diskette gently into place When the diskette is securely in the drive the disk eject button pops out Push the disk eject button to remove a diskette from the drive Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 4 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Connecting a Parallel Printer Connecting a Parallel Printer If you already have a printer now is a great time to connect it to the computer If you don t have a printer or don t wish to connect it yet don t worry You can always connect one later The most common type of printer is a parallel printer To connect a parallel printer you ll need a standard parallel printer cable You may have received a cable when you purchased your pri
169. e MS DOS Programs on page 88 Starting a Program from an Icon To start a program that has an icon in the Programs menu follow these steps which use the Windows 95 Wordpad program as an example 1 Click Start then point to Programs Windows 95 displays the Programs menu which lists pro grams and program groups If your program is listed got to step 3 otherwise continue with step 2 2 Point to the program group in this case Accessories Windows 95 displays the Accessories menu Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 87 How to Starta Program 3 Click the program in this case Wordpad Windows 95 opens Wordpad Wordpad is a text editor a scaled down word processor without the frills That s really all there is to it To close the program click the close button at the upper right corner of the window Starting a Program from the Explorer If a program isn t in the Programs menu you can start it in Win dows Explorer To use this method you need to know the file name and location of the program This example like the one above opens Wordpad using its file name of WORDPAD EXE To start a program from the Explorer follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Programs 2 Click Windows Explorer Windows 95 opens the Explorer 3 Inthe left part of the window under the C icon double click the folder containing the program in this case Pro gram Files The Explorer shows th
170. e a PS MOUSE 9 4 00 44 teen e 4 pees te eae eis 233 Using the Optional NoteDock 0 0 e eee e eens 235 Applying Physical Restraints 000 eeeeeeee eens 241 Using Your Computer on Your Desk Your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer was designed to be easy to carry around and use while you travel However it s also powerful enough to use as your primary desktop computer This chapter describes how to connect several optional devices that can make your computer at home on your desk Using an External Monitor You can easily attach an external monitor to your computer Some external monitors display more information than the computer s built in screen is capable of displaying Also having an external monitor makes the entire display bigger 22 2 2 8 Using Your Computer on Your Desk Using an External Monitor Connecting an External Monitor To connect an external monitor follow these steps 1 Turn the computer off Cable Monitor port Connecting an external monitor 2 Connect the monitor s video cable to the monitor port on the back of the computer 3 Turn the external monitor on 4 Turn the computer on The computer uses the external monitor If your external monitor can display higher resolution video modes than 800 x 600 you can take advantage of this feature by changing the video mode To do this see Changing the Display Mode on page 287 Part I Getting To Know Your Compute
171. e contents of the Program Files folder on the right side of the window The left side of the window shows all the folders contained within the Program Files folder 4 Click Accessories The Explorer shows the contents of the Accessories folder on the right side of the window 5 Double click Wordpad Windows 95 opens Wordpad Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 8 8 Learning the Basics How to Use the Keyboard Starting Some MS DOS Programs Most MS DOS programs will run in Windows 95 If an MS DOS program won t run follow these steps 1 Click Start then click Shut Down Windows 95 displays the Shut Down Windows dialog box Click Restart the computer in MS DOS mode then click Yes Windows 95 shuts down the computer then restarts it in MS DOS mode and displays a system prompt Refer to the program s documentation for the command that starts the program At the system prompt type the command and press Enter How to Use the Keyboard This section describes the keys on the computer keyboard and explains how it differs from a typewriter keyboard The Character Keys For the letter and number keys typing on a computer keyboard is very much like typing on a typewriter However there are some exceptions KP When you press the spacebar a computer does not simply pass over an area of the page like a typewriter does Instead it cre ates a space character just as it creates characters representing letter
172. e low battery alarm and other system alarms beep This also affects sounds generated by any PC Card modem installed This option is equivalent to the Alarm Volume option in TSETUP Option Enable audible warning for emergency battery condition Settings Enabled check Disabled no check Usage Enables and disables the system s built in audible battery alarm This option is equivalent to the Low Battery Alarm option in TSETUP Part IT Technical Reference Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage The Toshiba System Control Panel 40 1 The Miscellaneous Page Enable audible warning when panel closes Enabled check Disabled no check Enables and disables the alarm that sounds when you close the display panel while the computer is on For more information see How and When to Turn the Computer Off on page 115 This option is equivalent to the Panel Close Alarm option in TSETUP Enable system beep warning Enabled check Disabled check Enables and disables your software s use of the system speaker This affects alarms and system beeps but not the sound system This option is equivalent to the System Beep option in TSETUP Pointing Devices Enable AccuPoint only if PS 2 mouse is not connected at power on time Enable both AccuPoint and PS 2 mouse simultaneously Selects whether an external pointing device disables the
173. e or more key words separated by semicolons into this box and click OK To show all the CD ROMs of the selected type all data audio or photo click Clear Previous Search K Ww Looking at and Playing the Files on a CD ROM a To look through a list of files on a CD ROM follow these steps 1 Click the Browse button This button is available in the both the main and rack screens and the Inspector dialog box You can only browse the CD ROM if the CD ROM selected in the rack is the same as the one in the drive The CD ROM Browser opens Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 82 The Wide World of Multimedia Managing Your CD ROMs CD ROM Browser Audio Video Image Animation Data Close Help The initial CD ROM Browser 2 Click the Audio Video Image Animation or Data button to search for files of a particular type The extended CD ROM Browser opens CD ROM Browser Format Filter WAY Wave D MSVC15 RES FROG WAV D MSVC15 RES GIVEUP WAV D MSVC15 RES GOODBYE WAV D MSVC15 RES INCORREC WAV D MSVC15 RES PIG WAY Kl Select All Unselect All Mark All Unmark All Current media file Play Stop Pause Frame advance Frame back The CD ROM Browser 3 Select one or more files in the playlist To select more than one file press Ctr as you click files beyond the first To select several adjacent files press Shift when you click
174. e the PC Card slot on the left side of the computer Inserting a Type II PC Card into the PC Card slot 2 Insert the modem into either the top or bottom half of the slot If you have a Type III card insert the connector into the lower part of the socket If you have a Type I or Type II card insert it into either the top or bottom half of the slot Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting ete 2 0 3 3 When the card is almost all the way into the slot push firmly but gently to ensure a firm connection with the computer When the card is fully seated an eject button pops out the top button for the upper slot and the bottom button for the lower slot 4 Pull the eject button out slightly and fold it down to the left Do not force the card into position For more information about using PC Cards see Little Cards that Do Big Things on page 189 After you ve installed the card connect the telephone cable from the card to the wall jack Setting Up a PC Card Modem When you insert a PC Card modem into the computer Windows 95 attempts to recognize it automatically and should dis play a New Hardware Found message If Windows 95 can t recognize the card follow the steps in Set ting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer on page 194 Using an External Modem Once you ve purchased your external modem and taken it out of its box this section describes how to install it and make it ready to use
175. e the battery will discharge completely 5 To hide the Gauge Gallery click its close button The Gauge Gallery disappears The application icons provide a convenient way to start pro grams Clicking an icon starts its associated program You can add your own application icons to the panel 6 For example to add the Windows 95 My Briefcase pro gram to the panel click the My Briefcase icon and drag it to the application icons section of the Toshiba Access Panel Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 7 3 Lesson 13 If m Lost What Do I Do The panel displays a pop up menu 7 Click Add to All to display the My Briefcase icon on the panel for all your configurations Click Add to Home Office Travel to display the My Briefcase icon on the panel for the current configuration only Lesson 13 If I m Lost What Do Do Windows 95 and the Toshiba Access Panel both provide excellent on line help This lesson provides instructions for using both Windows 95 Help Windows 95 has an excellent help facility If you can t figure out how to do something the answer is probably only a few clicks away Assume that you want to draw a picture but don t know how Follow these steps 1 Click Start then click Help Windows 95 opens the Help window 2 If you don t see the Index page click the Index tab Help displays the Index page elp Top do p 21x Contents Index Find 1 Type the first
176. e way although the hard disk has a much higher capacity and provides much faster data access than a diskette Like a tape recorder a disk drive reads and writes magnetically encoded information on magnetic media The drive positions a read write head above the surface of the disk when it records and retrieves information Before a drive can read from or write to a disk the disk must have a specific structure Formatting a disk creates this structure Tracks Sectors within one track Item of information Tracks and sectors of a disk Formatting divides each side of the disk into concentric circles called tracks Each track is divided into sectors Each item of infor mation stored on a disk has a specific address composed of its side track and sector number This address makes it possible for the computer to locate the information on the disk A diskette has just two surfaces A hard disk consists of a set of platters on a central spindle So it has several surfaces with a read write head for each Part I Getting To Know Your Computer What s Really Going On 2 9 5 How Does a Disk Store Information The amount of data a disk can hold depends on how it is format ted In double density format it holds 720KB in high density for mat it holds 1 44MB Your computer s diskette drive can handle both formats A hard disk holds as much data as several hundred diskettes Your computer s hard disk holds 1 35 billion bytes
177. e with the Toshiba Advanced Dialog Interface It provides the following options Option Usage Enable sound effects Sound Scheme Configuration button When this option is selected sounds defined by the chosen sound scheme are enabled Lets you select a sound scheme from the drop down list box Displays the Sound Effects dialog box refer to The Sound Effects Dialog Box on page 380 and allows you to set different sound effects for each configuration Part IT Technical Reference 3 8 The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button Option Usage Edit Schemes Displays the Edit Sound Schemes dialog box refer to The Edit Sound Schemes Dialog Box on page 380 OK Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Cancel Discards your changes and closes the dialog box The Sound Effects Dialog Box a ES OL Cancel The Sound Effects dialog box This dialog box lets you assign specific sound effects to each of your configurations The options are the same as the Sounds dia log box refer to The Sounds Dialog Box on page 379 The Edit Sound Schemes Dialog Box Sound Schemes Save a jame fc Toshiba The Edit Sound Schemes dialog box This dialog box allows you to change the sound properties of any Toshiba Advanced Dialog Interface sound scheme present on the P
178. ed keyboard has two Enter Ctrl and Alt keys The Satellite Pro 430 Series keyboard has only one of each Most of the time there s no difference between the two keys How ever some programs assign separate functions to the right and left Ctrl and Alt keys or to the regular and numeric pad Enter keys on the enhanced keyboard The Fn key allows the Satellite Pro 430 Series keyboard to simulate these separate keys as follows Press Fn Ctrl to simulate the Ctrl key on the right side of the enhanced keyboard Press Fn Alt to simulate the Alt key on the right side of the enhanced keyboard Press Fn Enter to simulate the Enter key on the numeric pad of the enhanced keyboard Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 82 Making Life Easier Working with the Keyboard The Cursor Control Overlay The keys with the white arrows and blue symbols on the left front are the cursor control overlay This illustration highlights the keys in the cursor control overlay The cursor control overlay You can use these keys to S Move the cursor up down left or right on the screen K Ww Move up or down one page S Move to the beginning or end of a document o Delete or insert characters K How these keys function may vary with the program you re using Check your program s documentation for information on how the cursor keys function To turn the cursor control overlay on and off press
179. een CRT Colors is the maximum number of simultaneous colors or shades of gray that the mode can display on an external monitor 45 4 5 8 Video Modes CDS Model Video Modes Scan Freq hor vert is the horizontal and vertical scanning frequency in Hertz This is for external monitors only Dy All SVGA modes are supported with help from the SVGA d driver TECHNICAL Multiple refresh rates for external monitor are supported by help from the SVGA video driver with Chips CPL CDS Model Video Modes This table lists the video modes for the CDS Model computer 640 x 480 modes will not use the entire area of the built in display In DOS there will be a blank band at the upper and lower edges of the screen using these modes Internal LCD External Monitor Mode Grid Grid Scan Freq hex Type Resolution pelxpel Colors pelxpel Colors hor vert 0 1 VGA 40 x 25 8x8 16 222K 8x8 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 2 3 VGA 80 x 25 8x8 16 222K 8x8 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 0 1 VGA 40 x 25 8x14 16 222K 8x14 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 2 3 VGA 80x25 8x14 16 2220K_ 8x14 16 256K__ 31 SKHz 70Hz Text 0 1 VGA 40 x 25 8 9 x 16 16 222K 9x16 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 2 3 VGA 80 x 25 89 x 16 16 222K 9x 16 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Text 4 5 VGA 320x200 8x8 4 222K 8x8 4 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph 6 VGA 640x200 8x8 2 222K 8x8 2 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph Part III Appe
180. eference Chapter 18 The Start Up Options Page ec lt c c2 uw aa saa esse enna egeeaics 396 The Power On Timer Page 24 dea sieve uke cut oh 397 Phe Secuuty Patent cresine ae eee eke are Ge ees 399 The Miscellaneous Page 414 Yhw eee Gs aaa eee e eg tens 400 The Toshiba system Control Panel Toshiba System To open the Toshiba System Control Panel follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the Toshiba System icon The Toshiba System Control Panel opens The Toshiba System Control Panel provides four pages of config uration options arranged like a stack of file folders Each page of options has its own tab To view or change these options click the corresponding tab 395 396 The Toshiba System Control Panel The Start Up Options Page The four buttons at the bottom of the Toshiba System Control Panel perform the following functions Button Function OK Saves current settings and exits the Toshiba System Control Panel Cancel Ignores current settings and exits the Toshiba System Control Panel Apply Applies the settings to the current session Defaults Returns the settings to their default values The Start Up Options Page Start Up Options Power on Timer Security Miscellaneous p Start Up Sequence Floppy disk fist then hard disk o
181. eful services with full Internet access Each on line service has a different flavor Look at advertising material for more than one service to see what each provides Then decide which service seems most suitable for you K Sd If you don t need the special services offered by an on line ser vice logging on to the Internet via an Internet Service Provider ISP may be best for you Because of the enormous size and number of options on the Internet it can be more difficult to find your way around If possible ask a knowledgeable friend to help you Some service providers such as NetCom and Pipeline provide service to a large area Others may serve an area as small as a single county To find out about Internet service providers in your area check with your computer store look in computer magazines and local newspapers or ask a friend who s already connected What Will it Cost When you call to sign up to an on line service or Internet ser vice provider make sure you have a credit card handy Even if your service offers an initial free period your credit card will be billed for use beyond that time When you sign up with an Internet service provider or on line ser vice make sure you understand the costs involved Most services charge a monthly rate for a certain number of hours or for unlim ited access An hourly rate applies to additional time on line If you don t have a local telephone access number long distance
182. ely remove the card 3 Remove the card from the slot Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 3 3 Fixing Device Related Problems The system does not recognize your PC Card or PCMCIA socket controller This problem may be caused by a low backup battery Charge the battery by following these steps 1 Make sure the computer isn t in Resume Mode 2 Turn the computer off 3 Connect the power cord and charge the battery to 100 4 Keep the computer plugged in for about seven hours with the power turned off The problem may also be caused by a conflict with any additional memory in your system Often removing a malfunctioning card inserting it again and rein stalling it using the procedure in Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer on page 194 can correct many problems There is still a yellow exclamation point over the PCMCIA controller icon in Device Manager You ve gone through the PCMCIA Wizard in Windows 95 as described in Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer on page 194 but the system still reports the controller with a yellow Your computer may not be firmly attached to the optional Note Dock Enhanced Port Replicator To fix the connection 1 Click Start then click Shut Down Windows 95 displays the Shut Down Windows dialog box 2 Click the button next to Shut down the computer then click Yes Windows 95 shuts down and turns the computer off automatica
183. em following the steps in Using a PC Card Modem on page 202 2 Choose Print Setup from within the program you re using to prepare your document 3 Select your fax printer driver from the list of available printers If you re using MS Fax set the printer to MS Fax For more information about using MS Fax refer to the MS Fax on line Help program 4 Choose Print If you re using MS Fax it prompts you for a telephone number and gives you an opportunity to attach a standard cover sheet Other fax programs will operate in much the same way If youre using a different fax program refer to the program s documentation for more information 5 Choose Send to send the fax Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting to the World 2 09 The Internet and Other Fascinating Places The Internet and Other Fascinating Places If you ve never used a modem before you might not realize the vast array of possibilities that await you You can K Ww Subscribe to an on line service K Ww Explore the vastness of the Internet K kod Log on to an electronic Bulletin Board Service BBS S Communicate directly with another computer that is equipped with a modem such as one owned by a friend The following sections describe each of these options and provide a brief overview of how to access them On line Services On line services such as America Online AOL and Com puServe provide easy access
184. em Disks to make program diskettes for Windows 95 and either run Master Disk Creator or purchase the master program CD ROM for other pre installed software At some point you may need to reinstall programs that came pre installed on your computer s hard disk See Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM on page 35 for more information Five Things You Should Never Do K Ww K Ww K Ww K kod K Ww Don t spill a drink into the computer s keyboard If you do spill a drink that gets into the keyboard turn the com puter off immediately and unplug it Get as much liquid out of the keyboard as possible Leave the computer off overnight to give it time to dry out before you return to work Don t format a disk that contains valuable information Formatting removes all the information that s currently on the disk Always double check a disk before you format it Don t turn the computer off when a drive indicator light is on Doing so may damage the disk the drive or both Don t expose diskettes or the computer to magnetic fields such as those generated by large stereo speakers Doing so can erase important files Don t be afraid to use your computer it s just a machine Provided you follow the advice in this guide you re unlikely to do your computer any harm So use it and have fun Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 8 2 Learning the Basics When You Turn the Computer On When You Turn t
185. ents Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Before You Go to a Computer Store 1 2 1 Buying Programs If You re a Designer Your computer dealer can introduce you to a variety of sophisti cated design programs including programs to design a garden or to build or remodel a house as well as the more common Com puter Aided Design CAD tools There are also various specialist programs for use in engineering design If You re a Researcher or Student On line services such as CompuServe America Online and Prodigy and access to the Internet provide almost endless resources for conducting professional research In addition you can purchase dictionaries and other reference materials on diskette or CD ROM for your own personal library Do You Need a Database If you need to keep and update a set of records such as a list of addresses or a catalogue of items that is what a database program is designed to do You could use a database to hold details of a stamp collection or to provide an overall index to the recipes in various cookery books and magazines Should Buy an Integrated Package When you have decided which types of program you are inter ested in you may find that you can buy some of the programs as a suite This applies particularly to programs that are widely used in business The popular combination of wordprocessor drawing program and spreadsheet is available in two basic forms as Office su
186. er 1 Type your name and company in the appropriate fields You may leave the product number field blank or type in the Windows 95 Certificate of Authenticity number Click Continue Setup prompts you to verify the information you just entered If the information is correct click Continue To change any of the information displayed click Change Setup displays the Printer Installation screen Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 32 Let s Start at the Very Beginning When You Turn the Computer On the First Time If you have a printer use the and J keys to select your printer from the list and click Install If you don t have a printer select No Printer and click Install The computer restarts loads Windows for Workgroups and displays the Windows Program Manager screen How to Use this Guide with Windows for Workgroups The instructions in this guide are specific to Windows 95 If you chose Windows for Workgroups a number of things will be differ ent including KP Koca KP K Ww K Ww K Ww The tutorial provided in Getting to Know the Desktop on page 51 refers to Windows 95 only The instructions in this guide for starting the MaxTime Con trol Panel the Toshiba System Control Panel and Fn esse are for Windows 95 only You can access the equivalent pro grams in Windows for Workgroups MaxTime Hardware Setup and Fn esse by double clicking their icons in the Toshiba Utilitie
187. er icon returns you to the beginning of the current chapter Clicking the Top of topic icon returns you to the beginning of the current topic The previous and next arrows allow you to move forward or backward from topic to topic Finding a Topic Quickly As in a printed book to find a particular topic you can either search the index or use the table of contents In addition to providing an index and table of contents the elec tronic User s Guide maintains a list of all the words in the book If the index and table of contents do not contain the word you re looking for try the Find option You can search the current topic or the entire User s Guide Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 4 3 Using the Electronic Guide Follow these steps 1 Click Find The book displays a box for you to enter the word or phrase you wish to locate 2 Enter the word or phrase and press Enter or click Search Find displays a list of all the sections that contain this term 3 Select the section you wish to read and press Enter Find displays the section Reading a Topic If the topic contains more text than will fit on the screen use the scroll bar to read the additional text When you get to the end of the topic click the next arrow to go to the next topic or the previous arrow to the go to the previous topic The arrow keys take you through the electronic book in the same sequence as the printed
188. eren neers ewe 90 How to Print Something You ve Created 0000005 92 Using the CD ROM Drive a eece dc o4iNe Deedee a eee tins 95 How to Prepare Diskettes for Use 0000 eee e eee 100 Taking Care of IDISkeQes 45 4 44 ink betes ae O4 pha ep eee 4h 102 How to Copy Something to a Diskette 103 How to Back Up Your Work 000 cess eee e eee 104 Transferring Files to Another Computer 106 Connecting to a Network vic 5 Sue saa eA AA eag celes 109 Swapping Drives in the SelectBay 0 111 How and When to Turn the Computer Off 115 Caring for Your Computer cece eee ee 115 Learning the Basics If you are a novice computer user this chapter is for you It describes many day to day computer operations and includes lists of computing tips Computing Tips This section presents a few rules that experienced users take for granted Two Things Every User Learned the Hard Way Save your work frequently Your work stays in the computer s temporary memory until you save it to disk When the network you re working on goes down and you must restart your computer to reconnect or your battery runs out of charge mid flight you ll lose all the work done since you last saved See the instructions in How to Save Your Work on page 90 19 8 0 Learning the Basics Computing Tips Back up your files to dis
189. erformance There is also a Custom Settings option that lets you set the power saving options individually Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 5 Taking Your Computer on the Road Conserving Power You may set the power usage mode with a hotkey in the MaxTime Control Panel if you re working in Windows 95 or in TSETUP if you re working in MS DOS This chapter covers setting the power usage mode with a hotkey and in the MaxTime Control Panel Using TSETUP to set the power usage mode is discussed in TSETUP on page 403 Setting a Power Usage Mode Using a Hotkey To select a power usage mode with a hotkey follow these steps 1 Press Fn F2 to display the power usage pop up window y Ba k FA FA re Mis f Hin Full Power The power usage pop up window 2 While continuing to press Fn press F2 until you select the desired power usage mode 3 Release the Fn key You re now in the selected mode Using the MaxTime Control Panel To select a power usage mode in the MaxTime Control Panel fol low these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel eu 3 Double click the MaxTime icon pecs aT ne The MaxTime Control Panel opens with the Power Settings tab on top Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 53 Conserving Power Power Settings Battery Alarms Miscellaneous hal O Battery 3 Extema
190. ernal Monitor on page 227 for more informa tion about connecting an external monitor to your computer Infor mation about virtual display mode is found in Changing the Display Mode on page 287 Sound Card Your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer has a SoundBlaster Pro compatible sound card that provides microphone headphone and line in jacks and a volume control dial Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 26 Before You Go to a Computer Store Buying Programs Pointing Device The AccuPoint is a pointing device that performs all the functions of a mouse If a program requires a joystick you ll have to add one to your sys tem through the optional NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator Talk to your dealer to find out which joysticks are compatible with your computer Tips on Buying Programs Before you buy It s a good idea to see a demonstration of the program Talk to friends and your company s computer experts about the programs they recommend Read reviews of programs in the computer press Articles that compare all the widely available programs of a particular type such as wordprocessors are particularly valuable Get on the Internet and find out what s new Make sure you have enough space available on the hard disk For more information see Hard Disk on page 124 K Ww Make sure your computer has enough memory For more information see Memory on page 124 Installing
191. ers until you find yours If your printer is not listed it probably came with its own dis kette Insert this diskette into the diskette drive and click Have Disk When Windows 95 displays the Install From Disk dialog box click OK Select your printer and click Next Set the port to LPT1 for a parallel printer or COM1 for a serial printer and click Next Type in a new name for your printer or accept the default and click Next If your printer is connected and turned on click Finish to print a test page To finish the setup procedure without printing a test page click No then Finish Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 34 CAUTION Let s Start at the Very Beginning When You Turn the Computer On the First Time Select Date Time Properties As Setup continues Windows 95 displays the Date Time Proper ties dialog box This dialog box has two tabs Click a tab to bring it to the front 1 On the Time Zone tab select your time zone by clicking the up and down arrow keys 2 On the Date amp Time tab set the correct date and time if necessary 3 When you ve finished click Close Create Windows 95 Diskettes The Microsoft Create System Disks program creates program dis kettes for the Windows 95 operating system To run this program click Next when prompted during the initial start up procedure Follow the instructions on the screen If you don t want to make these diskettes now click Cancel When
192. ery alarm threshold Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Applies your changes to the Toshiba Access Panel Part II Technical Reference abr eR The Power Meter Properties Dialog Box Po eter Prope 21x Display Display Mode pag Conca The Power Meter Properties dialog box This dialog box lets you choose how the Power Meter displays Option Usage Analog Displays the remaining battery charge in analog format Digital Displays the remaining battery charge in digital format OK Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Cancel Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Apply Applies your changes to the Toshiba Access Panel Part IT Technical Reference 36 The Toshiba Access Panel The Dashboard The Time Remaining Gauge Properties Dialog Box Display 21x Low Battery Indicators Em aa Change colar I Elash when critical Coreei The Time Remaining Gauge Properties dialog box This dialog box lets you choose how the Time Remaining Gauge displays Option Change color Flash when critical OK Cancel Apply Usage When this option is selected the Time Remaining Gauge changes color to indicate the battery charge green indicates the charge has not reached either battery alarm threshold yellow indicates the charge has pa
193. ery cover a Releasing the battery 5 Slide the battery release latch toward the top of the computer and hold it there 6 Slide the battery cover about 1 2 inch toward the battery release latch 7 Lift the cover off completely Battery latch Removing the battery 8 With one hand move the battery latch off the battery 9 With the other hand remove the discharged battery from the computer If the battery is leaking or its case is cracked put on protec tive gloves to handle it and discard it immediately following the advice in the next section CAUTION 10 Wipe the battery terminals of the charged battery with a clean cloth to ensure a good connection Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 49 Disposing of Used Batteries Safely 11 Align the charged battery so the label is down and the side terminals the bumpy side face away from the battery release latch 12 With the edge of the battery on the latch press down until the battery drops into place 13 Place the battery cover over the battery and slide it back into place until it snaps closed Failure to lock the battery cover can result in the battery fall ing out CAUTION 14 Turn the computer right side up 15 Reconnect any cables you removed 16 Turn the computer on Disposing of Used Batteries Safely The life of a battery pack is about 500 recharges so it should last for years When the battery pack needs rep
194. es then point to Multimedia 3 Click Volume Control Windows 95 displays the Volume Control mixer window Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 70 The Wide World of Multimedia Recording Sounds as Wave Files Volume Control Sim Options Hel Volume Control Balance Balance Balance Balance ote d o lo tale tes Volume Volume Volume Volume aa C Mute all F Select F Select F Select ESS AudioDrive Mixer 220 The Volume Control mixer window 4 Move the sliders to adjust the volume for the various types of sound files To avoid contusion set all the mixer sliders in the Volume Control program to their medium settings and adjust the volume with the volume control dial Recording Sounds as Wave Files You may record sounds using the built in microphone an external microphone the built in CD ROM drive or using the line in jack from an outside source such as your stereo system This section describes how to record sounds Using the Built In Microphone The easiest way to record is through the computer s built in micro phone To do this follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Programs 2 Point to Accessories then point to Multimedia 3 Click Sound Recorder Windows 95 opens the Sound Recorder window 4 Click the record button It s the red circle at the bottom right of the window Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World
195. es the method used to cool the computer s processor chip For more information see Cooling Mode Cooling Method on page 156 The Battery Alarms Page Option Settings Usage Power Settings Battery Alarms Miscellaneous Low Battery Alam Actions Z Display an alarm message d f a B No Sound i Play System Beep O Play wav File Tiba TAP Critical Battery Alam Actions Z Display an alarm message KA 5 No Sound gt Play System Beep O Play way Fie o Toshiba TAP Me TOSHIBA Cancel ooy Her The Battery Alarms page This page controls the settings for the Low Battery Alarm and the Critical Battery Alarm Battery Alarm Thresholds Based on Percent Remaining Based on Time Remaining Triggers the alarm based on either the Percent Remaining or Time Remaining Threshold Sliders to the right of this option let you set the thresholds for the Low and Critical Battery Alarms The lower half of the Battery Alarms page controls how the sys tem displays the battery alarm messages These options are identi cal for both the Low Battery Alarm and the Critical Battery Alarm Part II Technical Reference 392 The MaxTime Control Panel The Miscellaneous Page Option Display an alarm message Settings Enabled check Disabled no check Usage Enables and disables the battery
196. ettings 349 3 5 The Hotkeys Resume Mode Resume Mode Fn This hotkey displays the Resume Mode pop up window and turns Resume Mode on and off sound Fn This hotkey cycles the alarm volume through Off Low Medium and High Off is always first Power On Display Fn This hotkey alternates among the following dis play options Built in Display Only Simultaneous Display and External Monitor Only When the computer is in Simultaneous mode the external monitor will always be set to 800 x 600 SVGA mode This is for compatibility with the internal LCD Do not use Simulta neous mode with a monitor unable to support resolutions higher than 640 x 480 Part IT Technical Reference Terai OO Keyboard F10 Fn This hotkey turns the cursor control overlay on and off Fn s hotkey turns the numeric overlay on Cr This hotkey tums the numeric overlay and off Fn s hotkey turns the scroll lock feature on and off This hotkey h Il lock fi d off Part IT Technical Reference Chapter 16 The Configuration Button g 0 lt 2 14 00 ae toeaey ates eaeuer eins 354 The Gauge Gallery Button 0 00 cece eee eee 355 The Dashboard Tear Off Button 0000 cece eens 356 he Dashboard acina ie dan ao emer aa e EEEE 360 The SPUET ar cocacacia a aiene Tee he ore eerie ae eae ek 367 The Application Icons 23 5 soe win nuren 367 The Options Button iad fa4cnkdtedoconi a a n 368 Fhe Help Buu eernesri sc
197. etup menu click Connection If an appropriate Configured Connection is available choose it and go on to step 9 Otherwise continue with the next step Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 08 Learning the Basics Transferring Files to Another Computer 6 From the Connection Type list select the appropriate type of connection The model name for infrared devices is Generic Whether you should use fixed or variable mode depends on the device you re connecting to and what its settings are Fixed mode should work for other computers running TranXit but you may need to use variable mode to connect to infrared equipped printers 7 Click the Setup Connection button 8 Choose the port setting for the computer and click OK 9 Click the Enable Connection check box An X in the box indicates that a connection is enabled 10 Click OK to accept the current settings 11 Repeat steps 2 through 10 on the other computer making sure that the connection has been set up identically on both computers Make sure the second computer has a different name than the first computer If the two names are the same you won t be able to establish a connection NOTE Transfer Your Files Now that you ve set up the connection it s time to transfer your files Follow these steps 1 Ifyou haven t already done so start TranXit on both computers 2 Click the File Transfer tab bringing the File Transfer page to the front on both computer
198. external VGA or SVGA monitor color or monochrome PS 2 compatible port allows you to connect a 101 102 key keyboard or a PS 2 mouse You can purchase a Y cable that allows you to connect a PS 2 keyboard and a PS 2 mouse simultaneously 176 pin port lets you connect an optional Note Dock Enhanced Port Replicator that contains a number of ports and two PC Card slots and sup ports an ID function for use with Windows 95 when customizing multiple docking configura tions Windows 95 will be able to identify the con nected unit Part III Appendixes 4 40 Features and Specifications Built in Features External diskette drive port Microphone jack Headphone jack Line in jack Standard Hardware Memory Display Keyboard Sound Part III Appendixes Lets you connect the external 3 1 2 inch diskette drive This drive can only be used if there is no dis kette drive installed in the SelectBay 3 5 mm jack lets you connect an external monaural microphone or other audio input device 3 5 mm jack lets you connect stereo headphones or other audio output device such as external speakers 3 5 mm jack lets you play and record stereo sound from an external audio device such as a stereo system 16MB 3 3 volt 16 megabit EDO Extended Data Output dynamic RAM chips The CDS models have an 11 3 inch measured diagonally dual scan STN color LCD that dis plays up to 64K colors simultaneously at 800 x 600 resolutio
199. f this doesn t correct the problem press Fn F5 again to return the display priority to its previous setting If you re using an external monitor K Ww Check that the monitor is turned on K Ww Check that the monitor s power cord is firmly plugged into a working power outlet K Ww Check that the cable connecting the external monitor to the computer is firmly attached K Kod Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls on the exter nal monitor 1 Ww Press Fn F5 to make sure the display priority isn t set for the built in screen The display doesn t look right See Changing the Display Mode on page 287 to adjust your screen resolution or color settings The built in screen flickers Some flickering is a normal result of the way the screen produces colors To reduce the amount of flickering try using fewer colors Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 326 If Something Goes Wrong Fixing Device Related Problems Windows 95 displays a message that there is a problem with your display settings and that the adapter type is incorrect or the cur rent settings don t work with your hardware Reduce the size of the color palette to one that is supported by the computer s internal display See Changing the Display Mode on page 287 for instructions The display is set to Simultaneous and the external display device doesn t work Make sure the device is capable of di
200. f off Resume Mode keeps track of where you were so when you turn the power on again you can continue where you left off The computer stores this information until the backup battery runs out of power If you want to see those unsaved files again change the battery or find a power outlet within eight hours Setting the Alarms The Low Battery and Critical Battery alarms sound when the remaining battery charge reaches threshold power levels The Low Battery Alarm is initially set to 20 of battery capacity The initial threshold for the Critical Battery Alarm is 10 of battery capacity If these threshold levels don t fit your needs you can change them in the MaxTime Control Panel To set up the Low Battery and Critical Battery alarms follow these steps This section provides instructions for setting up the battery alarms in all configurations If you want the battery alarm set tings to be different for each of your configurations refer to Changing Battery Alarm Settings on page 266 for instructions 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the MaxTime icon The MaxTime Control Panel opens with the Power Settings tab on top Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 4 4 Taking Your Computer on the Road Running the Computer on Battery Power 4 Click the Battery Alarms tab to bring it to the front Power Settings Battery Alarms Miscella
201. f the desktop You can move any window by clicking its title bar and dragging it 8 Click the Windows Explorer button on the taskbar Windows 95 displays the Windows Explorer window Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 6 3 Lesson 7 Closing Your Programs and Files 9 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to size and position the Windows Explorer placing it at the right side of the desktop Now that you ve got the windows side by side you can see how you could refer to one window while working in the other When you are working with documents and programs resizing and moving windows allows you to rearrange the desktop to suit your tastes and needs Experiment with different sizes and place ments of windows Discover the most comfortable and efficient arrangement for your work At this point you have three programs open on the desktop Go on to the next lesson to learn how to close them Lesson 7 Closing Your Programs and Files Once you ve finished working with a document folder or pro gram it s a good idea to close it to free up the space in memory for something else While you can run a number of programs at the same time a large number of programs and documents open simultaneously can slow down your system This lesson teaches you how to close the programs you opened earlier in this chapter Follow these steps 1 Click the close button at the top right of the Windows Explorer window That s
202. fghijklmnopgrstuwxyz D abcde fghi jklmnopgrstuwxyz DCi abcdefghijklmnopgrstuwxyz DGi a 012345678 1 0123456789 0123456789 PRESS ENTER KEY Second character set test screen If the screen matches this illustration continue with the tests by pressing Enter If your screen doesn t match the diagnostic test display write down the differences and contact your dealer Part IT Technical Reference 4 2 The Diagnostic Test Test Sequence Graphics Capabilities The next subtests check the screen s graphic capabilities for each of the computer s graphics modes During the test the resolution and mode number appear above an image representing the mode s capabilities The number inside the brackets is the mode number The next illustration shows the test image for one of the 320 x 200 graphics modes mode 4 320 200 GRAPHICS DISPLAY 4 PRESS ENTER KEY Graphics capabilities test screen A similar screen appears for each of the computer s graphics modes Press Enter to proceed with the next screens Each screen has a similar image three boxes of different shades of gray differing primarily in resolution If a different image appears on your screen contact your dealer If the screens match the display press Enter to go to the next test Part IT Technical Reference The Diagnostic Test 9 Test Sequence 42 Diskette Drives CAUTION If you selected the
203. figuration Close Toshiba Access Closes the Toshiba Access Panel Panel Part II Technical Reference 36 The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button Menu Option Result What s This Provides information about the icon you clicked TAP Properties Opens the Toshiba Access Panel Properties dialog box refer to The Toshiba Access Panel Proper ties Dialog Box on page 374 The Options Button Clicking the options button displays the options slider bar Properties Configuration Management Window Styles The options slider bar This bar provides access to the panel s customization options The following table summarizes the functions of the three options buttons Button Function Properties Displays the Toshiba Access Panel Properties dia log box refer to The Toshiba Access Panel Prop erties Dialog Box on page 374 Window styles Displays the TAP Windows Styles dialog box refer to The TAP Windows Styles Dialog Box on page 378 Configuration Displays the Configuration Management dialog Management box refer to The Configuration Management Dialog Box on page 369 Part IT Technical Reference The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button 369 The Configuration Management Dialog Box TAP Configurations The Configuration Management dialog box You use the Configuration Management dialog box to change th
204. g so could destroy the information on the diskette and A damage the diskette and or the drive WARNING 11 Write protect the diskette by moving the tab on the back of the diskette to expose the write protect hole Write protecting a diskette prevents you from erasing or over writing the information on the diskette 12 Continue inserting and removing diskettes according to the instructions on the screen Since creating program diskettes will take some time now is a good time to Fill in your registration card if you haven t yet done so gt Skim through the rest of this guide gt Fill in and mail the reader response card Toshiba wel comes your comments and suggestions for improving the quality of the documentation 13 When you ve finished making the master diskettes store them together in a safe place Make sure you keep the diskettes away from extreme tempera tures and humidity and strong magnetic fields such as those generated by large stereo speakers Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 4 1 Using the Electronic Guide Using the Electronic Guide Your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer comes with a copy of this User s Guide in electronic form on your hard disk Since the elec tronic book is stored on your computer you don t have to take the printed documentation with you when you travel The electronic User s Guide is a copy of this printed book This chap
205. g the power on 4 Press and hold the power button on the left side of the com puter until the power speed light turns on When you turn the computer on for the first time do not turn the power off again until the operating system has loaded completely Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 29 When You Turn the Computer On the First Time When You Turn the Computer On the First Time WARNING The first time you turn the computer on it displays several mes sages and leads you through four welcome screens Read each welcome screen carefully then press Enter These screens explain the procedures for creating master program diskettes and selecting an operating system Windows 95 or Windows for Workgroups If you own a Satellite Pro 435CDS computer Windows 95 comes pre installed You do not have a choice of operating system After you read the welcome screens the system displays the Wel come to Windows 95 Setup screen Complete the following steps to set up your system If you plan to choose Windows for Workgroups be aware that you ll need to complete about eight Windows 95 Setup screens before the setup program gives you the opportunity to choose your operating system Read each screen carefully to avoid installing Windows 95 accidentally 1 In the Welcome to Windows 95 Setup screen click Next Use the AccuPoint to move the screen pointer to the Next button then press the primary button
206. g the primary button drag the pointer to the right edge of the desktop then release the primary button This process is known as clicking and dragging The taskbar moves from the bottom to the right edge of the desktop Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 56 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 3 Creating a New Document ARJA m Sr aA TIEA x Fain eyA Asun mae SrA Vas Sj nl EA TI graza ASHIBE Toz SMIE sA Sna TOEA TSA yosr yA Gs eer TO SHIA JOS E yA OJE SSA MO SHBA ig HE JA A TOSHIBA T93 HIA yA JSE SAMS SHIA TOSH TOSHIBA TOS S dah TOS HIBA on ATO Sree TOs SHE sit JEEE MOSE SHBA TOSSA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TO eae TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSTIBA IG E FHA TOSHIBA TOE SJA TOSHIBA Oe SRAT gsr aA ToS n BA T RA yos IBA 1 TIS 3A ee HE ee BA OSHIBA ye SJEA j es Sr ual ATOSSA 3A TOA TOS ME AT JSME zA TSA The PT with the taskbar on the ah You may move the taskbar to any of the desktop s four edges 10 Click the taskbar once again and drag it back to the bot tom of the desktop Lesson 3 Creating a New Document Now that you re used to the desktop you ll want to go on to do some real work With earlier versions of Windows you had to start a program before you could create a document Windows 95 lets you choose a type of file and then opens a program appropriate to that file type This lesson teaches you
207. gnostic Test Exiting the Diagnostic Menus Run the test If the test displays the ABORTED message again or your printout doesn t match the output shown in the illustrations consult your dealer to have the printer and the cable serviced If the printer tests successfully the test displays the COMPLETED message Press Enter to return to the TDIAGS screen To exit TDI AGS continue with the next section Exiting the Diagnostic Menus To exit the diagnostic menu follow these steps 1 When TDIAGS completes system components testing type N and press Enter TDIAGS returns you to the Main menu 2 Remove the Toshiba Companion Diskette from the dis kette drive and press Ctrl Alt Del or the reset button to restart the computer The computer restarts Part IT Technical Reference The Diagnostic Test 4 3 3 Exiting the Diagnostic Menus Part IT Technical Reference PART II CONTENTS Features and Specilications 5 555 aveiiekee eee Yeh eee 437 Power Cord Connectors 444 44 fv 44 ew ielemee va an an ee 447 System RESUMES sss s debian rrie eean a Ue eee AA ee Gees 449 Video Maes sce ite exci cay y s sure a dee Parag a atts 457 Using Windows for Workgroups ee eee ee 465 Glossy cic Stati tacmasese Blea tea a VELEN ae cy 471 PART III APPENDIXES What s In Part Ill This part provides additional technical information about the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer Review this material if you have additional que
208. guration Management dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 264 Making Life Easier Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Creating Your Own Configuration To use one of the blank buttons to create your own configuration follow these steps 1 In the Configuration Management dialog box click a blank configuration button 2 Click Enable The Enable Configuration dialog box opens r General Properties Name Cancel Image E Change Image p Base Configuation ose a configuration fror hich te ication sett The Enable Configuration dialog box Type a name for the configuration in the Name box Assign the icon for the button The procedure for assigning the icon using this dialog box is the same as the procedure for assigning the icon using the Con figuration Properties dialog box See Creating Your Own But ton Icon on page 261 Choose one of the existing configurations from which to copy the hardware and application settings You must copy settings from an existing configuration when you create a new one In the next section you ll see how to change the settings for your new configuration Click OK to close the Enable Configuration dialog box Click Close to close the Configuration Management dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 26 5 Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Changing Configuration Settings Max
209. guration slider bar The configuration slider bar extends to the left displaying the home office and travel buttons 3 Click the button for the configuration you wish to use The new configuration takes effect and the configuration slider bar disappears The dashboard section of the Toshiba Access Panel displays gauges that show the current battery capacity in a variety of formats You can choose which gauges display in the dashboard 4 Click the Gauge Gallery button just above the dashboard Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 7 2 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 12 Exploring the Toshiba Access Panel Gauge Gallery Add a gauge to the Toshiba Access Panel by dragging it Hard Disk Gauge The hard disk space usage cat displayed in a LED orb Ih for Not displ it ph format layed if a drive nitore displayed if the battery is not preseni The Gauge Gallery The Gauge Gallery opens This window lists the available gauges K Ww The Hard Disk Gauge displays the hard disk space usage in LED or bargraph format The Memory Gauge displays the available GDI system or user resources in LED or bargraph format The Percent Remaining Gauge displays the percentage of battery charge remaining KO Ww The Power Meter displays the current power usage mode in LED or needle format KO Ww The Time Remaining Gauge displays the amount of time remaining befor
210. h Fn esse 0 270 Working with the Keyboard 00 e cece eee ee eee 281 Using Device Manager to Configure Your System 283 Different Ways to Turn the Computer On and Off 285 Changing the Display Mode 0 eee eee ee 287 Making Life Easier Your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer is a computing power house right out of the box You can run the most powerful business programs and work for hours away from an external power source without needing to change anything By using the additional built in features of your computer you can make your life even easier This chapter discusses some convenient options that are already included with your computer Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Imagine it s time to go home at the end of the day s work You ve been using your computer all day to send financial data to corpo rate headquarters access the corporate database and run a statisti cal package You take the computer home with you so you can write some memos and help your son or daughter with their homework 20 2 5 8 Making Life Easier Saving Time with Multiple Configurations In the office you want your Toshiba Access Panel to contain the icons that launch the programs you use most frequently for work At home you need your word processor and possibly a game or two to play when your child s homework is finished The Toshiba Access Panel allows you to set
211. hat do I do Well this chapter explains how to set up your computer gives you tips on working comfortably and takes you on a tour of the computer s features Make Sure You Have Everything Your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer comes with everything you need to get up and running quickly However before you rush off it s a good idea to make sure you received everything you were supposed to This information is listed on the Quick Start Card at the top of the box If any items are missing or damaged notify your dealer immedi ately For additional help contact Toshiba as described in If You Need Further Assistance on page 338 2 Finding Your Way around the System Select a Place To Work Select a Place To Work The Satellite Pro 430 Series is a portable computer designed to be used in a variety of circumstances and locations However by giv ing some thought to your work environment you can protect the computer and make your work hours more comfortable Keep the Computer Comfortable CAUTION Use a flat surface with enough room to operate comfortably If you re planning to use a printer or other external device make sure there s enough space for it as well To keep your computer in prime operating condition make sure your work area is free from Dust moisture and direct sunlight Liquids and corrosive chemicals Don t spill liquids into the computer If you spill a liquid into the keyboard turn
212. hboard Tear Off Button The Styles Page Styles Gauges p Window Style Stay on top ocatior ve das r Dashboard Title Bar Style Standard O Mini O Hore The Styles page of the Dashboard Properties dialog box This page controls the appearance of the Dashboard window Option Stay on top Stay on title bar of active window Standard Mini None OK Cancel Apply Usage When this option is selected the Dashboard win dow displays in front of all other windows on the desktop When this option is selected the Dashboard dis plays on the title bar of the active window This option is available only if you select Stay on top Displays a standard sized title bar on the Dash board window Displays a small title bar on the Dashboard window Removes the title bar This option is only available if you select Stay on title bar of active window as the Window Style Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Applies your changes to the Dashboard window Part II Technical Reference The Gauges Page The Toshiba Access Panel The Dashboard Tear Off Button 359 Display ail gauged Enable cycle mode single gauge display Cre The Gauges page of the Dashboard Properties dia
213. he Computer On Normally when you turn the computer on it goes through its self test and start up procedure before loading Windows 95 As it does this a number of messages flash across the screen To save time and battery power you can skip these steps by using Windows 95 s Suspend command or Toshiba s Resume Mode when you turn the computer off Both these methods provide a sort of electronic bookmark They use the computer s backup battery to store its current state in mem ory while the power is off and restore it to that state when you turn the computer back on The system maintains the information until the backup battery loses its charge after approximately eight hours By using Toshiba s Resume Mode you can take advantage of additional power saving features These features let you Configure the computer to suspend when you close the display panel and resume when you open it again You can set this option in the Toshiba System Control Panel on the Start Up Options page or in TSETUP K Ww Set the computer to turn on automatically at a time and date you choose You can set this option in the Toshiba System Control Panel on the Power On Timer page or in TSETUP For information about the Toshiba System Control Panel see The Toshiba System Control Panel on page 395 For information about TSETUP see TSETUP on page 403 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer CAUTION Learning the Basics 8 3 When
214. he Optional NoteDock Using PC Cards in the NoteDock The NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator provides two additional PC Card slots These slots function in the same way as those in the computer For information about setting up PC Cards refer to Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer on page 194 The first time you use the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator Windows 95 will create a Dock 1 configuration that will be able to determine when you are docked connected to the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator To use the PCMCIA card slots in the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator you may need to set up PC Card support the first time you connect to the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator To set up PC Card support follow these steps The NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator does not support Zoomed Video ZV PC Cards To use your ZV PC Card you must insert it into the computer s PC Card slot 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 displays the Control Panel 3 Select the PC Card PCMCIA icon 4 Follow the setup instructions Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Using Your Computer on Your Desk 2 4 1 Applying Physical Restraints Applying Physical Restraints For your own peace of mind you may want to secure your com puter to your desk The easiest way to do this is to purchase an optional Noteworthy Computer Lock To secure your computer using the Noteworthy Computer Lock cable
215. he Windows Help menu click the Contents tab and select Troubleshooting 2 Click If you have a hardware conflict and follow the steps If there is still a problem Windows 95 should display a message that explains what the conflict is If this happens you may need to solve the problem on your own A Plan of Action The smooth operation of the system depends on the interaction of all devices programs and features If the system or one of its attached devices isn t working resolving the problem can be time consuming and frustrating The recommended procedure for getting multiple devices to work together is to add and set up one device at a time After you add each device test it to make sure it and all previously connected devices work Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 1 5 Resolving a Hardware Conflict The device most recently connected to the system is the one most likely to be causing a hardware conflict A word to the wise if you get too tired take a break You ll be surprised how different things look when you ve had a good night s sleep NOTE Resolving Hardware Conflicts on Your Own Computer components need resources to accomplish a task A device such as a CD ROM drive or a modem needs a channel to the computer s Central Processing Unit CPU It also needs a direct channel to the computer s memory to store information as it works These channels of communication are c
216. he computer Cable Serial port Connecting the cable to the serial port 2 Plug the mouse cable into the computer s serial port Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Using Your Computer on Your Desk 2 3 3 Using a PS 2 Mouse Using a PS 2 Mouse If you prefer to use a PS 2 compatible mouse you can attach one to your computer The PS 2 port supports any PS 2 compatible mouse purchase an optional Y cable Using a Y cable allows you to T You can only connect one PS 2 device at a time unless you connect a PS 2 mouse and a PS 2 keyboard simultaneously NOTE Connecting the PS 2 Mouse To connect a PS 2 mouse follow these steps 1 Turn the computer off UN Make sure the computer is off before you attach the mouse sroP Connecting a mouse with the computer s power on may dam K _ A age the mouse the computer or both WARNING PS 2 port Connecting a PS 2 mouse 2 Attach the PS 2 mouse cable to the PS 2 port on the back of the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 3 4 Using Your Computer on Your Desk Using a PS 2 Mouse 3 See your mouse documentation for additional configura tion steps 4 Turn the computer on Setting Up a PS 2 Mouse If you connect a PS 2 mouse to PS 2 port you may use the mouse the AccuPoint or both To set how the PS 2 mouse works with the AccuPoint follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the C
217. he computer s memory to 24MB 16MB Expands the computer s memory to 32MB 32MB Expands the computer s memory to 48MB Expansion Capability PC Card slots Let you install one Type IH or up to two Type I or Type II PC Cards These slots are Zoomed Video ZV compatible Maximum slot thickness 10 5 mm NoteDock Enhanced Optional docking station that provides access to Port Replicator the following headphone jack external diskette drive port PS 2 mouse port PS 2 keyboard port two type III PC Card slots audio line in jack audio line out jack serial port video port parallel port MIDI joystick port AC in and security lock slot Others Carrying case Sturdy fabric or leather carrying case protects the computer while traveling Part III Appendixes 444 Security Cable Specifications Features and Specifications Specifications Noteworthy Computer Lock cable to deter com puter theft Physical Dimensions Weight Size 7A lbs 3 4 kilograms with CD ROM drive 7 1 Ibs 3 2 kilograms with diskette drive width x depth x height 11 8 inches x 9 3 inches x 2 2 inches 299mm x 237mm x 57mm Environmental Conditions Temperature Relative Humidity Altitude relative to sea level Shock Vibration Part II Appendixes Operating 5 C 41 F to 35 C 95 F 20 to 80 non condensing 60 to 3 000 m 10G 1 5G with CD ROM drive installed 0 5G 0 25G with CD ROM drive installed
218. hen You Turn the Computer On 301 What s Really Going On You can use your computer without knowing what the various components do just as you can drive your car without knowing what is under the hood However people who understand auto mechanics usually find their knowledge is useful helping them to get the best out of their vehicles Knowing your computer s hardware functions can be helpful in the same way This chapter gives you details of how your com puter works What Is a Computer Your computer consists of a number of components Some of these like the display panel keyboard PC Card slots serial port and parallel port you are already familiar with Others are hid den away inside the case The hidden components are the processor and main memory 291 292 What s Really Going On What Is a Computer What Is a Processor The processor is the computer s engine it is where the actual com puting takes place Your Satellite Pro 430 computer contains an Intel Pentium microprocessor chip which operates at 120 MHz It incorporates a math co processor for high speed numerical calcu lations and 16KB of cache memory to boost performance further Cache reduces the time the processor spends waiting while new data is retrieved from main memory for processing or results are stored By default main memory is accessed only when necessary to update the cache contents This caching policy is known as write bac
219. hen point to Find Click Files or Folders Windows 95 displays the Find dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 6 5 Lesson 9 Changing the Wallpaper 48 Find All Files o1x File Edit View Options Help Name amp Location Date Modified Advanced Find Now Named pi i Lookin Ey v Browse New Search F Include subfolders Q The Find dialog box 7 Onthe Name and Location tab type char in the Named box 8 Click Find Now Windows 95 displays a list with all the files with char in their names 9 Click the Character Map file with the secondary button and drag it to the desktop Windows 95 displays a shortcut menu 10 Click Create Shortcut s Here A shortcut to the Character Map appears on your desktop Clicking a shortcut icon opens the program or folder immediately Place as many shortcuts on your desktop as you find useful Lesson 9 Changing the Wallpaper Windows 95 treats all windows icons programs drives etc as self contained objects You can set each object s properties such as size position on screen and color individually This lesson introduces object properties by showing you how to change one of the properties of the desktop the wallpaper Your computer came with the Toshiba wallpaper selected Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 66 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 9 Changing the Wallpaper To change the wallpa
220. here are two things you need to know before you can connect to another computer The communications parameters The file transfer protocol only if you re downloading or uploading files The following sections explain what these mean Communications Parameters There are four communications parameters Modem speed is the speed at which the modem transfers infor mation Speeds are measured in bits per second Your modem manual documents the speed of your modem K2 Ww Data bits is the number of bits in one character This number is usually seven or eight K Ww Stop bits indicate the end of a character This number is usually one or two Parity is an error checking method and will be set to even odd or none These parameters except for the modem speed are usually abbre viated and combined Common examples are N81 no parity eight data bits and one stop bit and E72 even parity seven data bits and 2 stop bits Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting to the World 2 2 3 Connecting Directly to Another Computer You set each of these parameters in your communications pro gram Each parameter must be set the same on both computers or you won t be able to connect File Transfer Protocols File transfer protocols are standards that govern how computers transfer files between modems over a telephone line Protocols determine what type of error checking and data compression if any occur dur
221. how to create a text file without first open ing a program Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop D7 Lesson 3 Creating a New Document Follow these steps 1 Move the pointer to an empty area of the desktop and click the secondary button Windows 95 displays a shortcut menu of commands applica ble to the desktop 2 Point to New then click Text Document Windows 95 creates an icon on the desktop called New Text Document txt with the icon name highlighted 3 You ll probably want to give your file a meaningful name so type My New File and press Enter 4 Double click the icon Windows 95 opens the new file in Notepad the text editor built into Windows 95 Je ILEA SSF TUS SA TOSSA Tar Tos ae Seater i lev e TOSHA POSH EVA TOSHIBA Te yee ee Osis TOSHIBA TUSHA a o a LTOSHBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA a ii B My New File E EEE ME Ea HIB 3 IEX o File Edit Search Help sel S care fost Lo AT BAS WBZ zrl Sr i OS ATTO gA 1 OS re TOSA TOSSA aro TEA A Start E My Computer E My New File Notepad Sg 1 55am The Notepad window Notice that as you open the file there s a new button on the taskbar that reads My New File Notepad the name may be too long to fit into the taskbar space but if you point to the name the system displays all of it By di
222. ides maximum performance Write through reduces performance to offer compatibility with older programs that may not run on a fast system Y Battery Save Mode Full Power default Low Power User Settings Allows you to select a preset battery save mode or customize the battery save options For more information about choosing a bat tery save mode see The Easy Way Choosing a Power Usage Mode on page 151 N Part IT Technical Reference Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart omes 413 Alarm Volume Off Low Medium High default Sets the volume at which the system s alarms beep such as the low battery alarm This also affects sounds generated by any PC Card modem installed N System Beep Enabled default Disabled Enables and disables your software s use of the system speaker N Panel Power On Off Enabled Disabled default Turns the computer on off when you open close the computer s display panel This option is only available when Resume Mode is selected For more information see Different Ways to Turn the Computer On and Off on page 285 N Alarm Power On XX XX Xx hour minute second Disabled default Turns the computer on at the time set For more information see Different Ways to Turn the Computer On and Off on page
223. iewed from a distance form a picture If you draw an icon save it as a bitmap or icon making sure it has the extension BMP or ICO Save it or copy it to the c toshiba tap images folder To assign your icon to a configuration button follow these steps 1 In the Configuration Management dialog box click the configuration button you wish to modify Click Properties The Configuration Properties dialog box opens The Configuration Properties dialog box 3 To change the configuration name type the new name in the Name box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 262 Making Life Easier Saving Time with Multiple Configurations 4 To assign a new icon to the configuration click Change Image The Change Configuration Image dialog box opens Lookin Ea Images J E e EE Sports St Louis Sydney Travel ea a Filename EINE OK The Change Configuration Image dialog box The example above shows the name of the bitmap file for the Home configuration icon 5 Select the desired file Use the Look in box to specify the folder in which the file is located and the Files of type box to list either bitmaps or icons 6 To view a bitmap or icon before you commit to using it click Preview The system displays the icon to the right of the Preview button 7 Once you ve found the
224. in a bulletin board type of forum layout The Toshiba Forum is further augmented by a huge library of downloadable information files product speci fications utilities drivers and software K kod Use any World Wide Web browser to access the World Wide Web then type http www toshiba com tais csd support or http pcsupport tais com Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 4 1 Tf You Need Further Assistance Toshiba Voice Contact To aid Toshiba make sure you have KP K C The computer and any optional devices related to the problem The Microsoft Windows 95 diskettes the Toshiba Companion Diskette and the rest of the master diskettes You created the Microsoft Windows 95 diskettes using Create System Disks and either made the other diskettes using Master Disk Creator or purchased Toshiba drivers and utilities directly from Toshiba Name and version of the program involved in the problem along with its installation diskettes Information about what you were doing when the problem occurred Exact error messages and when they occurred For technical support call the Toshiba InTouch Center at 800 999 4273 From outside the United States call Toshiba PC Product Support at 714 859 4273 Toshiba s Worldwide Offices For additional help contact one of these Toshiba offices Argentina Australia Smart S A Toshiba Australia Pty Limited Mexico Street 63
225. ing transfer Based on a number of factors some protocols are faster than others Popular protocols include XMO DEM one of the earliest and still one of the most reliable proto cols and ZMODEM about the fastest available these days You don t really need to know anything about specific protocols just make sure you re using the same as the computer with which you re communicating If you would like to know more protocols are described in any book on telecommunications available at your local book or computer store Using Bulletin Board Services DEFINITION Local electronic bulletin board services BBSs like their mun dane counterpart hanging on your wall let you post messages for friends or questions to which a wide variety of people can respond Many BBSs also offer software programs or shareware that you can copy to your computer called downloading Shareware programs are copyrighted programs that you can try out for free If you decide you like the program you must send in a small registration fee Upon registering some share ware programs you may receive additional benefits such as a printed manual or free future upgrades Most BBSs serve a particular interest group and are run by an indi vidual or small group of people For example a science fiction BBS may have messages from people looking for out of print books and offer a few sample sections of new works Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 2
226. ites and as Works packages Some of these also include a database pro gram and or a communications program Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 22 Before You Go to a Computer Store Buying Programs An Office suite provides the same functionality as the manufac turer s individual programs In addition it usually includes a set of buttons for swapping between the programs Some Office suites also provide a means of easily moving data from one program to another Although expensive an Office suite still works out cheaper than buying all the programs individually So it is a good choice if you need all the programs it includes A Works package is much cheaper than an Office suite It provides basic wordprocessing drawing and spreadsheet functions and is excellent value for money provided you don t need any of the fea tures that have been omitted Typically a Works package supports very few file formats so transferring files between it and an Office suite can be a problem Also if you are used to a fully functioned wordprocessor or other program the lack of features you use regularly can be irritating Individual programs have their advantages too No single manu facturer produces the best program in each category So you may prefer to buy A s wordprocessor B s drawing package and C s spreadsheet All the well known software companies make sure that their programs can transfer data to and from those of their co
227. k and gives the best performance You can choose a write through policy instead It accesses the main memory every time the processor handles data See TSETUP on page 403 for details of how to set caching policy Because it has a relatively high power consumption the processor could overheat when you are working with large spreadsheets or databases or doing intensive manipulation of graphics To prevent this happening the chip has a cooling fan and an internal tempera ture sensor If the temperature rises above a certain level the fan is turned on and or the processing speed is reduced Again you can choose the cooling policy in the MaxTime Control Panel or TSETUP If you are using an AC outlet you will proba bly want to use the fan for cooling so that you maintain the com puter s performance If you are using battery power you may choose to reduce processor speed and sacrifice performance to conserve the battery Part I Getting To Know Your Computer What s Really Going On What Is a Computer 293 What Is Memory Random Access Memory or RAM is where the computer stores data it is currently using such as a document you are writing Accessing data in RAM is much faster than accessing it on a disk but is slower than accessing cache The amount of RAM has a significant effect on your computer s performance This is because when Windows runs out of RAM it uses the hard disk as an overflow work area You need to keep
228. k in the same way Images are created by turning individual dots on the screen on or off in various combina tions These dots are called pixels Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Gy 74 TECHNICAL NOTE What s Really Going On 297 How Does the Screen Display Information The LCD panel in your computer displays up to 800 horizontal and 600 vertical pixels Due to the extremely high number of transistors in the com puter s color LCD just under one million a few non con forming subpixels may be visible The quality inspection that Toshiba performs limits the number of non conforming sub pixels to 25 or less If a large number of newly non conform ing subpixels appears a problem may exist Contact your Toshiba dealer for assistance TOSHIB 2 A pixel on the display A pixel is the smallest element on the screen On a color display each pixel is made up of three subpixels one red one green and one blue RGB Each subpixel may be either on or off Mixing on and off subpixels is like blending the primary colors to create other colors A pel formed by several pixels The smallest element that your programs can control is called a pel Pels are arranged on the screen in a grid like fashion Depend ing on the video mode a program selects a pel may be a single pixel or several pixels Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 298 What s Really Going On How Does the Screen Display Informati
229. kely to result in interference to radio and TV reception Shielded cables must be used between the external devices and the computer s serial port parallel port monitor port and PS 2 port Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by the FCC could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Industry Canada Requirement This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interfer ence Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Copyright This guide is copyrighted by Toshiba Corporation with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws this guide cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Toshiba No patent liability is assumed however with respect to the use of the information contained herein 1996 by Toshiba Corporation All rights reserved Export Administration Regulation This document contains technical data that may be controlled under the U S Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the U S Department of Commerce prior to export Any export directly or indirectly in contravention of the U S Export Administration Regulations is prohibited Disclaimer This guide has been validated and reviewed for accuracy The sets of instructions and descriptions were accurate for the Toshiba Satellite Pro 4
230. kette or tape on a regular basis It s easy to put off backing up because it takes time However if your hard disk suddenly fails you Il lose all the data on it unless you have backup copies See the instructions in How to Back Up Your Work on page 104 Five More Things Every Computer User Should Do Take frequent breaks to avoid repetitive strain injuries and eye strain See Keep Yourself Comfortable on page 3 Z Ww Turn the computer off using Windows 95 s Shut Down or Sus pend command unless Resume Mode is on See Starting Again Where You Left Off on page 145 for information about Resume Mode and the Suspend command Windows 95 records information such as your desktop setup during its shutdown procedure K Ww Set up your computer to suit your tastes and needs If you don t like the colors or the fonts on the screen you can change them Click a blank area or the desktop with the sec ondary button then click Properties to open the Display Prop erties dialog box The Appearance tab of this dialog box allows you to choose the colors and font sizes you see on the screen K Ww Scan all new files for viruses This precaution is especially important for files you receive from your friends or download from the Internet See Viruses and How to Cure Them on page 254 for details Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 8 1 Computing Tips Run Create Syst
231. l t The front with the display closed Bee The volume control dial lets you adjust the loudness of the system speaker The 3 5 mm headphone jack lets you connect stereo headphones nd or other audio output devices such as external speakers Connect ing headphones or other devices to this jack disables the internal speaker automatically The speaker lets you hear system alarms and sounds associated with your software Pressing the display latch opens the computer s display panel For more information see Open the Display on page 25 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Finding Your Way around the System 7 Find Out Where Everything s Located The Left Side E RESET gt Line in jack Microphone jack Security lock slot Power button Serial port Diskette drive port Port cover Reset button PC Card slot The left side Attaching a special cable to the security lock slot lets you anchor your computer to your desk or other large heavy object For more information see Applying Physical Restraints on page 241 The port cover protects the serial port and diskette drive port The serial port lets you connect a serial mouse printer or other serial device For more information see Using an External Modem on page 203 The diskette drive port lets you connect the external 3 1 2 inch diskette drive if you have a CD ROM drive module installed in the computer s SelectBay Pre
232. lacement of the Computer Proper placement of the computer and external devices is important to avoid stress related injuries L K Ww Place the computer on a flat surface at a comfortable height and distance Your arms and hands should be in a relaxed posi tion with your forearms parallel to the floor The top of the dis play should be no higher than eye level Maintain good posture with your body relaxed and your weight distributed evenly You should be able to type without twisting your torso or neck and see the display panel without slouching Adjust the display panel to avoid glare If you use a paper holder set it at about the same height and distance as the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 4 Finding Your Way around the System Select a Place To Work Seating and Posture Proper seating is one of the primary factors in reducing work strain Some people find a backless chair more comfortable than a conventional chair Whichever type you choose refer to the fol lowing guidelines to adjust your chair for maximum computing comfort Below eye level ee l Approximately 90 Foot rest degree angles D eel Tooo Correct posture and positioning of the computer Position your chair so the keyboard is at or slightly below the level of your elbow You should be able to type comfortably with your shoulders relaxed If you are using a conventional chai
233. lacing the battery light flashes orange shortly after you have fully recharged the battery You must also discard a battery pack if it becomes damaged The battery can explode if it is not disposed of properly So don t simply throw it away Putting spent batteries in the trash is not only irresponsible it may also be illegal The materials that came with your computer may include an insert regarding the disposal of batteries If not check with your local government for information on where to recycle or dispose of old batteries If you cannot find the information you need contact Toshiba for assistance See Contacting Toshiba on page 338 for information on contacting Toshiba offices around the world Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 50 Taking Your Computer on the Road Conserving Power Conserving Power How long a fully charged battery pack lasts when you are using the computer depends on a number of factors such as How the computer is configured How much you use the hard disk CD ROM and diskette drives Whether you use any optional devices to which the battery supplies power K Ww Where you are working since operating time decreases at low temperatures There are various ways in which you can conserve power and extend the operating time of your battery Enable Resume Mode which saves power when you turn the computer off and back on again Use Toshiba s power saving option
234. le on compact discs is extensive Some current examples are K Audio CDs with music K Ww Instructional CDs with full motion video oe Data base CDs with medical books telephone books cook books and other extensive reference material K Ww Searchable texts of books stories poems the Bible and other literature fo Adventure games fantasy games and simulations K Ww Children s stories and learning games K Ww Multimedia presentations K kod Photo CDs with your own electronic photographs CDs filled with clip art files K kd K CDs with computer programs to help you redesign your home or garden plan your vacation balance your budget chart your stars or raise your child K2 Ww Extensive catalogs of hobbies such as coin collections astro nomical references and fishing lures Data bases with census data financial records maps and charts You will want to collect a library of compact discs to help you at work at home in study or recreation Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 63 Playing an Audio CD Playing a Pre Installed Compact Disc For each installed compact disc title the hard disk holds a small program that displays the title s icon It does not store the title s content To view a compact disc 1 Place the disc in the CD ROM drive 2 Click Start then point to Programs 3 Locate the folder that contains the comp
235. ll an older legacy device that Windows 95 cannot recognize Windows 95 may have difficulty assigning sys tem resources to it As a result a hardware conflict can occur To see what resources Windows 95 has assigned to the device see Checking Device Properties on page 318 If Windows 95 is unable to provide the information you need the pre assigned set tings for IRQs DMAs and I O assignments are listed in System Resources on page 449 for your reference Resolving Conflicts There are three things you can do to resolve hardware conflicts Disable the device For an older device remove it from the computer For a Plug and Play device see Fixing a Problem with Device Manager on page 317 K2 Ww Disable another system component and use its resources for the new device See Fixing a Problem with Device Manager on page 317 K Ww Reconfigure the device so its requirements do not conflict Refer to the device s documentation for instructions about changing settings on the device Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 1 7 Resolving a Hardware Conflict Fixing a Problem with Device Manager CAUTION Device Manager provides a way to check and change the configu ration of a device Changing the default settings using Device Manager can cause other conflicts that make one or more devices unus able Device Manager is a configuration tool for advanced users who unde
236. ll the start up files and device drivers Use this option when you want to run MS DOS or Windows 95 commands This option is for advanced users who are familiar with MS DOS and know what these commands do Safe Mode Command Prompt Only Selecting Safe Mode Command Prompt Only bypasses the system start up files and displays the command prompt Use this option under the following conditions oe Windows 95 fails to start even in Safe Mode oe You want to run MS DOS commands such as Edit to make changes to your start up files You want to avoid loading HIMEM SYS extended memory manager or IFSHLP SYS file system manager Windows 95 Can Help You If Windows 95 has started properly but you still have a problem using your computer Windows 95 Help can assist you in trouble shooting the problem Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 314 If Something Goes Wrong Resolving a Hardware Conflict To open the Windows 95 troubleshooting aid follow these steps 1 Click the Start button and click Help Windows 95 opens the Help Topics Windows Help dialog box 2 Click the Contents tab and double click Troubleshooting 3 Double click a problem you would like help with and follow the steps on the screen Resolving a Hardware Conflict If you receive an error message telling you there is a device driver conflict or a general hardware problem try using Windows Help to troubleshoot the problem first 1 From t
237. llite Pro 430 Series computer is an extremely powerful tool However not until you connect it to one or more additional computers through a modem network or cellular con nection can you begin to recognize its full potential By using Windows 95 s Dial Up Networking feature and your modem you can communicate with your office s local area net work LAN a larger corporate wide area network WAN or the Internet For specific information about connecting to a LAN or WAN consult your network administrator This chapter explains how to install and set up a fax modem and how to fax a document directly from your computer It describes the many ways you can use your modem to connect to other com puters and services such as the Internet 199 20 Connecting to the World If You re Ready to Go If You re Ready to Go This section provides a brief overview of the steps contained in the remainder of the chapter If you re an experienced computer user this may be enough for you If you need more help each step tells you where to go for more information Follow these steps 1 Install the fax modem You may use a PC Card or an external serial fax modem For more information see Setting Up on page 200 2 Determine the COM port the fax modem is using You ll need to know this to set up your communications pro gram If you re using a communications program designed for Windows 95 your program may determine the COM port
238. lly 3 Lift the locking latch on the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator 4 Gently lift the computer and slide it off of the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 3 4 If Something Goes Wrong Fixing Device Related Problems 5 Reconnect the computer and NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator making sure to press them together firmly Refer to Connecting the Computer to the NoteDock on page 238 for instructions 6 Turn the computer on and try setting up PC Card support again A PC Card error occurs Reinsert the card to make sure it s properly connected If the card is attached to an external device check that the connec tion is secure Refer to the card s documentation which should contain a trouble shooting section Printers This section lists some of the most common printer problems The printer won t print Check that the printer is connected to a working power outlet and is turned on and ready on line Check that the printer has plenty of paper Some printers won t start printing when there are just two or three sheets of paper left in the tray Make sure the printer cable is firmly attached to the computer and the printer If your printer is ECP or IEEE 1284 compliant make sure you have an IEEE 1284 printer cable Run the printer s self test to check for any problem with the printer itself Make sure you installed the proper printer drivers as sho
239. log box This page controls how the gauges display in the Dashboard window Option Display all gauges Enable cycle mode Auto cycle every xx seconds Show manual cycle button Small Large OK Usage Displays all the selected gauges at once Displays one dashboard gauge at a time changing gauges periodically Changes the displayed dashboard gauge every xx seconds You use the up and down arrows to set the number of seconds This option is available only if you chose Enable cycle mode Displays a manual cycle button on the Dashboard window You click this button to change the gauge displayed This option is available only if you chose Enable cycle mode Displays small gauges in the Dashboard window Displays large gauges in the Dashboard window Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Part II Technical Reference 360 Option Cancel Apply The Toshiba Access Panel The Dashboard Usage Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Applies your changes to the Dashboard window The Dashboard The dashboard section of the Toshiba Access Panel The dashboard contains the TAP gauges which display the current battery charge Clicking a gauge with the primary AccuPoint but ton displays a properties dialog box for that gauge These dialog boxes are discussed in the following sections Clicking a gauge with the secondary AccuPoint button displays a shortcut menu that provides three options
240. luttered with several program windows Fortunately it s simple to recreate order out of this chaos You can resize windows so you can see more than one of them at a time You can also hide windows by removing them from the desktop without actually closing your document or program This lesson introduces several ways to adjust the size and shape of windows open on the desktop Close button BX Exploring C File Edit View Tools Help gos om Al Folders Contents of T Maximize button 23 Desktop My Computer BE 3 Floppy amp BS C All a Mouse Minimize button J Program Files C Windows E Winutils a D 33 Control Panel Printers E Dial Up Networking S Network Neighborhood amp Recycle Bin E My New Folder 7 object s plus 11 hidden _ 795KB Disk fres space 705MB For Help click Help Topics on the Help Menu IE 25 389 A Start E My Computer E untitled Paint QJ Exploring C Bo 1 58AM Windows Explorer open on the desktop First notice the above illustration It identifies three buttons that are on the title bars of most windows These are the minimize maximize and close buttons Now that you know where these but tons are follow these steps 1 To make the Windows Explorer window the active win dow click the Windows Explorer button on the taskbar Windows displays Windo
241. m To clear the condition press Ctrl Alt Del or press the reset button Clearing the condition may get you running by disabling Resume Mode but it won t solve a resource conflict Read the documenta tion that came with the conflicting device and Resolving a Hard ware Conflict on page 314 You press the power button and hear the system start but you receive a hard disk drive HDD error message There is a problem starting Windows 95 from your hard disk Fol low these steps 1 Insert the Toshiba Companion Diskette into the com puter s diskette drive Restart your computer and press F10 when the system starts Pressing F10 changes the Boot Priority option setting in TSETUP This command instructs the computer to start from the diskette drive The message Welcome to Toshiba Companion Diskette displays on your screen Press Enter The Toshiba Companion Diskette Main Menu displays a list of options Select Exit to DOS and press Enter The MS DOS prompt a gt appears Type sys c then press Enter The computer processes the command and displays the mes sage system transferred when complete Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 30 8 If Something Goes Wrong Problems When You Turn the Computer On 6 Remove the diskette from the diskette drive 7 Restart your computer Your system should start Windows 95 from the hard drive If you receive another error message there is a problem with Wind
242. media 1 5 Using External Speakers or Headphones Using External Speakers or Headphones To play back sound files through an external device such as head phones or stereo speakers follow these steps Headphone jack The headphone jack 1 Locate the headphone jack on the front of the computer 2 Plug the cord from the external audio device into the head phone jack The headphone jack requires a 16 ohm stereo mini jack If your device uses a different jack you can purchase an adapter at most electronics stores 3 Follow the steps in the previous section Managing Your CD ROMs If you have a large number of CD ROMs you might find yourself wishing for an easy way to keep track of what s on all of them That s where Toshiba s magiCDisc CD ROM management pro gram comes in Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 76 The Wide World of Multimedia Managing Your CD ROMs With magiCDisc you can launch an associated program whenever you insert a CD ROM into the drive You can search for a specific CD ROM by title category or other key word and look at only CD ROMs of a particular type such as data audio or photo If a CD ROM includes programs to install on your hard disk you can start the installation program from magiCDisc You can also use magiCDisc to browse through and sample the multimedia files sound animation and graphical images on a CD ROM To use m
243. mount of free space on the disk Part II Technical Reference 36 The Toshiba Access Panel The Dashboard Option Usage Disk used percentage When this option is selected the Hard Disk Gauge displays the percentage of disk space used Analog When this option is selected the Hard Disk Gauge displays the hard disk space in analog format OK Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Cancel Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Apply Applies your changes to the Toshiba Access Panel The Memory Resource Properties Dialog Box Display 21x Monitored Resources GbiFesouced System Resources User Resources Display Modes SOU Bar Graph WEEE Percentage Remaining The Memory Resource Properties dialog box This dialog box lets you choose how the Memory Resource Gauge displays Option Usage GDI Resources When this option is selected the Memory Resource Gauge displays the current status of the GDI resources Part IT Technical Reference Option System Resources User Resources Bar Graph Percentage Remaining OK Cancel Apply ee ee obo Usage When this option is selected the Memory Resource Gauge displays the current status of the system resources When this option is selected the Memory Resource Gauge displays the current status of the user resources When this option is selected the Memory Resource Gauge displa
244. mpetitors And swapping between programs is easy with the Windows 95 taskbar Also an Office suite takes up a lot of space on your hard disk If you are only going to use a wordprocessor and a drawing package buying just the two programs you need is the best option Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Before You Go to a Computer Store 1 2 3 Buying Programs Should Buy the Diskette or the CD ROM Version Many programs and most integrated packages are available either on diskette or on CD ROM Loading programs from CD ROM is faster and more convenient It saves you the chore of inserting and removing all those installa tion diskettes and eliminates the possibility of encountering a damaged diskette in the middle of a multi diskette software installation So buy the CD ROM version whenever you have the choice Understanding the Information on the Box In addition to listing the features of the product on the box the manufacturer usually prints the system requirements Below is an actual example of the system requirements for a Windows 95 compatible program Your computer meets all of these requirements Minimum Requirements Microsoft Windows 95 16MB of RAM VGA video adapter mouse or other pointing device 55MB free hard disk space Recommended SVGA video adapter and monitor sound card and speakers CD ROM drive The following sections explain each of the characteristics above Windows Compatibility
245. mputer on Your Desk Using an External Keyboard Using an External Keyboard If you prefer to use a standard desktop keyboard you can attach one to your computer The PS 2 port supports any PS 2 compati ble keyboard n You can only connect one PS 2 device at a time unless you purchase an optional Y cable Using a Y cable allows you to are connect a PS 2 mouse and a PS 2 keyboard simultaneously Connecting the Keyboard To connect an external keyboard follow these steps 1 Turn the computer off UN Make sure the computer is off before you attach the keyboard stor Connecting a keyboard with the computer s power on may A damage the keyboard the computer or both PS 2 port Connecting an external keyboard 2 Attach the keyboard cable to the PS 2 port on the back of the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Using Your Computer on Your Desk 2 3 1 Using an External Keyboard 3 See the keyboard s documentation for additional configu ration steps 4 Turn the computer on The keyboard is ready to use If you experience any problems refer to The Keyboard on page 323 Making Your External Keyboard Pretend it Has the Fn Key An external keyboard doesn t have the Fn key contained on the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer s built in keyboard If you use the computer s hotkeys or have set up key combinations in Fn esse you ll probably miss these features when using an external keyboard Don
246. n The Satellite Pro 430CDT has an 11 3 inch mea sured diagonally active matrix Thin Film Transis tor TFT color LCD that displays up to 16M colors simultaneously at 800 x 600 resolution Enhanced 82 key 84 key in Europe keyboard emulates the IBM PS 2 keyboard and includes embedded numeric and cursor control overlays and dedicated cursor control keys ESS Technologies ES688 Yamaha OPL3 YMEF262 and Yamaha D A converter YAC512 is SoundBlaster Pro compatible AccuPoint and buttons CD ROM drive a 10X average Standard Software Operating System Configuration Programs Power Sound CD ROM Management File Transfer and Remote Printing Faxing and Telecommunications Features and Specifications Built in Features 441 Provides the complete function of a mouse or other pointing device from within the keyboard Integrated modular 5 25 inch 10X speed MPC compliant photo CD capable CD ROM drive lets you run programs from CD ROMs compact discs Microsoft Windows 95 with SVGA drivers The MaxTime Control Panel the Toshiba System Control Panel and TSETUP let you change con figuration options and set preferences APM and the Toshiba Access Panel monitor the battery charge and provide access to the computer power saving features ESS Audio software The magiCDisc program lets you keep track of CD ROMs you ve used on your computer TranXit program lets you transmit files or print to another c
247. n the computer off in Resume Mode a special memory powered by the backup battery keeps track of everything for the next time you turn the computer on The backup battery gets its charge from the main battery It maintains its charge for up to eight hours after the main battery discharges Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 300 What s Really Going On Power Management K Ww The RTC real time clock battery powers the RTC memory which stores the computer s configuration information When you make changes in TSETUP the MaxTime Control Panel or the Toshiba System Control Panel this memory keeps track of those settings The RTC battery also operates the computer s internal clock Like the backup battery the RTC battery gets its charge from the main battery It maintains its charge for up to one month Be careful not to overcharge the battery If you know your main battery is fully charged use it rather than connecting to an AC power source Batteries gradually discharge when not used If your main battery has been idle for several days you will need to charge it again before you use it Don t leave your battery packs dormant for long periods Even if you use AC power most of the time use the main battery periodi cally to keep it fresh Power Management Power management is the process of conserving power when applications or hardware devices are idle This is particularly important when you are using the battery
248. n To Fn esse allows you to choose between File Program Folder and Custom Folder Click File Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box with the Assign ment Type set to File Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 2 23 Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse r Assignment for Fn D Assignment Type File ReAssign Tow Description Target Start In Programs Browse Cl Run mode Nomal Minimized Maximized C Switch to running target application if one exists Cea The Assignment dialog box 5 Fill in the Description Target and Start in text boxes with the file information or click Programs or Browse to choose your file from a list Clicking Programs displays the Programs Browser dialog box which lists the items in the Programs menu Clicking Browse displays the Open dialog box which allows you to select your file from a directory tree 6 Click the folder which contains the program or file you want to assign Fn esse displays the selected folder s contents 7 Click the program icon or the file icon to which you want to assign the Fn key combination 8 Exit the dialog box Click OK if you re in the Programs Browser Click Open if you re in the Open dialog box Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box with the Descrip tion Target and Start in text boxes filled in Part I Getting
249. n and off individual pels to display a variety of images The computer controls every pel on the screen individually This provides maximum display flexibility while somewhat reducing the speed at which the display produces images Part I Getting To Know Your Computer What s Really Going On What about the Batteries 299 An image produced this way could be a drawing or picture like a pie chart graph or photograph It could also be an icon or a varia tion on a text character like italics or bold type Windows 95 and Windows programs use graphics modes Tn Touch with Tomorrow Character cell in a text mode In a text mode a character cell is the smallest element a program can control A character cell is a grid of pels All cells are the same size Each cell displays a single letter or symbol Character cells are arranged in rows and columns In a text mode only characters from a predefined set are available If your program uses a text mode refer to the program s documentation for a list of available characters What about the Batteries A battery converts chemical energy into electrical energy Rechargeable batteries like those in your computer can take an electrical current and store it as chemical energy for later use In addition to the main battery that powers your system when you re away from an AC outlet your computer has two other batteries The backup battery supports Resume Mode When you tur
250. n the right side of the computer The CD ROM drive won t open if the computer s power is off The CD ROM drive slides partially open about one inch Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 97 Using the CD ROM Drive Opening the CD ROM drive 3 Grasp the sides of the CD ROM tray and pull the drive until it s fully open 4 Check the compact disc to make sure it is free of dust before inserting it If the disc is dusty clean it as described in Taking Care of Compact Discs on page 99 Placing the compact disc in the drive 5 Carefully place the compact disc in the drive with the label facing up Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 98 CAUTION Learning the Basics Using the CD ROM Drive Correct position Compact disc Spindle Incorrect positions Positioning the compact disc on the spindle 6 Gently press the compact disc onto the center spindle until you feel it click into place Make sure the disc is completely on the spindle and is lying flat If you insert the disc incorrectly it may jam in the drive If this happens see your dealer or an authorized service provider for assistance Push the CD ROM tray in by pressing gently on the center of the tray until it clicks into place You re ready to use the CD ROM Before moving the computer even just across the room remove the CD ROM from the drive and place it in a safe place where it will not be damaged
251. n using your computer for a few weeks much of your hard disk may already be filled with programs and data Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Before You Go to a Computer Store 1 2 5 Buying Programs To determine the available space on your hard disk follow these steps 1 In the desktop double click the My Computer icon Windows 95 opens the My Computer folder 2 Click don t double click on the C icon Windows 95 displays the space remaining Free Space and total capacity of the drive at the bottom of the My Computer window These numbers are listed in megabytes MB See How Big Is a Gigabyte Anyway on page 295 for more information on megabytes If you can t see these numbers widen the window until you can see them To resize a window see Lesson 6 Resizing and Reshaping Windows on page 61 Graphics Card A graphics card is also called a display adapter It may be a board installed in a desktop computer or a chip as in the Satellite Pro 430 Series Program requirements are generally listed by the type of adapter or the maximum resolution the adapter supports The Satellite Pro 430 Series display adapter is compatible with the VGA Video Graphics Array and SVGA Super VGA standards The adapter has a maximum resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels For programs requiring resolutions higher than 800 x 600 you ll need an external monitor or the internal display s virtual display mode See Using an Ext
252. ndixes Video Modes 4 5 9 CDS Model Video Modes Internal LCD External Monitor Mode Grid Grid Scan Freq hex Type Resolution pelxpel Colors pelxpel Colors hor vert 7 VGA 80x25 8 9 x 14 Mono 9x14 Mono 31 5KHz 70Hz Text T VGA 80 x 25 89 x 16 Mono 9x16 Mono 31 5KHz 70Hz Text D VGA 320 x 200 8x8 16 222K 8x8 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph E VGA 640 x 200 8x8 16 222K 8x8 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph F VGA 640 x 350 8x 14 Mono 8x 14 Mono 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph 10 VGA 640 x 350 8x 14 16 222K 8x 14 16 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph 11 VGA 640 x 480 8x16 2 222K 8x 16 2 256K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 12 VGA 640 x 480 8x 16 16 222K 8x 16 16 256K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 13 VGA 320 x 200 8x8 256 222K 8x8 256 256K 31 5KHz 70Hz Graph 20 SVGA 640 x 480 8x 16 16 222K 8x 16 16 256K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 37 9KHz 72Hz 37 5KHz 75Hz 22 SVGA 800 x 600 8x8 16 222K 8x8 16 256K 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph 48 1 KHz 72Hz 46 9KHz 75Hz 24 SVGA 1024x768 8x16 16 222K 8x 16 16 256K 35 5KHz 87Hz Graph 48 4KHz 60Hz 57 5KHz 70Hz 60 0KHz 75Hz 28 SVGA 1280 x 1024 8x 16 16 222K 8x 16 16 256K 35 5KHz 60Hz Graph 30 SVGA 640 x 480 8x 16 256 222K 8x 16 256 256K 31 5KHz 60Hz Graph 37 9KHz 72Hz 37 5KHz 75Hz 32 SVGA 800 x 600 8x 16 256 222K 8x16 256 256K 37 9KHz 60Hz Graph 48 1KHz 72Hz 46 9KHz 75Hz 34 SVGA 1024x768 8x16 256 222K 8x16 256 256K 35 5SKHz 87Hz Graph 48 4KHz 60Hz 57 5KHz 70Hz 60 0KHz 75Hz
253. nel The Options Button 375 Usage Causes the panel to reappear when you position the cursor at the edge of the screen where the panel displays and click the primary AccuPoint button This option is available only if you selected Auto hide Causes the panel to reappear when you position the cursor at the edge of the screen where the panel displays and click the secondary AccuPoint but ton This option is available only if you selected Auto hide Displays the TAP gauges in a large format Displays the application icons on the panel in a large format Opens the Gauge Icon Size dialog box refer to The Gauge Icon Size Dialog Box on page 377 and lets you assign different gauge and icon sizes to each configuration When this check box is selected TAP automati cally associates sound effects with the following events Bar reappear from auto hide Sliderbar slideout Dashboard undock Dashboard redock Part IT Technical Reference 3 The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button Option Usage Use TAP animation When this check box is selected TAP automati effects cally animates actions for the following system events Bar auto hide Bar reappear from auto hide Sliderbar slideout Sliderbar retract Dashboard undock Dashboard redock Configuration button Opens the Special Effects dialog box refer to in Special Effects The Special Effects Dialog Box on page 377 section and lets you assign differen
254. neous Play System Beep O Play wav File iba APM No Sound Play System Beep Critical Battery Alarm Actions FZ Display an alarm message te O Play way File TOSHIBA Cancel v L_Heb The Battery Alarms tab of the MaxTime Control Panel 5 Select the threshold that will trigger the battery alarm To set the alarm to sound when the battery charge reaches the Percent Remaining Threshold click Based on Percent Remaining To set the alarm to sound when the battery charge reaches the Time Remaining Threshold click Based on Time Remaining 6 Select the threshold levels that will trigger the alarms by moving the Low and Critical sliders in the Battery Alarm Thresholds section 7 To configure the system to display a warning message for the Low Battery Alarm select Display an alarm message in the Low Battery Alarm Actions section of the dialog box If you select this option you can also select a sound event to occur when the Low Battery Alarm warning displays No Sound Play System Beep or Play wav File 8 To configure the system to display a warning message for the Critical Battery Alarm select Display an alarm mes sage in the Critical Battery Alarm Actions section of the dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 4
255. ner The previ ous illustration shows the New Registration dialog box for a data CD ROM The options in the dialog box are different depending on the CD ROM type 2 Enter a title and version data CD artist audio CD or date photo CD Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 79 Managing Your CD ROMs 3 Use the Category drop down list box to enter a category To add a new category click the Add Category button 4 Type in any additional information in the Notes box 5 Select None if you don t want the system to start a pro gram automatically when you insert the CD ROM Select Windows 95 AutoPlay Script to run the associated AutoPlay script file on the CD ROM when you insert the CD ROM This option is only available if the CD ROM being reg istered supports the Windows 95 AutoPlay script capability Select Default Media Player to start the player appropriate for the type of CD ROM when you insert the CD ROM into the drive Using this option lets you set the media player for all CD ROMs of a specific type To define the player see Cus tomizing the Media Player on page 186 Select Command Line to start a specific program when you insert the CD ROM into the drive Enter the exact command and working directory into the indicated boxes or use the Browse or Applications buttons to locate the program 6 Click OK to complete the registration process and close the New Registration dialog box
256. nformation on the box 119 1 2 Before You Go to a Computer Store Buying Programs What Types of Programs Can Buy The following sections describe some types of programs that may fit your needs If You re a Writer Almost everyone needs a word processor This includes profes sional writers as well as others who use computers for daily correspondence To go beyond working with text and create a book an advertise ment or a newsletter you ll need a desktop publishing program If you are a public speaker a presentation package can help you design professional looking overheads handouts questionnaires and announcements If You Want to Draw If you are a graphics artist or a creative artist a variety of flexible two and three dimensional drawing programs are available Some require a tablet connected to your computer through the serial port If You re an Accountant or Financial Analyst There are a number of outstanding spreadsheet programs on the market Professional accounting software is another category you should investigate The programs available range from general purpose to highly specialized If You Want to Manage Your Money You can choose from a variety of programs for keeping track of your income and expenditure They range from simple programs for managing family finances to more comprehensive programs that are also suitable for small businesses In addition there are programs for managing investm
257. ng backup copies of the files stored on the hard disk If you prefer you can remove the CD ROM drive and install the diskette drive into the SelectBay See Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 for more information The external diskette drive case works with the diskette drive only The CD ROM drive only works when installed in the iar computers SelectBay Attaching the External Diskette Drive To attach the external diskette drive to the computer follow these steps Port cover Opening the port cover 1 Open the port cover on the left side of the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 2 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Connect the External Diskette Drive Diskette drive port Cable Attaching the external diskette drive 2 Attach the cable from the external diskette drive to the diskette drive port You may attach the external diskette drive with the computer on or off If you attempt to use the diskette drive and it is not attached to the computer the computer displays an error message The computer automatically recognizes the external diskette drive and calls it the A drive Disconnecting the External Diskette Drive Disconnecting the external diskette drive To detach the external diskette drive from the computer press the cable connector buttons on each side of the cable connector Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 2 3 Connect th
258. nin Ne ENN SENN ee aA 25 Fill In Your Registration Card and Mail It 26 Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device 0 27 Turn the Computer On ce2 ee eee eee vee rreren 28 When You Turn the Computer On the First Time 29 Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM 35 Using the Electronic Guide nnn ses ee ecwwadedneadess 41 et s Start at the ery Beginning Now that you know where everything is it s time to get to work This chapter provides easy to follow steps for getting the com puter up and running Connect to a Power Source Before you can use the battery to power the computer you must charge it With the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer s built in power supply providing power to your computer requires only a power cord Just plug the cord into the computer and a live power outlet Leave the computer plugged in for two to three hours with the computer turned off or five to eight hours with the power on Soon the battery will be completely charged and ready to power the computer Once the battery is charged for the first time don t leave the computer plugged in and turned off for more than a few hours ware at a time 15 1 6 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Adding Memory Optional To connect your computer to a power source follow these steps Power socket Power cable Connecting the power cable to the computer 1 Connect the power cable
259. nitializing of Windows 95 device drivers A device driver is a file that contains information to help the computer s BIOS Basic Input Output System control opera tions of devices connected to the system Safe Mode Selecting Safe Mode bypasses basic start up files and starts Windows 95 enabling only the mouse keyboard and standard VGA display drivers Running Safe Mode allows you to undo any changes you made to the system configuration that may have caused Windows 95 or a device to fail For example if you choose a resolution that is not supported by the display Windows 95 will have a problem starting correctly Safe Mode bypasses the setting and allows you to change the resolution to one supported by the display Once you have done this Windows 95 will start correctly Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 1 2 If Something Goes Wrong Windows 95 Isn t Working Other problems may involve a device driver See Windows 95 Can Help You on page 313 to fix the problem Windows 95 automatically starts in Safe Mode if it detects that system start up failed or the Windows 95 Registry the file that defines how Windows 95 is set up is corrupted Step by Step Confirmation When you turn your computer on Windows 95 processes the start up directory By selecting Step by Step Confirmation the sys tem asks you to confirm each line of the start up process once it displays Use this option when K Ww The start up proces
260. now Your Computer 1 8 The Wide World of Multimedia Managing Your CD ROMs Registration Options CD Inspector CD Registration Media Players Enable Detection of Unregistered CDs Data CDs starts Windows 95 AutoPlay enabled CDs Audio CDs starts default audio player MY Photo CDs starts Windows 95 AutoPlay enabled CDs AutoStart Options Enable AutoStart Option Ignore CD already in drive on startup Prompt if CD already in drive on startup Cancel 7 Help The CD Inspector page 2 To enable the Inspector for unregistered CD ROMs click the check box next to each desired type If the unregistered CD ROM contains a Windows 95 AutoPlay script the Inspector executes the script If no Windows 95 AutoPlay script is found on the CD ROM the Inspector dialog box opens If the disc is an unregistered audio CD ROM the Inspector launches the default audio player To automatically start programs when you insert a regis tered CD ROM click the box next to Enable AutoStart Option A check appears in the box when the option is enabled If this option isn t set registered CD ROMs won t start pro grams automatically even if the AutoStart option is selected in the individual CD ROM s registration information Click OK to close the Registration Options dialog box with your settings in effect Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 8 5 Managing
261. ns again To start the test follow these steps 1 Click Start then click Shut Down Windows 95 displays the Shut Down Windows dialog box 2 Click the button next to Restart the computer in MS DOS mode and click Yes Windows 95 shuts down then restarts in MS DOS mode and displays a system prompt 3 If your diskette drive is not installed in the SelectBay con nect the external diskette drive or swap drives in the Select Bay To swap drives see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 4 Put the Toshiba Companion Diskette in drive A and press Ctrl Alt Del After a moment the computer displays a Welcome screen 5 Press Enter The Toshiba Companion Utility displays its main menu Main Menu Install Utilities and Files View README Documents Setup Your Computer Run Diagnostics Set Passwords Exit to DOS Part IT Technical Reference 7 The Diagnostic Test 42 3 Choosing Test Options Use the arrow keys to select Run Diagnostics and press Enter TDIAGS asks you to confirm that you want to run the diagnostic test To run the diagnostic test press Y for yes and press Enter The following sections explain the diagnostic test options Choosing Test Options Before the test begins the program asks several questions about which components you wish to test CAUTION 1 The first question asks if you want to test the diskette drive s The computer displays Test the FDD Y N To te
262. nter Oth erwise printer cables are available from your dealer and at most computer and electronics stores If your printer is ECP or IEEE compliant make sure your printer cable is an IEEE 1284 cable NOTE To connect the printer to the computer follow these steps 1 Make sure the computer is off UN Don t connect the printer cable if the computer s power is on sTo Doing so may cause damage to the printer the computer or A both WARNING 2 Identify the two ends of the printer cable One end with the male DB 25 connector connects to the computer The other end connects to the printer e wN To the computer To the printer Identifying the ends of the printer cable Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 2 5 Open the Display 3 Connect the printer cable to your printer If you re unsure how to do this your printer s documentation will tell you Parallel port Printer cable Connecting the printer cable to the parallel port 4 Connect the printer cable to the computer s parallel port 5 Plug the printer s power cable into a live AC outlet Open the Display The final step before you turn your computer on is to open the display Display latch The display latch 1 Facing the front of the computer locate the display latch on the front center of the display panel Part I Getting To Know You
263. nts a delicious array of reci pes and information on food and drink A Few Newsgroups KP Ww K Kod K Ww K Ww K Ww alt comedy british is for fans of British humour alt sports badminton lets you keep current with information about badminton news newusers questions is dedicated to information for new users of the Internet rec backcountry contains information about outdoor activities such as backpacking and camping sci anthropology provides discussions on anthropology Search Engines K K K Kod Ww Ww oe http www yahoo com http www webcrawler com http www altavista digital com http www albany net allinone Additional Places of Interest KP Koca KP president whitehouse gov is the e mail address of the U S President marvel loc gov is the gopher for the Library of Congress Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 2 Connecting to the World Connecting Directly to Another Computer Connecting Directly to Another Computer If you re connecting directly to another computer or a bulletin board system BBS you ll need a general purpose communica tions program such as the Hyperterminal program included with Windows 95 This section describes some of the things you ll need to know to connect to another computer but does not contain specific instructions for any communications programs Refer to Hyperterminal s Help for information about using Hyperterminal T
264. nu 3 Consult your dealer Part II Technical Reference 4 2 The Diagnostic Test Test Sequence Character Attributes When the memory test completes the diagnostic test displays the following screen CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES NEXT LINE SHOWS NORMAL DISPLAY NEXT LINE SHOWS INTENSIFIED DISPLAY IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII NEXT LINE SHOWS REVERSE DISPLAY RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR NEXT LINE SHOWS BLINKING DISPLAY BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BLUE RED MAGENTA GREEN CYAN YELLOW WHITE Press Enter key Character attributes test screen Look under the message NEXT LINE SHOWS BLINKING DISPLAY to make sure the line is actually blinking If your screen doesn t match the diagnostic test display write down the differences and contact your dealer If your screen matches the display press Enter to go to the next test 320 X 200 Graphic Display The next test is the 320 x 200 GRAPHIC DISPLAY 13 test The test screen displays 16 colored horizontal bars with the name of the color Go to the next test by pressing Enter Character Sets The next two tests are character set tests The first checks that the screen can display characters in a 40 column by 25 row format the characters are wider than normal Part IT Technical Reference esei OO The display screen should look like the following CHARACTER SET IN 4 25 SPO be DOR Se ATMS ee BTL et at HSE Clee f 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEF
265. o Know Your Computer 266 MaxTime Making Life Easier Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Hard Disk Auto Off Display Auto Off uto Off TOSHIBA Cancel The External Power Usage dialog box Each configuration is represented by a tab 5 Click the tab for the configuration you want to change 6 Choose one of the Power Usage Modes from the list box Low Power conserves power when you re using the battery Full Power maximizes system performance Custom Settings lets you set each power usage option indi vidually For more information about each of these options see Conserving Power on page 150 Click OK to close the dialog box 8 Click OK to exit the MaxTime Control Panel Changing Battery Alarm Settings You control the battery alarm settings through the MaxTime Con trol Panel To set up separate battery alarms for each of your con figurations follow these steps 1 2 3 Click Start then point to Settings Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel Double click the MaxTime icon The MaxTime Control Panel opens with the Power Settings tab on top Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 267 Saving Time with Multiple Configurations 4 Click the Battery Alarms tab to bring it to the front Power Settings Battery Alarms Miscellaneous Battery Alarm Thresholds Low
266. o Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 3 1 Fixing Device Related Problems Card Information Structure When you insert a PC Card into a slot the computer attempts to determine the type of card and resources it requires by reading its Card Information Structure CIS Sometimes the CIS contains enough information for you to use the card immediately Other cards must be set up before you can use them Use the Windows 95 PC Card PCMCIA Wizard to set up the card See Setting Up Your PC Card for Your Computer on page 194 for information about the PC Card Wizard Some card manufacturers use special software called enablers to support their cards Enablers result in nonstandard configurations that can cause problems when installing another PC Card If Windows 95 doesn t have built in drivers for your PC Card and the card didn t come with a Windows 95 driver it may not work under Windows 95 Contact the manufacturer of the PC Card for information about operating the card under Windows 95 PC Card Checklist Make sure the card is inserted properly into the slot Refer to Inserting PC Cards on page 193 for how to insert PC Cards Make sure all cables are securely connected Make sure the computer is loading only one version of Card and Socket Services Occasionally a defective PC Card slips through quality control If another PCMCIA equipped computer is available try the card in that machine If
267. o tandan nese ess p E 384 The Toshiba Access Panel Dashboard tear off button Configuration button Gauge ___ Dashboard fa Splitter Application icons Options button _ Help button The Toshiba Access Panel This illustration above identifies the components of the Toshiba Access Panel The following sections discuss each of the compo nents of the panel in detail as well as the features accessible through these components 353 3 5 The Toshiba Access Panel The Configuration Button The Configuration Button The icon on this button identifies which configuration you re cur rently using Clicking this button with the primary AccuPoint button displays the configuration slider bar discussed in the fol lowing section The Configuration Slider Bar Clicking the configuration button with the secondary AccuPoint button displays a shortcut menu that provides five options Menu Option Show Gauge Gallery Undock Dashboard Close Toshiba Access Panel What s This TAP Properties Part II Technical Reference Result Opens the Gauge Gallery window If the Gauge Gallery is already open this option reads Hide Gauge Gallery Removes the dashboard section from the Toshiba Access Panel and displays the gauges in a sepa rate Dashboard window See The Dashboard Window on page 356 Closes the Toshiba Access Panel Displays inf
268. ogram offered you the opportunity to define a printer Read this section if you didn t do so or want to set up a different printer Setting up a printer involves choosing a printer driver This special program acts as a translator that turns your work into a form the printer can understand This section describes how to select a printer driver in Windows 95 If you re using any non Windows programs you ll need to set up a printer driver for each of those programs Refer to your program s documentation for more information Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 9 3 How to Print Something You ve Created In Windows 95 you set up a printer with the Add Printer Wizard Follow these steps 1 Click the Start button then point to Settings 2 Click Printers Windows 95 opens the Printers window 3 Double click Add Printer Windows 95 starts the Add Printer Wizard This wizard will help you to install your printer quickly and easily To begin installing your printer click Next Cancel The Add Printer Wizard 4 Click Next The Add Printer Wizard asks you to select your printer If your printer is Plug and Play Windows 95 recognizes it automatically You can ignore the remainder of this section 5 If the printer you re setting up Isn t connected to a network select Local printer and click Next Is connected to a network select Network printer and click Next
269. ommonly referred to as system resources Interrupt Request Channel The channel to the CPU is called an Interrupt ReQuest IRQ because it interrupts what the processor is doing and requests some of the processor s time If two or more devices use the same IRQ the processor doesn t know which device is asking for atten tion This causes a problem Direct Memory Address Similarly the data required by the device is stored in a specific place or address in memory called the Direct Memory Address DMA The DMA provides a dedicated channel for adapter cards to bypass the microprocessor and access memory directly If two or more devices use the same DMA the data required by one device overwrites the data required by the other If this occurs you have a hardware conflict Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 1 6 If Something Goes Wrong Resolving a Hardware Conflict Plug and Play With Plug and Play and Windows 95 avoiding hardware conflicts is easy Plug and Play is a computer standard that helps the system BIOS basic input output system and Windows 95 to automati cally assign system resources to Plug and Play compliant devices In theory if every device connected to the computer is Plug and Play compliant no two devices will compete for the same system resources You simply plug in the device and turn your computer on Windows 95 automatically sets up your system to accommo date the new device However if you insta
270. omputer 3 30 If Something Goes Wrong Fixing Device Related Problems The Sound System You don t hear any sound from the computer Adjust the volume control If you are using an external microphone or speakers check that they are securely connected to your computer In TSETUP check that the sound function is enabled The computer emits a loud high pitched noise This is feedback between the microphone and the speakers It occurs in any sound system when input from a microphone is fed to the speakers and the speaker volume is too loud Adjust the vol ume control If you have changed the settings for the Record Monitor feature in the Recording Control Utility default Off or the Mute feature in the Mixer Utility default Enabled these may cause feedback Revert to the default settings PC Cards PC Cards PCMCIA compatible include many types of devices such as a removable hard disk additional memory fax modem or pager The applications for these devices continue to grow as new products come onto the market almost daily Most PC Card problems occur during installation and setup of new cards If you re having trouble getting one or more of these devices to work together several sections in this chapter may apply Resource conflicts can cause problems when using PC Cards Refer to Resolving a Hardware Conflict on page 314 gt Ifthe device is a modem see Modems on page 335 Part I Getting T
271. omputer into the cigarette lighter of your car This is a great way to charge the computer s battery while driving to your next appointment How about a Carrying Case When you re on the road you ll probably want a way to carry your computer with you Toshiba offers four choices of carrying cases for the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer K Ww Sturdy fabric carrying case Leather attach K Ww Leather Executive Portfolio K Ww ae Backpack style case All of these cases help protect the computer from the bumps and bruises of normal travel They also provide plenty of extra space for manuals power cords and diskettes Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 59 Leave the Guide at Home Leave the Guide at Home While you re packing for a trip you think how nice it would be to be able to leave this heavy guide at home Fortunately you can do that without giving up the information you may need The entire contents of this guide are available in electronic form on your computer s hard disk For complete information about using this on line documentation see Using the Electronic Guide on page 41 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter Building Your Compact Disc Library 04 162 Playing an Audio CD v cc05 c cere dee beads Veh eee cua de 163 Playing Back Sound Video and Animation Files 164 Recording Sounds as Wave Files
272. omputer on Battery Power 136 Cha sing Batteries is aia ia EE AA E S 147 Disposing of Used Batteries Safely 00005 149 Conserving POWER ox tre toee eee wees ee adecd ae 150 Looking After Your Battery 0 cee eee ee eeeee 156 Additional Power Options 0ceeeeeee cette 157 How about a Carrying Case 0 cece ee eee eee 158 Leave the Guide at Home i ss es dk dwky ed Ppt eases 159 Taking Your Computer on the Road Probably the main reason you bought a notebook computer was so you could use it in a variety of places This chapter covers all the aspects of running your computer while traveling Toshiba s Energy Saver Design fm Toshiba is a partner in the Environmental Protection Agency s lonse EPA Energy Star Program and has designed this product to meet the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency The Satellite Pro 430 Series computer enters a low power stand by state when it is not being used thereby conserving energy and saving money in the process It has a number of other features that enhance its energy efficiency Many of these energy saving features have been set by Toshiba We recommend you leave these features active so your computer will operate at its maximum energy efficiency 135 1 36 Taking Your Computer on the Road Running the Computer on Battery Power Running the Computer on Battery Power The Satellite Pro 430 Series computer contain
273. omputer on the Road Running the Computer on Battery Power Monitoring Battery Power The computer s battery light gives you an indication of the main battery s current charge Green indicates a full charge Orange indicates the battery is charging gt Flashing orange indicates that the charge is running low The dashboard section of the Toshiba Access Panel provides gauges that display the remaining battery charge in a variety of formats This section describes how to use the Toshiba Access Panel to monitor the battery charge To learn more about the Toshiba Access Panel read The Toshiba Access Panel on page 353 The computer drains battery power more quickly at low tem peratures Check your remaining charge frequently if you re working in temperatures below 50 degrees Fahrenheit The computer calculates the remaining battery charge as it oper ates based on your current rate of power use With repeated dis charges and recharges the battery s capacity will gradually decrease So a frequently used older battery will not power the computer for as long as a new battery even when both are fully charged The Toshiba Access Panel indicates a 100 charge for both old and new batteries but the estimated time remaining will be shorter for an older battery Wait at least sixteen seconds after turning on the computer before trying to monitor the remaining battery power The computer needs this time to check the batte
274. omputer via the serial parallel or infrared port Microsoft Fax and Hyperterminal Windows 95 Part III Appendixes 442 Special Features Resume Mode Advanced Power Management Security Documentation User s Guide On line Documentation Microsoft Windows 95 documentation Features and Specifications Optional Accessories and Devices Electronic bookmark that records what you re doing when you turn the computer off and returns you to the same place when you turn the power back on Determines the system s power needs and auto matically configures the computer for maximum power savings Instant and power on passwords help protect your files Explains how to set up the computer gives instruc tions for basic computing tasks and documents all system components and features Provides the Satellite Pro 430 Series User s Guide in hypertext form Load this guide into memory and refer to it when you have questions about the computer Documents the Windows 95 operating system Optional Accessories and Devices This section lists the options available for the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer Part III Appendixes Features and Specifications 4 4 3 Optional Accessories and Devices Power Devices Battery charger Charges extra battery packs Additional battery Use as spare or replacement packs to extend the packs time you can operate the computer away from a live wall outlet Memory Cards 8MB Expands t
275. on The pel size determines the clarity of the image called screen resolution Larger individual pels reduce the total number of avail able pels resulting in lower resolution Smaller pels increase the number of pels that can fit on the screen resulting in higher resolu tion and a clearer image Displaying Colors The pel size also determines how many colors the display can pro duce By combining pixels of different colors within a pel the dis play can produce many more colors than are available within a single pixel Therefore larger individual pels increase the number of colors available to the display Understanding Video Modes Video modes are sets of industry standard rules about resolution and the maximum number of distinct colors that can be displayed simultaneously on the screen Programs that adhere to the rules of a video mode will run on any system that supports that mode Most display adapters provide several video modes The computer s SVGA compatible display adapter supports all VGA modes and some SVGA modes The video mode required by a program depends on K Ww Whether the program displays graphics or text K2 Ww The resolution required for the text or graphics K Ww The number of colors used fo The font size in pixels of the text Based on these requirements computers recognize two categories of video modes graphics modes and text modes In a graphics mode programs can turn o
276. ontrol Panel 3 Double click the Toshiba System icon eta The Toshiba System Control Panel opens with the Start Up Options tab on top 4 Click the Miscellaneous tab Start Up Options Poweron Timer Security Miscellaneous Wamings Warning Volume y Ot Low Medium High a j Z Enable audible waming for emergency battery condition BS Enable audible waming when panel closes Enable Accupoint only if PS 2 mouse Enable both Accupoint and PS 2 mouse si Version Information Pl BIOS Version 5 30 TOSHIBA Cancel poy _Defauts The Miscellaneous tab of the Toshiba System Control Panel Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Using Your Computer on Your Desk 2 3 5 Using the Optional NoteDock 5 In the Pointing Devices section of the tab click the desired option setting Enable AccuPoint only if PS 2 mouse is not connected at power on time checks for a PS 2 mouse If one is con nected the mouse becomes active and the AccuPoint is dis abled If no PS 2 mouse is connected the AccuPoint is active Enable both AccuPoint and PS 2 mouse simultaneously lets you use both the AccuPoint and the PS 2 mouse 6 Click OK The Toshiba System Control Panel displays the Toshiba Sys tem Settings Change dialog box prompting you to restart the computer 7 Click Yes or No Yes restarts
277. ore likely you are to encounter one or more of the following problems Don t panic You can resolve them relatively easily Your program stops responding If you are working with a program that suddenly freezes all opera tions chances are the program has stopped responding Don t worry You can exit the failed program without shutting down Windows 95 or closing other programs To close a program that has stopped responding follow these steps 1 Press Ctrl Alt Del once Windows 95 displays the Close Program dialog box The box lists all the programs and processes currently in operation If a program has stopped responding the words not responding appear beside its name in the list 2 Select the program you want to close then click End Task Closing the failed program should allow you to continue work ing If it does not continue with step 3 3 Close the remaining programs by clicking End Task 4 Click Shut Down Windows 95 displays the Shut Down Windows dialog box 5 Select Restart then click Yes Your computer shuts down and restarts Windows 95 thus restoring operations Typing Ctrl Alt Del twice to restart your computer is not recommended By closing all open programs prior to shutting down Windows 95 you ensure that all data is saved CAUTION Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong Problems that are Easy to Fix 305 Your program performs an illegal operation If yo
278. ormation about the component you clicked Opens the Toshiba Access Panel Properties dialog box refer to The Toshiba Access Panel Proper ties Dialog Box on page 374 The Gauge Gallery Button The Configuration Slider Bar The Toshiba Access Panel 355 The configuration slider bar This bar displays buttons for the available configurations in this case home office and travel To change the current configura tion click the desired configuration button The slider bar retracts after you make a selection The Gauge Gallery Button each Clicking the gauge gallery button opens the Gauge Gallery which displays the available TAP gauges and provides a description of Gauge Gallery Add a gauge to the Toshiba Access Panel by dragging it onto the dashboard Hard Disk Gauge The hard disk space usage can be displayed in a LED or bargraph format Not Found is displayed if a drive being monitored is no longer available aaj Memory Gauge The GDI System and User Resources can be displayed in a LED or bargraph format The amount of available resource will always be shown whether the display is in LED or bargraph format Percent Remaining Gauge aa The percent remaining on the battery charge can be displayed in an LED or bargraph format UNKNOWN is displayed if the battery charge has no yet been determined Power Meter Gauge The power usage of the machine can be di
279. ose all programs 5 Once you have closed all other programs click Next to continue Windows 95 scans your system for new hardware If Windows 95 finds your external modem skip to step10 If Windows 95 doesn t detect your external modem click Next to manually install the modem Windows 95 then displays a list of hardware types 6 Select Modem and click Next The Install New Modem menu opens 7 Tomanually install your modem select Don t detect my modem I will select it from a list and then click Next Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 206 pea to the World 8 Select the manufacturer and model number of your modem If your modem manufacturer supplied a Windows 95 installation disk click Have Disk then click OK Otherwise click Next to use the Windows 95 modem drivers 9 Select the port the modem is connected to typically COM2 then click Next Windows 95 asks you to enter the dialing information it needs to complete outgoing calls For example country code area code and any prefix necessary to reach an outside line 10 Enter the dialing information and click Finish Determining the COM Port Your modem is connected to one of the computer s COM com munications ports Although the terms are often used interchangeably the serial port and COM port are really two different things The serial Vj port is the ph ysical port on the left side of the computer The COM port is a unique identifier the computer
280. ou could go back to the page you read five minutes ago but you don t remember where you were follow these steps 1 Click History The program displays a list of all the topics you ve viewed in the current session Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 46 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Using the Electronic Guide j Satellite Pro 430 Series Electronic User s Guide e Contents Index Find Go Back Hist Hel TOSHIBA A ee Bookmark Copy Print Preferences Exit Click on a topic below and then click this box to go there Remove a Topic Clear the History List Chi Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 4 Introduction Where Do Get My Questions Answered Contents at a Glance iy Notices FIN Tite Page S Notices YE Contents at a Glance Where Do Get My Questions Answered Contents at a Glance Notices Title Page A history list 2 Click the topic s title 3 Click the top box and you re back where you were before You can delete topics from this list or clear the list entirely by clicking the appropriate boxes Getting Help The electronic guide comes with its own help text If you are not sure about a feature click Help Help is context sensitive If you keep the Help window open the Help text changes to describe the feature at which your pointer is currently pointing Using Material from the Book Although this book is copyrighted you may select text and copy it to the cli
281. ou to enter a new password 8 Type a password of one to 16 characters and press Enter You may use any combination of letters and numbers in your password 9 When TSETUP prompts you to do so verify the password by typing it again and pressing Enter If the two passwords match TSETUP displays Registered If the two passwords don t match TSETUP displays an error message Repeat steps 8 and 9 to enter the password again 10 Press End to save your change and close TSETUP 11 Press Y to confirm you want to quit word service diskette Make sure the diskette you use does j The computer overwrites all existing information on the pass not contain any important information CAUTION TSETUP asks you to enter the type of diskette you re using 12 Press 2 if you re using a 1 44MB diskette or press 1 if you re using a 720KB diskette TSETUP creates the password service diskette and displays a message when it s finished 13 Remove the diskette and press any key to continue TSETUP closes returning you to the system prompt The next time you start the computer your password will be in effect Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Keeping Your Files Safe 2 5 1 Using a Password 14 Place your password service diskette in a safe place away from the computer Do not use your password service diskette for any other pur pose If you try to access the diskette you ll receive an error message and will have to reset y
282. our password and create a CAUTION i i new password service diskette Power On Password Whenever you start or resume your computer with a power on password in effect the computer prompts you to enter the pass word before it goes through its normal start up procedure The power on password operates whether or not the computer is operating in Resume Mode When your computer prompts you to enter your password type it in and press Enter If you enter the password correctly the com puter continues with its normal start up procedure If you enter an incorrect password the computer beeps After three incorrect attempts the beep sounds repeatedly and turns off automatically If you ve forgotten your password and you have a password ser vice diskette follow these steps 1 If your diskette drive is not installed in the SelectBay connect the external diskette drive or swap drives in the SelectBay To swap drives see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 2 Turn the computer on with Resume Mode turned off The system prompts you for your password 3 Insert the write enabled password service diskette into the diskette drive and press Enter Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 20 Keeping Your Files Safe Using a Password The system prompts you Set Password Again Y N The password service diskette is not reusable Once you use it you must create a new diskette even if you set the same passwo
283. ove All 11 Click OK to save your key assignment and exit the dialog box The custom folder containing the files you selected is now associated with the Fn key combination To open the custom folder press Fn plus the appropriate key from within Windows Using Drag and Drop You can also assign a key combination to a program or file by dragging the icon for the program or file from the Windows Explorer and dropping it onto one of the keys on the Fn esse key board To use the drag and drop method to assign tasks to keys follow these steps 1 2 Open both Fn esse and the Windows Explorer Resize the Explorer window so you can see both the Fn esse keyboard and the Explorer at the same time If you re unsure how to do this refer to Lesson 6 Resizing and Reshaping Windows on page 61 In the Explorer window highlight the program or docu ment file to which you wish to assign a key Drag the highlighted item from the Explorer to the key on the Fn esse keyboard to which you wish to assign it Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box completely filled in to reflect the selected program or document Click OK to close the Assignment dialog box with your key assignment in effect The program or document is now associated with the key you just selected To open the program or document press Fn plus the appropriate key from within any Windows program Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 8 Making Life Easier S
284. ows 95 on your hard disk To fix the problem run Windows 95 Setup by following these steps 1 Insert a start up diskette into the diskette drive A start up diskette is one containing the files needed to start the computer and load Windows 95 You created a start up diskette when you ran the Microsoft Create System Disks program 2 Restart your computer and press F10 when the system starts Pressing F10 changes the Boot Priority option setting in TSETUP This command instructs the computer to start from the diskette drive The message Starting Windows 95 displays followed by the MS DOS prompt a gt 3 Remove the start up diskette from the diskette drive and insert Windows 95 disk 1 4 Type setup then press Enter If your hard disk is intact Setup installs Windows 95 again with out removing information you have saved on the hard disk Follow the messages that appear on your screen If you receive another error message contact Toshiba technical support See If You Need Further Assistance on page 338 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong Windows 95 Isn t Working 309 The computer is not accessing the hard disk or the diskette drive If the Start Up Sequence in the Toshiba System Control Panel is set to Hard disk first then floppy disk or the Boot Priority option in TSETUP is set to HDD gt FDD and you have a hard disk problem you won t be able to start the computer Insert
285. pboard for use in your own projects You may also print individual topics or selected text Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 47 Using the Electronic Guide Copying a Selection To copy a selection follow these steps 1 Click Copy The book displays the Copy dialog box TOSH 1B A Contents Index Find Go Back History Help Print Exit Bookmark Copy Preferences Copy the selection to the clipboard Make a selection with the cursor then click the Copy command above By installing extra memory now you ll be able to operate your computer at its S maximum capacity from the start Of course you can always come back to this section if you decide to add memory at a later time Sizes of Memory Modules y to install Memory modules available from your Install the Memory Module The memory module installs into the memory expansion slot on the bottom of the computer You ll need a Phillips screwdriver to install the memory module Selected text ready to copy 2 Select the text to copy 3 Click Copy the selection to the clipboard You can insert this text into another document Printing a Selection or Topic Follow these steps to print 1 Click Print 2 Select the text you wish to print Do not select any text if you wish to print the entire topic 3 Click Print a Selection to print the text you selected Click Print the Current Topic
286. per follow these steps 1 Move the pointer to an empty area of the desktop and click the secondary button Windows 95 displays the desktop shortcut menu Click Properties Windows 95 displays the Display Properties dialog box Background Screen Saver Appearance Plus Settings Y a Edit Pattern Ok Cancel Apply The Display Properties dialog box Click the Background tab to bring it to the front Scroll through the wallpaper pattern by clicking a name in the list box Windows 95 displays a sample of the wallpaper selection in the monitor above the list box Try several patterns To apply a pattern to your desktop click Apply After you ve chosen a wallpaper pattern and applied it to your desktop click OK Windows 95 returns you to the desktop with the new wallpa per displayed You can view any object s properties by clicking it with the sec ondary button and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu that appears Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 67 Lesson 10 Setting the Date and Time Lesson 10 Setting the Date and Time You set the computer s date and time properties when you turned the computer on the first time and set up Windows 95 To change the date and time settings now follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 displays th
287. port IDSETUP Monitor port Parallel port The rear of the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator nd Use the headphone jack to connect stereo headphones or exter nally powered speakers Py __ Use the audio line in jack to play and record stereo sound from an external audio device such as a stereo system D Use the audio line out jack to connect your computer to a tape recorder or a stereo amplifier to record or play sounds from your computer f Use the serial port to connect a serial device such as a serial printer modem or mouse This port replaces the computer s serial port The MIDI Joystick port lets you connect a joystick or a MIDI device such as a synthesizer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Using Your Computer on Your Desk 2 37 Using the Optional NoteDock Use the PS 2 mouse port to connect a PS 2 compatible pointing device With the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator you can use both a PS 2 compatible pointing device and a PS 2 keyboard at the same time Use the PS 2 keyboard port to connect a PS 2 keyboard This port replaces the computer s PS 2 keyboard port With the Note Dock Enhanced Port Replicator you can use both a PS 2 keyboard and a PS 2 compatible pointing device at the same time The ID SETUP rotary switch lets you set the ID number of the NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator Use the monitor port to connect an external monitor This port replaces the computer s monitor
288. programs work with Windows 95 s Suspend command and Toshiba s Resume Mode When you turn the com puter back on after suspending you may lose access to your net work drives and programs If this happens press the reset button to restart your computer Swapping Drives in the SelectBay This section provides instructions for changing drives in the com puter s SelectBay To use the CD ROM drive you ll have to install it in the com puter s SelectBay The external diskette drive case only works with the diskette drive module UN Make sure the power is off before you swap a drive module sroP into or out of the SelectBay Removing or inserting a drive gt A module while the computer is on may damage the computer the drive module or both Remove the Diskette Drive from the External Diskette Drive Case If you re installing the diskette drive into the SelectBay the first step is to remove the diskette drive module from the external dis kette drive case If the diskette drive module is currently in the SelectBay the exter nal diskette drive case is empty Proceed to the next section Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 1 2 Learning the Basics Swapping Drives in the SelectBay Follow these steps Drive eject button Releasing the drive in the external diskette drive case 1 With one hand press and hold the drive lock 2 With the other hand firmly press the drive eject button The diskette drive mo
289. quiring the secondary button specifically mention that button For example click the secondary button Windows 95 opens the desktop shortcut menu Anangelcons gt Line up Icons tout Undo Rename New Properties The desktop shortcut menu 7 Click an empty area to close the shortcut menu Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 5 5 Lesson 2 Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device 8 Move the pointer to the My Computer icon and click the primary button twice rapidly This process is known as double clicking The My Computer window opens PEPA SSSA TISSA TISSA TISSA TI mea a C A OS EA TOEA Toz Sin EVA 1G ES TISSA TOSHSA TOSHIBAT to D a 8 TIEA SHIRA TOSHA Bap D E PATOSA TOSHA TOSE BATOSHBA TJS TYS we HBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOS 7A sre YEW OS Fieve TOS rear BAT Oo HEA SOs Sir 2 10s THIERA T i E E EJA T9 Sjn WO SHBA Srey TOSTISA Bir OS IVA OS ave TOE SMIB TO Sr oo fe TOSHA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOS rE Os SMIE zA OS TIBA nes HIB TO SrA yo MBA TIYSA TYS rA Tee HA OSPEL TOSHIBA TOSA TOSHIBA TOS FIBA TOS OSHA TOE SHZ A TOE HBA TOSHI TOS AB il ge SHIBA JA JEMEN JAJE O s SHIBA j we SHB AStart E My Computer Bd 1 53AM The desktop with the My Computer window open 9 Click the taskbar at the bottom of the screen and while holdin
290. r K2 Ww Your knees should be slightly higher than your hips If neces sary use a foot rest to raise the level of your knees and ease the pressure on the back of your thighs K Ww Adjust the back of your chair so it supports the lower curve of your spine If necessary use a cushion to provide extra back support Lower back support cushions are available at many office supply stores K Ww Sit with your back straight so that your knees hips and elbows form approximately 90 degree angles when you work Do not slump forward or lean back too far Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Finding Your Way around the System 5 Selecta Place To Work Lighting Proper lighting can improve the legibility of the display and reduce eye strain Position the display panel so that sunlight or bright indoor lighting does not reflect off the screen Use tinted windows or shades to reduce glare 1 Ww Avoid placing your computer in front of a bright light that could shine directly in your eyes 1 Ww If possible use soft indirect lighting in your computer work area Arms and Wrists Avoid bending arching or angling your wrists Keep them ina relaxed neutral position while typing Exercise your hands wrists and arms to improve circulation Work Habits The key to avoiding discomfort or injury from repetitive strain is to vary your activities If possible schedule a variety of tasks into your work day
291. r Using Your Computer on Your Desk 2 29 Using an External Monitor Directing the Display When You Turn the Computer On When you turn the computer on it sends information to the exter nal monitor To send information to the built in display as well you ll need to change the Power On Display setting in TSETUP or use the display hotkey Fn F5 The Power On Display option in TSETUP has two settings KR K Kod Internal External sends the display to the external monitor If no external monitor is attached it sends information to the computer s built in display This is the default Simultaneous sends display output to both the external monitor and the built in display This is especially useful if you re mak ing a presentation and wish to guide the discussion from your notebook computer Simultaneous mode won t work if your external monitor can t display resolutions of 800 x 600 or higher This section explains how to change this option using the hotkey Fn F5 To change this option using TSETUP see TSETUP on page 403 To set this option using the hotkey follow these steps 1 2 3 Press Fn F5 Still holding Fn press F5 repeatedly until the setting you want takes effect This hotkey cycles through the settings in the following order built in display only external monitor only and simultaneous display Release the Fn key Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 30 Using Your Co
292. r refer to Looking After Your Battery on page 156 and Conserving Power on page 150 The Keyboard If when you type strange things happen or nothing happens the problem may or may not be related to the keyboard itself The keyboard produces unexpected characters A keypad overlay may be on If the numeric keypad or cursor con trol light is on press Fn F10 to turn off the cursor control light or Fn F11 to turn off the numeric keypad light If the problem occurs when both the keypad overlays are off make sure the software you are using it not remapping the keyboard Refer to the software s documentation and check that the program does not assign different meanings to any of the keys Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 32 4 If Something Goes Wrong Fixing Device Related Problems You ve connected an external keyboard and Windows 95 displays one or more keyboard error messages If you have a second keyboard try it If it works the first keyboard may be defective or incompatible with your computer Nothing happens when you press the keys on the external keyboard You may have plugged the external PS 2 keyboard in while the computer was turned on Using the AccuPoint click Start then click Shut Down When Windows 95 displays the Shut Down Windows dialog box select Restart the computer and click Yes The computer will restart and recognize the device Make sure the PS 2 keyboard is plugged into the PS
293. r Computer 26 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Fill In Your Registration Card and Mail It Opening the display 2 Push on the latch and lift the display panel 3 Adjust the display panel to a comfortable viewing angle To avoid damaging the display panel do not force the panel beyond the point where it moves easily and never lift the computer by the display pane CAUTION Fill In Your Registration Card and Mail It Take a few minutes now to fill in and mail your product registra tion card The card was on the keyboard of your computer when you first opened the display panel Sending in your product regis tration card lets Toshiba keep you up to date with information about new products and upgrades Registering your computer also extends your Toshiba warranty world wide at no charge to you See the registration card and war ranty information for details about the warranty options available from Toshiba Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 27 Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device The computer s AccuPoint pointing device enables you to move the cursor and to select items on the screen If you re familiar with desktop computers you may have used a mouse or trackball for this purpose The AccuPoint provides all the functionality of a mouse or trackball without your hands ever leaving the keyboard If you would rather use a mouse
294. r as shown by the white legend printed on the left front of the key instead of the letter printed on the top of the key For more information see The Cursor Control Overlay on page 282 The numeric mode light glows when the numeric overlay is on When the overlay is on pressing an overlay key displays the white number printed on the right front of the key instead of the letter printed on the top of the key For more information see Typing Numbers on page 89 The disk light glows when a drive hard disk diskette drive or CD ROM drive is currently in use CAUTION Do not turn the computer off if this light is on Doing so may damage the computer the drive or both Part I Getting To Know Your Computer el Finding Your Way around the System 1 3 Find Out Where Everything s Located The battery light indicates the status of the battery charge For more information see Monitoring Battery Power on page 138 The AC power light glows when the computer is connected to an external power source For more information see Connect to a Power Source on page 15 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 2 Connect to a Power SOUICEs y 4 4 04 i5 oe baew awh wien eauaylenn es 15 Adding Memory Optional 0 cece eee eee eeeee 16 Connect the External Diskette Drive 21 Connecting a Parallel Printer 2 44 osuiccexe edads toed geese 24 Openithe Display sdcieny iriri ne
295. r computer comes with Microsoft s Windows 95 backup pro gram pre installed on the hard disk Other backup programs are available at many computer stores This section explains how to use the Windows 95 backup program to back up all the files on your hard disk Complete information on the backup program is in on line Help and your Windows 95 documentation Backing up all the files on your hard disk takes a considerable amount of time and lots of diskettes You may prefer to pur chase a high capacity backup system such as an external tape drive Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 1 0 5 How to Back Up Your Work To back up your files follow these steps 1 Attach the backup drive gt If you re backing up your hard disk to diskettes connect the external diskette drive or install the diskette drive mod ule in the SelectBay If you re backing up your hard disk to a tape drive or other external device connect the drive to the computer follow ing the instructions provided with the drive Click Start then point to Programs Point to Accessories then point to System Tools Click Backup Windows 95 opens the Backup window What to back up Select files to back up Myc Sie type i Modified iy Computer My Computer H E 3 Floppy A C TT File set Untitled Files selected 0 D Kilobytes selected
296. r when you re not using a wall outlet For information about replacing the battery see Changing Batteries on page 147 fe The memory slot cover protects a slot for adding extra memory to your computer For more information see Adding Memory Optional on page 16 The bay release lets you remove the drive in the SelectBay For more information about switching drives in the SelectBay see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 The bay release lock prevents accidental removal of the drive in the SelectBay The NoteDock guides help align the optional NoteDock Enhanced Port Replicator For more information see Using the Optional NoteDock on page 235 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Finding Your Way around the System 1 1 Find Out Where Everything s Located The Front with the Display Open Display hinges Screen Microphone Indicator panel AccuPoint Keyboard AccuPoint buttons The front with the display open The computer s screen is a liquid crystal display LCD that provides clear sharp images The display hinges attach the display panel to the computer The built in microphone lets you record sounds The 82 key keyboard provides all the functionality of a full sized 101 key keyboard For more information see How to Use the Keyboard on page 88 The AccuPoint pointing device combines the function of a mo
297. r written message to a newsgroup to be read later in a chat session you type your message and other people in the chat session can respond immediately Gopher sites provide lists of what is available elsewhere on the Internet Searching a gopher site is a good way to look for spe cific information Telnet sites let you log on to a computer somewhere else in the world and use its resources as if it were on your own local network Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 1 Connecting to the World The Internet and Other Fascinating Places Understanding Internet Addresses Every Internet user has an e mail address A sample e mail address is user host subdomain domain where user host subdomain domain is the name you select when you first sub scribe to your on line service or Internet service provider See What Software Do You Need on page 212 for information about Internet service providers is the server on which your e mail is located is a local network or computer within the Internet service provider s system Many addresses do not include a subdomain domain indicates the type of host In the United States there are six domains com for commercial hosts gov for hosts in government institutions edu for educational institutions mil for military organizations net for network and service companies org for other organizations Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting to the
298. rams Faster with Fn esse on page 270 Typing Numbers The keys with white numbers on the right front make up the numeric overlay This overlay lets you type numeric data as you would using a ten key numeric keypad The following illustration highlights the keys in the numeric overlay Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 9 0 Learning the Basics How to Save Your Work The numeric overlay To turn the numeric overlay on and off press Fn F11 The numeric lock light on the indicator panel shows whether the numeric overlay is on or off You can still use the overlaid keys to type alphabetic characters while the numeric overlay is on To do so gt For lower case letters hold Fn down while you press the keys For upper case letters hold Fn Shift down while you press the keys To use the cursor control overlay keys when the numeric overlay is on press and hold Shift while you use the overlay keys To return to the numeric overlay release Fn The cursor control overlay is dis cussed in The Cursor Control Overlay on page 282 How to Save Your Work Before you turn the computer off and take a well deserved break save your work to the hard disk or a diskette This is one of the most important rules of computing Save your data even when you re using Resume Mode or the Suspend command in case the backup battery discharges before you return to work Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Lea
299. rd 4 Toenter TSETUP and reset your password press Y Follow the instructions in Protecting Against Forgetfulness on page 248 to reset your password To remove your password press N It will no longer be registered Instant Password An instant password secures your system with a single keystroke Use this feature when you need to leave your desk for a few min utes and don t want to turn the computer off To use an instant password press Fn F1 Pressing this hotkey freezes the keyboard and AccuPoint and blanks the screen An instant password has no effect on an optional serial mouse or trackball If you have not registered a password press Enter to unlock your system If you have registered a password follow these steps to unlock your system 1 Press Enter 2 Enter your password and press Enter If you enter the password correctly the computer returns to where it was when you pressed the hotkey Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Keeping Your Files Safe Using a Password 2 5 3 Disabling a Password Toshiba System To disable your password follow these steps Click Start then point to Settings Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel Double click the Toshiba System icon The Toshiba System Control Panel opens Click the Security tab In the System Password section of the tab click Remove The Toshiba System Control Panel displays the Verify Pass word dialog box
300. rd disk and solid state memory drives Memory SCSI adapters Global Positioning System GPS receivers Zoomed Video ZV PC Cards Some PC Cards combine the functions of several different cards One popular example is a PC Card that combines a fax modem Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Little Cards that Do Big Things 1 9 1 Cards You Can Buy From Toshiba with a network adapter These are handy if you want to get the most out of your PC Card slots PC Card technology has changed considerably over the last few years and it s important that your card is current with the times Check the package to make sure the PC Card you buy conforms to the PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association 2 1 standard or later Cards not conforming to this standard may work with your computer but are likely to be much more difficult to set up and use CAUTION Cards You Can Buy From Toshiba Toshiba s Noteworthy PC Cards are specifically designed to work with your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer and are available from your Toshiba dealer Noteworthy PC Cards include Fax Modems Removable hard disk drives Token ring network adapters Ethernet network adapters SCSI adapters Global Positioning Systems GPS Zoomed Video ZV PC Cards Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 192 Little Cards that Do Big Things Programs that Make Your PC Card Work Programs that Make Your PC Car
301. re damaged or corrupted Refer to your software documentation for file recovery proce dures Many software packages automatically create backup files You may also be able to recover lost data using utility software which is available from your dealer Some programs run correctly but others do not This is probably a configuration problem If a program doesn t run properly refer to its documentation and check that the hardware configuration meets its needs A diskette won t go into the diskette drive You may already have a diskette in the drive Make sure the drive is empty You may be inserting the diskette improperly Hold the label of the diskette with the hub side facing down and insert it so the metal head window cover goes into the drive first The metal cover or loose labels may be obstructing the path into the drive Carefully inspect the diskette If the metal cover is loose replace the diskette If the label is loose replace the label and try inserting the diskette again Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 32 8 If Something Goes Wrong Fixing Device Related Problems The computer displays the Non system disk or disk error message If you re starting the computer from the hard disk make sure there s no diskette in the diskette drive If you re starting the computer from a diskette the diskette in the drive doesn t have the files necessary to start the computer Replace it with a bootable diske
302. rease the pressure on the AccuPoint 3 Practice moving around the screen Experiment by moving in different directions and at different speeds 4 Move the pointer to the Start button and click the primary button it s the larger one Windows 95 opens the Start menu Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 54 A A TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHE A TOSHIBA TEH AJ SHIH TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 2 Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device ul See LIISA Dansk ne Jar IIs x TEISA TI mere me OS rE TOE SHIBA Oe SMIBA we Sinllevey WTC eS mS SMEA LOS STIEN p SHE EJA T95 EYA 1 ace yie SME S A Wes BA Oj SEJE Sree aree TOSHA TOS SA g eye ATOS ME EATIS ATOE ZATOZ SSA TISE JEH MBA os SHIBATOS Sule JATTE IBA TOS BATIS ye Ws SHBA ojz SHEA ros IAZA FOSHIBA TO bh POS FWA To SHE 5 JEEE TIS rE HA TOSHIEVA TOS WISA HOS MI ATOS LEA TO SInIEVA TOSA TOSA n reve ols SA ojs STEA ne SBA OS HEA gaa TEn ros HIBA T9 ofja zA Te HIBA 1 TOSE 1 TY SME A o SMEA Sry yo Slee j SSH Soe 1 50AM The desktop with the Start menu open 5 Click an empty area of the desktop to close the Start menu 6 With the pointer in an empty area of the desktop click the DEFINITION secondary button the smaller one Throughout the remainder of this guide the term click refers to clicking the primary button Instructions re
303. rn off this alarm in TSETUP or in the Toshiba System Control Panel In TSETUP this is the Panel Close Alarm option In the Toshiba System Control Panel the option is called Enable audible warning when panel closes See TSETUP on page 403 or The Toshiba System Control Panel on page 395 for more information Caring for Your Computer This section offers easy tips on cleaning and moving your com puter For information about caring for the computer s battery see Looking After Your Battery on page 156 Cleaning the Computer CAUTION Keep liquid including cleaning fluid out of the computer s keyboard speaker grill and other openings Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 1 6 Learning the Basics Caring for Your Computer To keep your computer clean perform the following tasks regularly K Ww Clean the exterior case of the computer with a lightly damp ened cloth To clean the screen wipe it with a slightly damp cloth Ask your Toshiba dealer for suggestions for appropriate clean ing products Moving the Computer Your notebook computer is built to withstand reasonable shock and vibration Before carrying or transporting your computer fol low these steps 1 FN HD nn A W Make sure all disk activity has ended the disk and CD activity lights have stopped glowing
304. rning the Basics 9 1 How to Save Your Work Saving documents is quick and easy so it s a good idea to get in the habit of saving frequently That way if you run into trouble you won t lose many long hours of work Many programs offer a feature that saves documents at regular intervals such as every fifteen minutes Check your programs documentation to see whether they have an automatic save feature This section describes the procedure for saving files in Windows programs If you re using an MS DOS program refer to your pro gram documentation for instructions on saving files To save a file follow these steps 1 On the File menu of your Windows program click Save If you re working with a document that already has a file name that s all there is to it If you ve created a new document your program displays a Save As dialog box Save in E Windows E Claris Int LJ Recent Command LA Intelvid LA Sendto Config E Lotusapp E Shelinew Curs LI Media LA Spool Fonts L Options LA Start Menu Help AP LA Startm t gt Cancel A sample Save As dialog box Use this dialog box to specify where to store the document and to give it a file name Click the drive and folder in which you want your file to be stored Type a file name and click OK Windows 95 supports file names of up to 255 characters and
305. rom the memory slot Inserting the memory module 10 Carefully place the module in the slot Line up the connector on the module directly above the connector in the computer 11 Gently press the module down into place 12 Secure the module in place with the two screws you removed in step 9 13 Replace the memory slot cover Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 0 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Adding Memory Optional 14 Replace the screws you removed in step 7 and tighten them 15 Turn the computer over When you turn your computer on it recognizes the additional memory automatically Removing a Memory Module If you ever need to remove the memory module 1 Follow steps 1 through 9 in the previous section to open the memory slot and remove the screws that secure the card Removing the memory module 2 Lift up the memory card tab to remove the card If your memory card doesn t have a tab lift straight up on the edge of the card closest to the back of the computer 3 Replace the screws that held the card in place 4 Follow steps 12 through 14 in the previous section to close and secure the memory slot Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 2 1 Connect the External Diskette Drive Connect the External Diskette Drive The computer s 3 1 2 inch diskette drive is useful for installing software on the hard disk exchanging information with other systems and maki
306. roperties dialog box which lets you change the name and icon for the configuration To remove an existing configuration click its button then click Remove To create a new configuration click one of the unused con figuration buttons then click Enable The panel displays the Enable Configuration dialog box which lets you select a name and icon for the new configura tion It also prompts you to select the existing configuration on which to base the new configuration To reorder a button on the slider bar select the button and click Move Right or Move Left Part I Getting To Know Your Computer DEFINITION Making Life Easier 26 1 Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Creating Your Own Button Icon The button icons used to identify the configuration are small bit map drawings 45 x 42 pixels To assign a unique icon to one of the configuration buttons locate a piece of clip art you like or cre ate an icon using a drawing program An icon is a small drawing that represents a task function or feature A pixel is the smallest element on the screen Some screens contain a total of 640 x 480 pixels Others contain 800 x 600 pixels All information displayed consists of combinations of colored or black and white pixels Clip art is the term that refers to computer ready graphics you can buy from a graphics company or over the Internet A bitmap is drawing that consists of tiny dots in this case pixels that when v
307. rrent window to an icon The program in the window is still running it just moved out of the way to make room for other windows Clicking the maximize button expands the current window to take up the entire screen When a program is maximized the maximize button changes to a double arrow called the restore button Click the restore button to return the window to its orig inal size Double clicking a program icon starts the program repre sented by the icon Program groups contain one or more icons representing related programs For example the Toshiba Utilities program group contains Toshiba programs such as MaxTime and Hardware Setup Double clicking a program group icon opens the program group represented by the icon There is no close button in Windows for Workgroups Starting Programs To start a program in Windows for Workgroups double click its icon in Program Manager If the program doesn t have a Program Manager icon you have the following two choices K Kod In Program Manager click File then click Run Type in the name of your program file or click Browse to locate the pro gram file then click OK In File Manager double click the icon for the program file See the next section for information about File Manager Part III Appendixes 46 8 Using Windows for Workgroups Running Programs Described in the Guide Working with Files You use File Manager to copy and move files and to perform
308. rstand configuration parameters and the ram ifications of changing them Disabling a Device in Windows 95 To disable a device follow these steps 1 Click the My Computer icon with the secondary button then click Properties Windows 95 displays the System Properties dialog box Click the Device Manager tab Double click the device type to display the device installed Select the device and click Properties A dialog box displays the device s properties In the Device usage section of the dialog box clear the check box next to the current configuration Click OK Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 3 1 8 If Something Goes Wrong Resolving a Hardware Conflict Checking Device Properties Device Manager provides a way to view the properties of a device Properties include the name of the manufacturer the type of device the drivers installed and the system resources assigned to the device To check a device s properties follow these steps 1 Click the My Computer icon with the secondary button then click Properties Windows 95 displays the System Properties dialog box 2 Click the Device Manager tab 3 To view the device s installed double click the device type 4 To view the properties double click the device Windows 95 displays the Device Properties dialog box which provides various tabs from which to choose Some of the com mon ones are The General tab provides basic information about the
309. ry s remaining capacity and perform its calculations Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 39 Running the Computer on Battery Power Changing the Appearance of the Dashboard The dashboard section of the Toshiba Access Panel You can set up the dashboard to display the remaining battery charge in five different formats 1 Kod 1 Ww K Kod K The Hard Disk Gauge displays the hard disk space usage in LED or bargraph format The Memory Gauge displays the available GDI system or user resources in LED or bargraph format The Percent Remaining Gauge displays the percentage of bat tery charge remaining The Power Meter displays the current power usage mode in LED or needle format The Time Remaining Gauge displays the amount of time remaining before the battery will discharge completely Follow these steps to choose the gauge s you want displayed on the dashboard 1 Click the Gauge Gallery button on the Toshiba Access Panel The Gauge Gallery opens Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 40 Taking Your Computer on the Road Running the Computer on Battery Power Gauge Gallery Add a gauge to the Toshiba Access Panel by dragging it Hard Disk Gauge The hard disk space usage cai displayed in a LED orb Ih for Not displ it ph format layed if a drive nitore displayed if the battery is not preseni
310. s 1 Insert the audio CD from which you wish to record into the computer s CD ROM drive Windows 95 starts the CD Player program automatically Click Start then point to Programs Point to Accessories then point to Multimedia Click Volume Control Windows 95 displays the Volume Control mixer window Click View then click Volume Control The CD Player opens the Volume Control window On the Options menu click Properties In the Properties dialog box click the button next to Recording You can choose from four volume controls Synth K Ww K Ww Line MixOut Mic K Ww K Make sure the box next to MixOut is selected checked Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 73 Recording Sounds as Wave Files 9 Click OK This leaves the mixer open on the desktop with the recording controls displayed 10 In the MixOut section of the window select the check box next to Select There should be a check mark in the check box 11 Click Start then point to Programs 12 Point to Accessories then point to Multimedia 13 Click Sound Recorder Windows 95 opens the Sound Recorder program 14 With the audio CD playing click the record button on the Sound Recorder 15 When you ve finished recording click the stop button on the Sound Recorder Using an External Audio Input Device To record sounds from an external audio device such as a stereo amplifier tape deck
311. s Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 1 09 Connecting to a Network The connection status icon the one that looks like a traffic signal indicates your connection status A red light indicates no connection A yellow light indicates that TranXit is trying to establish a connection A green light indicates that a connection has been established 3 When the connection status icon is green open the Options window on one computer 4 If Auto New Window is selected press Esc to close the Options menu If it is not selected choose Auto New Window 5 Drag the desired file s to the destination drive or directory folder icon TranXit asks you to confirm the operation 6 Click Yes to proceed with the file transfer 7 When you ve finished transferring files close TranXit Connecting to a Network Although your computer is designed to be carried around on your travels there may be times that you want to tap into your com pany s network This section gives tips on how to connect your computer to an existing network Since most of the details in connecting to a network depend upon the network operating system your company uses and the type of cabling or wireless system installed this section gives only a brief overview specific to your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer Talk to your network administrator for assistance in getting up and running on your network Part I Getting To Know Yo
312. s These power saving options control the way in which the com puter is configured By using them you can greatly increase the length of time you can use the computer before you need to recharge the battery Toshiba has combined these options into preset power usage modes Using one of these modes lets you choose between maxi mum power savings and peak system performance You may also set individual power saving options to suit your own needs The following sections describe how to choose a power usage mode and discuss each power saving option Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 5 1 Conserving Power The Easy Way Choosing a Power Usage Mode There are two preset power usage modes Full power provides maximum system performance while using the most power Low power preserves battery charge by reducing overall sys tem performance The following table shows the option settings for both power usage modes The names of these options differ in the MaxTime Control Panel and TSETUP The TSETUP option names are shown in parentheses Power Usage Options Low Power Full Power Processing Speed Low High Sleep Mode CPU Sleep Mode Enabled Enabled Display Auto Off 3 Min Disabled CDS models 30 Min 430CDT Hard Disk Auto Off HDD Auto Off 3 Min 30 Min System Auto Off 30 Min Disabled Display Brightness LCD Brightness Semi Bright Bright Cooling Mode Cooling Method Quiet P
313. s 9 5 Using the CD ROM Drive s Default printer Ready Microsoft Fax Driver re FAX Copies all Number of copies Pages from 1 tof T T pe c HP e Caneel A sample Print dialog box 3 Click OK to print That s all there is to it Depending on your program you may see different messages indicating the status of your print job Using the CD ROM Drive The CD ROM drive is easy to use You insert compact discs into it while the computer is turned on and change compact discs when ever you want to as long as the system is not reading from the disc Once you insert a CD ROM into the drive refer to the documenta tion provided with the compact disc to perform any necessary installation procedures If the diskette drive module is currently installed in the SelectBay remove it and insert the CD ROM drive module following the instructions in Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 96 Learning the Basics Using the CD ROM Drive Inserting a Compact Disc To insert a compact disc into the CD ROM drive follow these steps SS U CD activity light Locating the CD activity light 1 Make sure the CD activity light is off Pressing the CD ROM eject button 2 With the power on locate and press the CD ROM eject button o
314. s a lower processing speed and saves power High sets the computer to its maximum processing speed Sleep Mode CPU Sleep Mode This option temporarily shuts down the computer s central pro cessing unit CPU when it is inactive Pressing a key moving the AccuPoint or a signal from a device returns the processor to its normal operating speed You have two choices eg Enabled turns CPU Sleep Mode on Disabled turns CPU Sleep Mode off Display Auto Off This option saves power by temporarily shutting down the display if you have not used the keyboard or AccuPoint for a selected period of time To turn the display back on press a key or move the AccuPoint You have eight choices Disabled turns the option off lou 1 Min 3 Min 5 Min 10 Min 15 Min 20 Min and 30 Min blank the display if you haven t used the keyboard or Accu Point for the selected amount of time If you re using an external monitor Display Auto Off blanks the monitor after the selected time Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 5 5 Conserving Power Hard Disk Auto Off HDD Auto Off This option saves power by temporarily shutting down the hard disk if it hasn t been accessed for a set period of time The drive turns back on the next time the computer reads from or writes to it You have seven choices log 1 Min 3 Min 5 Min 10 Min 15 Min 20 Min and 30 Min turn the hard disk drive off if the computer hasn t
315. s a removable Lith ium Ion Li Ion battery pack that provides power when you are away from an AC outlet This is the main battery You can recharge it many times If you spend a lot of time traveling and need to work for many hours without an AC power source you may purchase additional battery packs In addition to the main battery the computer has two other batter ies the backup battery and the real time clock RTC battery These are nickel metal hydride NiMH batteries The backup battery provides the power to store information about the system when you suspend the computer using the Windows 95 Suspend command or Toshiba s Resume Mode The backup bat tery maintains this information for up to eight hours after the main battery discharges completely The RTC battery stores your system configuration settings and the current time and date information It maintains this information for up to a month while the computer is turned off If you re really curious about these batteries see What about the Batteries on page 299 Charging the Batteries To charge the main battery while it is in your computer plug the computer into a live wall socket The battery charges whether the computer is on or off It takes two to three hours to charge the bat tery with the computer off or from five to eight hours when the computer is on The battery light glows orange while the battery is being charged Part I Getting To Know Your Comp
316. s fails while loading the start up files K Ww You need to verify all drivers are being loaded to You need to temporarily disable one or more specific driver s fo You need to check for errors in the start up files Windows 95 uses a file called IO SYS which contains all the information needed to start the computer Although your computer does not need the CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT files to start it does process these files to support backward compatibility with some programs and device drivers The same holds true for the SYSTEM INI and WIN INI files Programs and devices that are backward compatible are designed to work with older operating systems and other pro Ws grams For example many features of Windows 95 are back ward compatible with earlier versions of Windows This lets you use older programs in Windows 95 DEFINITION Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 1 3 Windows 95 Isn t Working Most of the information contained in these files is now stored in the Windows 95 Registry However they are still processed during system start up BOOTLOG TXT file contains a record of all the components and drivers loaded during start up and the status of each When you select Step by Step Confirmation you can view all these files one line at a time to help diagnose the source of a problem Command Prompt Only Selecting Command Prompt Only starts the basic operating sys tem with a
317. s group in Program Manager Windows for Workgroups does not include a Suspend command Use Resume Mode instead Windows 95 contains the files your computer needs to com municate with optional PCMCIA compatible PC Cards If you re using Windows for Workgroups use CardWizard with your optional PC Cards You ll also need the CardWizard soft ware to use a ZV PC Card The steps in Changing the Display Mode on page 287 are for Windows 95 To change the display mode in Windows for Workgroups double click the Chips CPL icon in the Control Panel For more information on using Windows for Workgroups refer to Using Windows for Workgroups on page 465 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 3 3 When You Turn the Computer On the First Time Finish the Windows 95 Setup Procedure After the computer restarts it loads Windows 95 which configures your system displays several messages then starts the Add Printer Wizard Set Up Windows 95 to Work With Your Printer If you already have a printer click Next when the system prompts you to set up your printer If you plan to purchase a printer later click Cancel now and see Setting Up Windows 95 to Work with Your Printer on page 92 when you re ready to connect it To set up Windows 95 to work with your printer now follow these steps 1 When Windows 95 opens the Printers dialog box scroll through the lists of manufacturers and print
318. s or symbols The lowercase 1 el and the number 1 are not interchangeable The uppercase O and the number 0 are not interchangeable On a typewriter the shift lock key locks all the keys into their uppercase positions On a computer keyboard pressing the Caps Lock key changes only the alphabet keys to uppercase the number and symbol keys aren t affected Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 89 How to Use the Keyboard The Other Keys In addition to the character keys the computer keyboard contains a number of keys that carry out special computer tasks This section describes these special keys The 12 function keys F1 F2 etc across the top of the keyboard carry out program specific tasks To find out what these keys do in your program refer to the program s documentation K Ww The function of the Ctrl key Control key also varies according to the program you re using K Ww In Windows programs pressing the Alt key lets you open menus K Ww Pressing the Fn key simultaneously with one of the specially marked keys allows you to emulate a 101 key keyboard dis cussed below turn keyboard overlays on and off page 282 and control various system functions Toshiba s powerful Fn esse program lets you assign your own Fn key combination to launch a Windows program or document quickly from anywhere in Windows 95 Instructions for using this program are given in Starting Prog
319. s with the folder information or click Program Folders to choose your folder from the Program Folder Browser Fn esse displays the Program Folder Browser with a list of program folders in the left side of the screen Click the folder to which you want to assign the Fn key combination Fn esse displays the contents of the selected folder on a shaded background indicating the individual programs and folders are unavailable Click OK Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box with the Descrip tion and Target text boxes filled in Click OK to save your key assignment and exit the dialog box The program folder is now associated with the Fn key combi nation To open the program folder press Fn plus the appropri ate key from within Windows Assigning a Key to a Custom Folder To create a custom folder and assign a key combination to the task of opening that custom folder follow these steps 1 2 Open Fn esse Click the desired key in the Fn esse keyboard Fn esse displays a shortcut menu Point to Assign To Fn esse allows you to choose between File Program Folder and Custom Folder Click Custom Folder Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 6 Making Life Easier Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box with the Assign ment Type set to Custom Folder Type a name for your custom folder in the Description field To add programs or files to your custom folder
320. sing up to 15 frames per second in a small window AVI files have the extension AVI 7 A frame is a still picture that when combined with thousands of others makes a motion picture p DEFINITION Full motion video means motion pictures played back at 30 frames per second Interleaving video is the process of displaying every other row of pixels each time the computer refreshes the screen This increases the rate at which the system updates the screen A pixel is the smallest dot on your screen that can be con trolled by software Resolution is the number of pixels on the screen MPEG Files Fifteen frames per second is not adequate for the games and multi media titles the industry wants to produce The Motion Picture Expert Group MPEG has developed compression and decom pression standards that are capable of delivering true full motion video on your computer MPEG files have the extension MPG Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 67 Playing Back Sound Video and Animation Files Full Motion Video on the Satellite Pro 430 Series Computer For best results MPEG requires specialized hardware to bypass the computer s Central Processing Unit CPU and system bus the backbone of the computer to which all internal devices are connected Your computer s PC Card slots are Zoomed Video ZV compati ble ZV PC Cards conform to the new Zoomed Video standard and provide such ser
321. son 12 Exploring the Toshiba Access Panel 70 Lesson 13 If Pm Lost What Do I Do 13 Lesson 14 Turning Your Computer Off 004 TS Getting to Know the Desktop Windows 95 is the computer s operating system providing a means of communication between your computer your programs and you This chapter introduces Windows 95 by taking you through a few basic tasks If you ve never used Windows before the skill and confidence you ll gain will more than offset the small amount of time you will spend going through these lessons If you ve used an earlier version of Windows you ll notice that Windows 95 is very different Windows 95 Help discusses a num ber of the major differences in an easy question and answer for mat Click Start then Help to open Help click the Index tab then type tips and double click for Windows 3 1 users One of the wonderful things about Windows 95 is its flexibility While the steps in this chapter will accomplish the indicated tasks there are often other ways of doing things For example if you ve used earlier versions of Windows many familiar key combina tions will still work If you re curious refer to on line help or your Windows 95 documentation for more information 51 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 1 Exploring the Desktop 52 Lesson 1 Exploring the Desktop The desktop is the launching pad for everything you can do in Win
322. splayed in an LED or needle format The LED format indicates the current Maxtime power usage mode Time Remaining Gauge The time remaining on the battery charge is displayed in hours and minutes EJECTED is displayed if the battery is not present The Gauge Gallery To add a gauge to the TAP simply click it in the Gauge Gallery and drag it to the dashboard section of the Toshiba Access Panel To close the Gauge Gallery click its close button Part II Technical Reference 3 5 The Toshiba Access Panel The Dashboard Tear Off Button The Dashboard Tear Off Button Clicking the dashboard tear off button removes the battery gauges from the Toshiba Access Panel and displays them in another win dow called the Dashboard window I gt The Dashboard Window Options The Dashboard window Clicking the Options menu allows you to choose from the follow ing options Menu Option Result Dashboard Properties Displays the Dashboard Properties dialog box refer to The Dashboard Properties Dialog Box on page 357 Help Contents Opens Dashboard Help About Dashboard Provides some information about Dashboard Exit Closes the Dashboard window and returns the TAP gauges to the dashboard section of the TAP If you click a gauge with the primary AccuPoint button the prop erties dialog box for the gauge opens These dialog boxes are dis cussed in The Hard Disk Properties Dialog Box on page 361
323. splaying at resolutions of 800 x 600 or higher Devices that don t support this resolution will only work in Internal External mode The Disk Drives Problems with the hard disk or with a diskette drive usually show up as an inability to access the disk or as sector errors Sometimes a disk problem may cause one or more files to appear to have gar bage in them Typical disk problems are You are having trouble accessing a disk or one or more files appear to be missing Make sure you re identifying the drive by its correct name A or C Run ScanDisk which analyzes the directories files and File Allo cation Table FAT on the disk and repairs any damage it finds To run ScanDisk follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Programs 2 Point to Accessories then point to System Tools 3 Click ScanDisk Windows 95 opens the ScanDisk window 4 Click the drive you want to test Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 327 Fixing Device Related Problems 5 Select the type of test you want to use A thorough test is more complete but takes much more time than a standard test 6 Click Start ScanDisk tests the disk Your hard disk seems very slow If you ve been using your computer for some time your files may have become fragmented Run Disk Defragmenter To do this click Start point to Programs point to Accessories point to Sys tem Tools then click Disk Defragmenter Your data files a
324. splaying buttons like Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 5 8 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 4 Creating a New Folder this one the taskbar helps you keep track of the programs and files you currently have open To learn more about Notepad click Help or refer to Windows 95 Help For now leave Notepad open and go on to the next lesson Lesson 4 Creating a New Folder Windows 95 stores documents tools and programs in folders It even stores other folders in folders In this lesson you will learn how easy it is to create folders To create a folder in which to store the document you just created follow these steps 1 Move the pointer to an empty area of the desktop and click the secondary button Windows 95 displays the desktop shortcut menu Point to New then click Folder Windows 95 creates a New Folder icon on the desktop with the icon name highlighted Type a name for the folder and press Enter Close the Notepad document you just created by clicking the close button on the right side of the Notepad title bar Windows 95 displays the document as an icon on the desktop Click the document icon and drag it to your new folder The outline of the document icon moves across the desktop Still holding the primary button position the document icon over the folder icon so the folder icon is highlighted then release the primary button The document icon disappears into the folder To see your document
325. ss Enter If you choose an IBM printer when your printer is not an IBM or IBM compatible printer the test output will be unintelligible and may cause the printer to eject multiple blank pages If you re not sure about your printer s compatibility type N for a non IBM compatible printer Part IT Technical Reference nae A Test Sequence The diagnostic test checks the computer s components and printer in a predefined sequence as follows K System test K Ww Memory test K Ww Display test K kod FDD floppy disk drive or diskette drive test HDD hard disk drive test K Ww K Printer test While a test is in progress the program displays IN PROGRESS TSSDSS where T indicates the test number the first SS indicates the subtest number D indicates the drive if tested and the second SS indi cates the hardware status This message may remain on the screen for a moment The following sections describe each subtest System Functions and Memory The system functions and the memory tests run together for approximately five seconds The system functions test doesn t display any messages The memory test displays the following message PROGRESS xxxxxx where xxxxxx is the current memory location being tested The memory test includes conventional and extended memory If either test aborts 1 Write down everything that appears on the screen 2 Press Ctrl Pause to return to the diagnostics me
326. ss referenced material click Go Back to return you to the original topic Using Bookmarks Creating a bookmark allows you to mark a portion of the text that you want to be able to find quickly in the future Creating a New Bookmark To create or define a bookmark follow these steps 1 Position the pointer at the beginning of the text you want to find again 2 Click Bookmark Add a bookmark enter name Entry Up Remove Entry Clear List The bookmark dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 4 5 Using the Electronic Guide Type a name for the bookmark 4 Press Enter or click the X in the upper right corner of the box The program places a bookmark at the bottom of the window Viewing the Topic Marked by a Bookmark To view a marked topic click its bookmark Moving the pointer over the bookmark displays the name you assigned Another way to locate the topic you marked is through the book mark list Follow these steps 1 Click Bookmark 2 Select the bookmark name you wish to find 3 Click the box above the list to go to the topic Deleting a Bookmark To delete a previously defined bookmark follow these steps 1 Enter the name of the bookmark or locate it in the drop down list box 2 Click Remove Entry The program deletes the bookmark Keeping Track of Where You ve Been An electronic book can keep track of what you ve already read If you wish y
327. ssed the low battery alarm threshold and red indicates the charge has passed the critical battery alarm threshold When this option is selected the Time Battery Remaining Gauge flashes when the charge has passed the critical battery alarm threshold Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Applies your changes to the Toshiba Access Panel Part II Technical Reference ene 067 The Splitter This bar separates the dashboard from the application icons You can click and drag this bar to change the sizes of the dashboard and the applications area of the panel The Application Icons ea akakata bta ARA The application area of the Toshiba Access Panel This area provides space for the icons used to start programs To add a program to the application area click and drag the program icon to the application area To rearrange the icons in the application area click and drag the icons to the desired new locations Clicking an application icon with the primary AccuPoint button starts the associated program Clicking an application icon with the secondary AccuPoint button displays a shortcut menu that pro vides six options Menu Option Result Open Starts the application you clicked Remove from All Removes the selected application icon from all configurations Remove from current Removes the selected application icon from the configuration current con
328. ssing the reset button restarts the computer Use this button if all other attempts at restarting the computer have failed The PC Card slot lets you install up to two Type I or Type IL or one Type HI PCMCIA compatible PC Cards For more informa tion see Little Cards that Do Big Things on page 189 The line in jack lets you play and record stereo sound from an external audio device such as a stereo system The 3 5 mm microphone jack lets you connect an external mon aural microphone or other audio input device Connecting a microphone or other device to this jack disables the internal micro phone automatically Pressing the power button turns the computer on and off For more information see Turn the Computer On on page 28 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 8 The Back ma Et m C CAUTION A Finding Your Way around the System Find Out Where Everything s Located NoteDock port CPU Fan Infrared port CULL p _ PS 2 port 2 SVE Eee Monitor port Parallel port Power socket The back The serial infrared port allows cableless communication with a computer printer or other device that has an infrared port For information about using the infrared port see Transferring Files to Another Computer on page 106 The monitor port allows you to connect an external monitor For more information see Using an External Monitor on page 227 The parallel port lets you connect
329. st the diskette drive s type Y and press Enter To bypass the test type N and press Enter The FDD floppy disk drive test tests the diskette drive Make sure you attach the external diskette drive or install it in the SelectBay before running this test The test writes test patterns on any disk in the drive These patterns destroy all information on the disk s Make sure there is no information you want to keep on the disk s you use If you choose the FDD test you must format and write enable the disk before the test Move the write protect tab to cover the square hole The next prompt asks if you want to test the hard disk drive Test the HDD Y N Part II Technical Reference 42 The Diagnostic Test Choosing Test Options 3 To test the hard disk type Y and press Enter Otherwise type N and press Enter The hard disk test overwrites a portion of the information stored on the disk Back up any important files before you test the hard disk CAUTION The following prompt appears Test the printer Y N 4 Type Y to test the printer or N to skip the test and press Enter Before beginning the test make sure the printer is connected to the computer the power is turned on and the printer is on line If you chose to test the printer the prompt displays Compatible with IBM printer Y N 5 To test an IBM or an IBM compatible printer type Y and press Enter To test a non IBM compatible printer type N and pre
330. stem that you can change through Device Manager 3 Double click the type of device you want to modify For example if you want to modify the serial port settings double click Ports Device Manager extends the branch showing all devices of the type you chose 4 Double click the device you want to modify 5 Click the Resources tab to move to the Resources page Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 2 8 5 Different Ways to Turn the Computer On and Off Make the desired changes If you re unused to working with the computer s configuration its a good idea to leave the Use Automatic Settings box checked These settings were set to work together within the system and with most available optional devices Click OK when you ve finished your changes Different Ways to Turn the Computer On and Off Now that you ve mastered turning your computer on by pressing the power button it s time to learn some new tricks This section explains how to 2 K Ww Set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you choose This option is helpful if you are expecting to receive files by modem and want to do the transfer at night when the rates are cheaper You can set the computer to turn on and receive the files while you are asleep This option is called Power on Timer in the Toshiba System Control Panel and Alarm Power On in TSETUP Turn the computer on and off by opening and closing the dis play p
331. stions or need additional information pendix A Beilin Pears oon ag 444 ada E E elena tanks ES 437 Optional Accessories and Devices 0 eee eee 442 Specifications esia Gea zate See ie eRe eras 444 Features and Specifications This appendix lists the features of the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer and summarizes its specifications Built in Features This section lists the Satellite Pro 430 Series features Technology and Processor Microprocessor 120MHz 3 3 volt 2 9 volt Intel Pentium with Volt age Reduction Technology VRT 16KB write back internal cache LSI and CMOS Large scale integrated and complementary metal oxide semiconductor technology providing mini mum size and weight low power usage and high reliability Memory 3 3 volt 16 megabit EDO DRAM delivers high performance with a 60 nanosecond ns access time hyperpage mode 64 bit data bus width 437 4 3 8 Features and Specifications Built in Features Video Graphics Controller ECP Power Computer Main Battery Backup Battery RTC battery Intelligent power supply Automatic power off features Part III Appendixes Chips amp Technologies F65550 SVGA graphics controller with a 32 bit VESA local bus supports BiTBLT accelerator supports high resolution high color video modes listed in Appendix D Video Modes on page 457 2MB VRAM using 3 3 volt 60 nanosecond DRAM memory The parallel port is an IEEE 1284
332. system first on the hard disk HDD or the diskette drive FDD when you turn the computer on N The following battery save options appear in a drop down list box when you highlight Battery Save Mode You can only change the settings in this box if the Battery Save Mode is set to User Settings Processing Speed High default Low Sets the speed at which the Central Processing Unit CPU pro cesses information High runs at 120MHz Low adds pauses effectively reducing processing speed to approximately SOMHz N CPU Sleep Mode Enabled Low and Full Power default Disabled When enabled temporarily shuts down the processor when there are no processing requests such as keyboard input or pointing device movement For more information see Sleep Mode CPU Sleep Mode on page 154 N Part IT Technical Reference 416 Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings TSETUP OTHERS Display Auto Off 01 Min 03 Min Low Power default 05 Min 10 Min 15 Min 20 Min 30 Min Full Power default on CDT Disabled Full Power default on CDSd Turns the display off if it is not used for the time set For more information see Display Auto Off on page 154 N HDD Auto Off 01 Min 03 Min Low Power default 05 Min 10 Min 15 Min 20 Min 30 Min Full Power default Turns the hard disk drive off if it is not used for the
333. t Power Usage Mode Full Power Power Usage Details Low High 3 ard Disk Auto TEET ro Power Settings p Power Usage Processing Speed Sleep Mode Display Brightness Cooling Mode TOSHIBA Cancel po Help The Power Settings tab of the MaxTime Control Panel 4 Choose the power source for which you want to set power saving options To set the power saving options the system uses when it s running on battery power click Battery To set the power saving options the system uses when it s running on AC power click External 5 Click the desired Power Usage Mode setting in the Power Usage Mode list box 6 Click OK to save your settings and exit the MaxTime Con trol Panel Setting Your Own Power Usage Options If you set the power usage mode to Custom Settings you can set your computer s power saving options individually For example if you want the computer s processing speed set to its maximum level but want to take advantage of all the other power saving fea tures this is the way to do it This section describes each of the power saving options Settings that save power are indicated with an Energy Star logo Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 154 Taking Your Computer on the Road Conserving Power Processing Speed This option sets the speed at which the computer processes information You have two choices lo Low set
334. t Special Effect settings to each configuration Schemes Displays the current scheme for how the TAP dis plays To change the scheme select a new scheme from the drop down list box OK Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Cancel Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Apply Applies your changes to the TAP Part II Technical Reference The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button 3 7 The Gauge Icon Size Dialog Box 21x ice Use large dashboard gauges 11 Use large application icons TeGNIBA The Gauge Icon Size dialog box This dialog box lets you assign different gauge icon sizes to each TAP configuration The options are the same as the Toshiba Access Panel Properties dialog box refer to The Toshiba Access Panel Properties Dialog Box on page 374 The Special Effects Dialog Box The Special Effects dialog box This dialog box lets you assign different special effects to each TAP configuration The options are the same as the Toshiba Access Panel Properties dialog box refer to The Toshiba Access Panel Properties Dialog Box on page 374 Part IT Technical Reference 3 7 The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button The TAP Windows Styles Dialog Box Toshiba Advanced Dialog Interface cet Sa _ The TAP Windows Styles dialog box This dialog box allows you to select ho
335. t actual digital sounds For this reason the size of a MIDI file is much smaller than a WAV file You can connect an external MIDI device such as a keyboard with a built in synthesizer or you can play MIDI files using the com puter s internal synthesizer To learn more about the system s MIDI capabilities look up MIDI in the Windows 95 Help index MIDI files have the extension MID Video and Animation Files Full motion video includes both traditional film and animation A video plays back on your VCR at 30 frames per second To play back the same video on your computer would require 9 megabytes of data per second at 640 x 480 resolution Since playing back video requires so much data multimedia appli cations that use film or animation normally play back at 15 frames per second with a resolution of 320 by 200 pixels This is why the video on a computer is not as smooth as what you are used to see ing on television To reduce the storage required all video files must be compressed before they can be distributed and decompressed when you view them Two compression and decompression techniques are in gen eral use Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 66 The Wide World of Multimedia Playing Back Sound Video and Animation Files AVI Files The most common technique for storing and playing back video on personal computers is Microsoft s Audio Video Interleaved AVD format This software technique displays video u
336. t is successful and you selected the hard disk drive test the hard disk test displays this message HARD DISK TEST IN PROGRESS 805100 If an error occurs the test displays the ABORTED message Write down all messages and highlighted numbers and consult your dealer Your computer or your drive may need service To return to the main menu press Enter The hard disk test does not destroy all of the information stored on the hard disk However this test overwrites a small portion of the disk Back up any important files before you test the hard disk If the test completes successfully and you selected the printer test the diagnostic test begins the printer test If you did not select the printer test the hard disk test concludes by displaying the TDIAGS screen To exit TDIAGS go to Exiting the Diagnos tic Menus on page 432 If the hard disk drive tests successfully and you selected to test the printer the printer test displays this message PRINTER TEST IN PROGRESS 60xxxx Part IT Technical Reference The Diagnostic Test 4 3 1 Test Sequence where xxxx is a counter that shows the test is still in progress If you specified an IBM compatible printer the test sends the fol lowing output to the printer PRINTER TEST 1 THIS LINE SHOWS NORMAL PRINT Zs THIS LINE SHOWS DOUBLE WIDTH PRINT 3 THIS LINE SHOWS COMPRESSED PRINT 4 5 6 THIS LINE SHOWS EMPHASIZED PRINT THIS LINE SHOWS DOU
337. t worry you can set up an external keyboard key combination to emulate the internal keyboard s Fn key in Fn esse TSETUP or through the Windows Control Panel In Fn esse this option is called Ext Keyboard Fn Key For infor mation about using Fn esse see Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse on page 270 In TSETUP this option is called Ext Keyboard Fn Key Equiva lent For information about using TSETUP see TSETUP on page 403 To set this option through the Windows Control Panel follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the Keyboard icon Windows 95 displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box 4 Click the Toshiba tab The Toshiba tab comes to the front of the dialog box 5 In the Fn Key Equivalent for External Keyboard section select the desired key combination Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 232 Using Your Computer on Your Desk Using a Serial Mouse 6 Click OK to close the dialog box with your setting in effect 7 Close the Windows Control Panel Using a Serial Mouse You may want to use a mouse instead of the AccuPoint You can use a serial mouse or a PS 2 mouse See Using a PS 2 Mouse on page 233 if you wish to use a PS 2 mouse If you connect a serial mouse the AccuPoint will not work To connect a serial mouse Opening the port cover 1 Open the port cover on the left side of t
338. tarting Again Where You Left Off on page 145 for instructions on turning Resume Mode off If you haven t used the computer yet proceed to the next step 2 Click Start then click Shut Down Windows 95 displays the Shut Down Windows dialog box 3 Click the button next to Shut down the computer then click Yes Windows 95 shuts down and turns the computer off automatically Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 8 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Adding Memory Optional 4 Unplug the computer UN Installing amemory card with the computer s power on may stor damage the computer the card or both WARNING 5 Close the display and remove any cables you may have connected If you re installing additional memory before using the com puter you haven t connected any cables yet 6 Turn the computer upside down The memory slot cover 7 Useasmall Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws that secure the memory slot cover 8 Remove the memory slot cover Static electricity can damage the memory module Before you handle the module touch a grounded metal surface to dis can charge any static electricity you may have built up To avoid damaging the memory module be careful not to touch its pin connector on the side you insert into the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 1 9 Adding Memory Optional Removing the screws 9 Remove the two screws f
339. tarting Programs Faster with Fn esse Changing or Removing Existing Key Assignments To change or remove an existing key assignment follow these steps 1 Click the key on the Fn esse keyboard you wish to change Fn esse displays a shortcut menu The shortcut menu 2 To Re assign the key to the task of opening a program a document or a folder click Re assign to When Fn esse displays the Assignment dialog box click Re assign To select the new task and follow the instructions earlier in this section for assigning that task 3 To move the existing key assignment to another key click Move and click the new key The previously assigned key becomes black The newly assigned key changes color indicating it is now an assigned key 4 To remove the key assignment click Clear then click Yes The key becomes black Setting Options This section describes the options you can set by clicking the Options button on the Fn esse keyboard then clicking the Options tab in the Fn esse Options dialog box Notifying on Launch If you select the check box next to Notify on Launch Fn esse dis plays the title while it opens the assigned program or file Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 219 Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse Confirming Changes in Existing Key Assignments If you select the check box next to Confirm Key Changes Fn esse asks you to confirm changes in existing key assignments Setting
340. ter Off To turn your computer off follow these steps 1 Click Start then click Shut Down Windows 95 displays the Shut Down Windows dialog box Restart the computer in MS DOS mode Close all programs and log on as a different user uo ie The Shut Down Windows dialog box 2 Make sure Shut down the computer is selected If not click it now 3 Click Yes Windows 95 displays a message that it is shutting down and turns the computer off When the power is off the power speed light goes out You have completed the tutorial You should now be comfortable with the desktop and the objects on it You can open and close pro grams create documents and folders and delete them work with the properties of objects on the desktop and even find help if you get lost Continue to use what you have learned in these lessons and before you know it you will feel completely at home with your computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop TI Lesson 14 Turning Your Computer Off Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 4 Computing TIPS Sessa s 48 ee hw Re eee eae eee aces 79 When You Turn the Computer On 000 00005 82 How to Adjust the Display 0 00 cece ee eee eee 85 How to Start a Program 4 6 04 A kG oaeeedaes came este es 86 How to Use the Keyboard a244o aanaues Aus i abawcdaddddads 88 How to Save Your Work 5 5305 asiaciadoeee
341. ter explains how to use the electronic version of the guide Opening the Book To open the electronic User s Guide follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Programs 2 Point to Toshiba Utilities then click User s Guide Windows 95 opens the guide The Parts of the Window The electronic book opens at the title page Top of chapter icon Top of topic icon 7 pee ies Flecironic User s Guide x Conr nts Index Find GoBack History Hap v Bookmark Copy Print Preferences Exit Menu commands Satellite Pro 430 Series Next arrow Electronic User s Guide Previous arrow Produced by Atkins Duane International Inc The title page Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 42 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Using the Electronic Guide The menu commands icons and arrows provide these options Contents displays the table of contents for the entire book Index displays the index you normally find at the back of the book Find lets you type in a term and search for it in the book Go Back retraces your steps through the book History shows a list of all the places you ve been Help explains how to use the book s features Bookmark marks a topic so you can return to it in the future Copy copies selected text to the clipboard Print prints the current topic Preferences lets you customize the book s features Exit closes the book Clicking the Top of chapt
342. th with water or a neutral cleaner Do not use clean ers like benzine or rubbing alcohol Let the CD dry completely before inserting it in the drive Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 00 Learning the Basics How to Prepare Diskettes for Use How to Prepare Diskettes for Use Formatting makes a diskette ready to store files If you re inter ested in what s going on when you format a diskette see How Does a Disk Store Information on page 294 You can buy two types of diskettes preformatted and unformatted Check that preformatted diskettes are formatted for IBM or DOS If you ve purchased preformatted diskettes you don t need the information in this section because the diskette manufacturer has taken care of the process for you If the package doesn t say any thing about formatting your diskettes are probably unformatted This section describes the simplest way to format a diskette For more options and an explanation of the other items in the Format dialog box see Windows 95 Help or your Windows 95 documentation To format a diskette follow these steps 1 Ifyour diskette drive is not installed in the SelectBay con nect the external diskette drive or swap drives in the Select Bay To swap drives see Swapping Drives in the SelectBay on page 111 2 Insert a write enabled diskette into the diskette drive Write protect tab ims A write enabled diskette Part I Getting To Kno
343. the Memory Module on page 17 and making sure it s seated properly 5 Replace the memory expansion slot cover Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 322 If Something Goes Wrong Fixing Device Related Problems 6 Check for the error again 7 Ifthe error reoccurs remove the memory card entirely and check for the error again If removing the memory card eliminates the error the memory card may be bad If the error reoccurs without the memory card installed the error is not caused by the memory card Power and the Batteries Your computer receives its power through the built in power sup ply and power cord or from the system batteries main battery real time clock RTC battery and backup battery Power prob lems are interrelated For example a bad power cord will neither power the computer nor recharge the batteries Here are some typical problems and how to solve them The AC power light doesn t come on when you plug in the power cord Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into both a working wall outlet and the computer If the AC power light still doesn t come on check that the wall outlet is working properly by plugging in a lamp or other appliance The power cord works correctly but the battery won t charge The main battery may not be inserted correctly in the computer Turn off the computer remove the battery clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth if necessary and replace the battery
344. the TCP IP protocol To verify that TCP IP is properly connected to the Windows 95 s Dial Up feature highlight Dial Up Adapter in the Network menu and click Properties To get to the Network menu click Start point to Settings and click Control Panel Click the Bindings tab and deselect all protocols except TCP IP 10 Click OK twice to exit the Network menu Installing Dial Up Networking To install Dial Up Networking follow these steps 1 A un A WwW N N Click Start point to settings click Control Panel Windows 95 displays the Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs Click the Windows Setup tab Highlight Communications and click Details Select Dial Up Networking and click OK Click OK to continue Windows 95 adds Dial Up Networking to your system Click OK to finish and then close the Control Panel Restart your computer Dial Up Networking is ready to use If you have not already installed TCP IP do so before restarting the computer Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Connecting to the World 21 9 Logging On to an On line Service or the Internet Setting Up Your Internet Connection To set up your Internet connection follow these steps 1 To verify that the computer and modem are connected click the Start button point to Settings click Control Panel then double click Modems Select the Diagnostics tab and click More Info Windows 95 should display the name and model of your mo
345. the card malfunctions again it may be defective Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 332 If Something Goes Wrong Fixing Device Related Problems Resolving PC Card Problems Here are some common problems and their solutions The slots appear to be dead PC Cards that used to work no longer work Follow these steps to view the PC Card status 1 Click the My Computer icon with the secondary button then click Properties Windows 95 displays the System Properties dialog box 2 Click the Device Manager tab 3 Double click the device listed as your PC Card Windows 95 displays your PC Card s Properties dialog box This dialog box contains information about your PC Card configuration and status The computer stops working hangs when you insert a PC Card The problem may be caused by an I O input output conflict between the PCMCIA socket and another device in the system Use Device Manager to make sure each device has its own I O base address See Fixing a Problem with Device Manager on page 317 for more information Since all PC Cards share the same socket each card is not required to have its own address Hot swapping removing one PC Card and inserting another without turning the computer off fails Follow this procedure before you remove a PC Card 1 Click the PC Card icon on the taskbar 2 Click Stop xxxx where xxxx is the identifier for your PC Card Windows 95 displays a message that you may saf
346. the names can include spaces If you plan to share your files with a computer using MS DOS or an older version of Windows the file name must be no more than eight characters followed by a period and a three charac ter extension You may use all the letters and numbers on the Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 9 2 Learning the Basics How to Print Something You ve Created keyboard plus the following characters _ amp and An MS DOS file name must not contain a space Most programs assign an extension that identifies the file as being created in that program with a particular format For example Microsoft Word saves files with a DOC extension Creating your own extension is usually unwise since the pro gram is unlikely to recognize a strange extension and may refuse to handle your file correctly How to Print Something You ve Created Before you can print your work you need to Connect the printer to the computer discussed in Connecting a Parallel Printer on page 24 Set up Windows 95 to work with the printer discussed below You only need to perform the setup step the first time you connect the printer If yov ll be using more than one printer or changing printers you ll need to set up Windows 95 to run with the addi tional printer s Setting Up Windows 95 to Work with Your Printer When you turned your computer on for the first time the Windows 95 Setup pr
347. the second file 4 Click the Play button to play the file Choosing the Next and Previous buttons moves you forward and backward through the selected files in the playlist Part I Getting To Know Your Computer The Wide World of Multimedia 1 8 3 Managing Your CD ROMs To play all the selected files in the playlist select AutoPlay before choosing the Play button Click the AutoPlay Options button to set how the multiple files play For example you can set magiCDisc to limit the play time for each file 5 When you ve finished playing your files click the Close button to close the CD ROM Browser Installing Programs from a CD ROM Many CD ROMs have programs that you must install onto the hard disk To install these files through magiCDisc click the Install CD icon on the toolbar The magiCDisc program searches for the CD ROM s installation program and lets you start it If there is more than one installation program magiCDisc offers you a choice between them Changing How magiCDisc Operates So far you ve seen how to manage your CD ROMs with all of magiCDisc s settings set to their original values However you can customize many features of magiCDisc to fit your needs Customizing the Inspector To customize how the Inspector operates follow these steps 1 Click the Options button from the main or rack screen The Registration Options dialog box displays with the CD Inspector page selected Part I Getting To K
348. the volume Using Media Player You can use Media Player to play back wave and Video for Win dows files in addition to playing back several other formats such as MIDI and Quick Time for Windows files To play a file follow these steps 1 Click Start and point to Programs 2 Point to Accessories then point to Multimedia 3 Click Media Player Windows 95 displays the Media Player window 0 00 0 25 0 50 075 1 00 1 25 1 50 1 65 gt ape ela fo pr BoA Media Player ready to play a wave file 4 On the File menu click Open 5 Locate the file you want to play in the Look in box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer HINT The Wide World of Multimedia 1 69 Playing Back Sound Video and Animation Files 6 To display the list of file types Media Player can play click the down arrow next to the Files of type list box 7 Click the name of the file you want to play Another way to play a multimedia file is to click the file name with the secondary button This opens a list that includes the Play command Adjusting the Volume You can change the volume in two ways By using the Volume Control program By turning the volume control dial on the front of the computer The Volume Control program sets the volume and balance for both CDs and multimedia files that contain sound To access this program follow these steps 1 Click Start and point to Programs 2 Point to Accessori
349. tical sliders in the Battery Alarm Thresholds section 9 Click OK to exit the Battery Alarm Thresholds dialog box 10 Click the configuration button in the Low Battery Alarm Actions section The MaxTime Control Panel displays the Low Battery Alarm Actions dialog box Home Office Travel Battery Ala i ES m ra Play System Beep O Play wav File iba T No Sound TOSHIBA The Low Battery Alarm Actions dialog box 11 Click the tab for the configuration you wish to change 12 To configure the system to display a warning message for the Low Battery Alarm select Display an alarm message If you select this option you can also select a sound event to occur when the Low Battery Alarm warning displays No Sound Play System Beep or Play wav File 13 Click OK to exit the Low Battery Alarm Actions dialog box 14 Repeat steps 10 through 13 in the Critical Battery Alarm section of the dialog box 15 Click OK to save your settings and close the MaxTime Control Panel Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Toshiba System Making Life Easier 269 Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Changing Warning Volumes You can set the warning volumes through the Toshiba System Control Panel To assign volume settings to a specific configura tion follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Con
350. time and date you specify Part IT Technical Reference 398 Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage Option Settings Usage The Toshiba System Control Panel The Power On Timer Page Status On Off Turns the computer on at a given time If you choose On a mes sage to the right of the option displays the scheduled start up time This option is equivalent to the Alarm Power On option in TSETUP Time XXLXX Lets you specify the time at which the system turns on Click the up and down arrows to change the time displayed in the box Time Format AM PM 24 Hour Lets you set the format in which the time displays Set time for specific date Enabled check Disabled no check Enabling this option lets you specify the date on which the system turns on automatically Choose a date from the calendar below the option Part IT Technical Reference The Toshiba System Control Panel The Security Page 39 9 The Security Page Option Settings Usage Option Usage Start Up Options Poweron Timer Security Miscellaneous System Password D Not registered Set Ee Password Prompt Prompt text TOSHIBA Cancel pply Defaults The Security page This page allows you to protect your system from unauthorized use by setting a System Password
351. tly very expensive They use four reservoirs holding cyan magenta yellow and black toner The initial outlay for a laser printer makes it more expensive than an inkjet for low volume use However if you do enough printing a laser printer costs less per page than an inkjet and provides higher quality particularly for graphics Thermal Printers These are specialist color printers for producing presentation qual ity output There are two types Thermal transfer printers melt col ored wax onto paper from a ribbon or use wax based inks Thermal dye printers transfer dye from an impregnated ribbon onto special paper or film These printers are too expensive and too slow for normal use Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 3 Before You Go to a Computer Store Buying Hardware Multi Function Devices If you are intending to work from home you probably need a fax machine or a photocopier as well as a printer Perhaps a scanner would also be useful Instead of two or three separate machines you can buy a multi function device that prints copies scans and faxes Not only do you save space but the purchase price and running costs are lower than for a set of stand alone machines Typically a multi function device is a printer or fax machine with the other functions added As a general rule the quality of printing and faxing is comparable to stand alone machines But scanning and copying are done using the fax engine which has
352. to power your computer For example when you are compiling a report you are likely to pause frequently while you consult documents and collect your thoughts If your computer shuts off power to components such as the processor and disc drives while you are not actively using them the battery charge will last much longer Your Satellite Pro 430 computer comes with a range of power sav ing options already set up If you want to change any of the set tings to suit your working pattern refer to The MaxTime Control Panel on page 387 or TSETUP on page 403 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer What s Really Going On 30 1 What Really Happens When You Turn the Computer On What Really Happens When You Turn the Computer On When you press the power button the following occurs 1 The computer s BIOS Basic Input Output System loads a bootstrap program This program named from the expression pull yourself up by your bootstraps checks and displays the amount of memory in the system before proceeding The bootstrap program attempts to load Windows 95 It looks first for a diskette in the diskette drive and then at the hard disk If a diskette without the necessary start up files is in the drive the bootstrap program displays an error message If you ve changed the Boot Priority option in TSETUP the computer will check the hard disk before the diskette drive 3 As Windows 95 loads it configures the s
353. to select network specific options Network options include logon options and protocols Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider ISP for the correct option settings 12 Click OK twice to exit and then close the Dial Up Net working folder Some Interesting Places to Start If you re new to the Internet and don t know where to start this section gives you a few sites you might find interesting The Internet is constantly changing It s possible that one or more of these sites have changed addresses or disappeared altogether WWW Sites Toshiba s homepages are http www toshiba com worldwide Toshiba corporate site http computers toshiba com marketing and product informa tion in the USA http pcsupport tais com Product Support in the USA http www toshiba ca Canada http www toshiba tice com Toshiba Europe http www toshiba co jp Japan K Ww http river ihs gov has some great information and pictures about Grand Canyon river running Part I Getting To Know Your Computer K kod K Kod K Ww K Ww Connecting to the World 2 2 1 Logging On to an On line Service or the Internet http snow water ca gov gives information about the Califor nia snow pack http www irs ustreas gov prod cover html is the site operated by the U S Internal Revenue Service http nwsfo atmos albany edu provides weather related information http www epicurious com prese
354. trol Panel 3 Double click the Toshiba System icon The Toshiba System Control Panel opens 4 Click the Miscellaneous tab to bring it to the front Start Up Options Poweron Timer Security Miscellaneous g Off Low Medium High j Z Enable audible waming for emergency battery condition p Z Enable audible waming when panel closes Enable system beep warning Pointing Devices Enable Accupoint only if PS 2 mouse is not Parallel Port Mode ersion Information BIOS Version ECP 5 O Standard Bi directional TOSHIBA Cancel v _ Defauts The Miscellaneous tab of the Toshiba System Control Panel 5 Click the configuration button in the Warnings section of the tab The Toshiba System Control Panel displays the Configuration Specific Alarm dialog box Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 0 Making Life Easier Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse Warnings Warming Volume en Dll Low Medium High Z Enable audible waming for emergency battery condition pi 2 Enable audible waming when panel closes Enable system beep waming TOONA Corea The Configuration Specific Alarm dialog box 6 Click the tab of the configuration for which you want to change the warning settings 7 Change the desired warning settings then click OK to exit the di
355. tte such as the start up diskette you created when you ran the Microsoft Create System Disks program A diskette won t format properly Make sure you ve chosen the correct disk capacity in the Format dialog box You can t format double density diskettes as high den sity diskettes and vice versa Try using a different diskette If the computer completes the for matting of the new diskette run ScanDisk following the steps on page 326 to check the new diskette If the drive formats properly and ScanDisk doesn t report any errors during the test the prob lem was probably a faulty diskette The drive can t read a diskette Try another diskette If you can access the second diskette the first diskette not the disk drive is probably causing the problem Run ScanDisk following the steps on page 326 on the faulty diskette If the problem occurs with each diskette you attempt to access run the diagnostic test to check the diskette drive Refer to The Diag nostic Test on page 421 If you re using the diskette drive externally unplug the cable and plug it back in to make sure the connection between the diskette drive cable and the port is secure Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 329 Fixing Device Related Problems The CD ROM Drive You cannot access a CD in the drive Make sure the CD ROM tray has closed properly Press gently until it clicks into place Open the CD ROM tra
356. tures of Program Manager Many of these features such as the menu bar and minimize button are also present in other pro grams you run under Windows for Workgroups When you start Windows for Workgroups you see the Program Manager window Control menu icon Menu bar Program icons Minimize button File Options Window Help Program Manager zl Main valle Toshjba Utilities cae MS aH On SiH iie amp C i oe MSDOS FileManager Clipboard PrintManager MasterDisk PCMCIA MaxTime Hardware Maximize button Viewer Creator Configuration Manager Setup 2 A emm r Control Panel Windows PIF Editor ReadMe Options Setup 4 Read Mi Greeting Card I Program groups aes eaz FEF zes lize Windows Network Games Startup Accessories Microsoft Toshiba Card fn Tools Manager Program group icons The Program Manager window Clicking the control menu icon opens the control menu This menu lets you set features such as the size and shape of the cur rent window Double clicking this icon closes the current window Clicking one of the words on the menu bar opens a list of related activities Part III Appendixes K Ww K Ww K Ww K Ww KP Using Windows for Workgroups 467 Introducing Windows for Workgroups Clicking the minimize button reduces the cu
357. u receive the message Your program has performed an illegal oper ation you should record the details of the message and consult the software manufacturer To record the details 1 Click the Details button and select the text Windows 95 displays The Details button displays information that the software man ufacturer needs to help you solve your problem Press Ctrl c to copy the text to the clipboard Open Notepad click the Start button point to Programs then point to Accessories and click Notepad Press Ctrl v to paste the details into Notepad Add a paragraph break and type some notes describing what you were doing when you received the message Save the file and refer to it when you contact the software manufacturer You receive a Non System Disk error message A diskette is in the diskette drive while the computer is starting Windows 95 Remove the diskette from the drive and press any key to continue You open a program that immediately stops responding If CPU sleep mode is on enabled it may stop a program from responding Close the program you are trying to open and turn off disable sleep mode Then try to run the program again To close the program 1 Press Ctrl Alt Del The Close Program dialog box displays all the programs and processes currently in operation If the program has stopped responding the words not responding appear beside it Part I Getting To Know Your Comp
358. ugh the Start Up Options tab of the Toshiba System Control Panel or through TSETUP in TSETUP this option is called Panel Power On Off K kod Turn off automatically when you haven t used it for a set amount of time This option is called System Auto Off and is available through the Power Settings tab of the MaxTime Con trol Panel or through TSETUP Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 46 Taking Your Computer on the Road Running the Computer on Battery Power There are two ways to turn on Toshiba s Resume Mode in Windows 95 Use a special key combination hotkey to turn Resume Mode on from the keyboard Use the Toshiba System Control Panel The following sections describe how to turn Resume Mode on and off with a hotkey and with the Toshiba System Control Panel Setting Resume Mode Using a Hotkey To select Resume Mode with a hotkey follow these steps 1 Press Fn F3 to display the Resume Mode pop up window Resume On The Resume Mode pop up window 2 While continuing to press Fn press F3 until the pop up win dow indicates Resume On 3 Release the Fn key You re now in Resume Mode Using the Toshiba System Control Panel To select Resume Mode using the Toshiba System Control Panel follow these steps 1 Click Start then point to Settings 2 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 3 Double click the Toshiba System icon teen The Toshiba System Control Panel opens
359. ular network let you communicate using a cellular tele phone K Ww An external modem connected to the computer through the serial port Which Modem is for Me The right modem for you depends on your work habits and needs You would use an external modem while in your office at home or if you wish to keep the two PC Card slots free for other devices When traveling a PC Card modem provides a compact way to keep in touch Faster is Better Modems support a variety of speeds from 300 bits per second bps to 36 6 kilobits Kbps per second for use on regular tele phone lines In general you should buy the fastest modem you can afford Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 202 Connecting to the World Setting Up The faster the modem the quicker you ll be able to send and receive messages files and information Transmission speed has a lot to do with how much time you spend connected to the phone line Where to Buy a Modem Toshiba sells PC Card fax modems specifically designed to work with your computer Refer to the Accessories Catalog for more information on how to purchase one Your dealer may be able to sell you other fax modem and fax voice modem PC Cards Using a PC Card Modem Once you ve purchased your PC Card modem and taken it out of its box this section describes how to install it and make it ready to use Installing a PC Card Modem If you purchased a PC Card modem follow these steps 1 Locat
360. up a maximum of five distinct configurations Three configurations Home Office and Travel were already set up when you turned the computer on You can customize these preset configurations and define two addi tional configurations A configuration specifies the basic features of your system A Toshiba Access Pane configuration specifies the power and battery settings Fn esse assignments the gauges displayed on the panel and which programs to launch from the panel Which Configuration Am Currently Using The icon on the configuration button at the top of the panel iden tifies the current configuration Home Office and Travel configuration buttons The configuration you choose can affect all aspects of the panel including hardware configuration settings how the battery gauges display and which programs you can launch from the panel Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Making Life Easier 2 59 Saving Time with Multiple Configurations Changing Configurations To change your current configuration click the configuration but ton The configuration slider bar appears displaying the available configurations Click the button for the configuration you wish to use More Reasons to Use Configurations Using multiple configurations can greatly simplify your computer use For example if you use your computer to take notes during business meetings you might want to decrease the volume of the battery alarm so as not to
361. ur Computer 1 1 0 Learning the Basics Connecting to a Network What Do I Need to Connect to a Network Before you can connect to a network you need to purchase a net work adapter card These come in two forms that will work with your computer PCMCIA compatible PC network adapter card Parallel network adapter The PC Card runs faster but takes up one of your PC Card slots The parallel adapter leaves more space for PC Cards and can be connected so that you can still use a parallel printer Making the Connection Connecting to a network requires these general steps 1 Insert the PC network adapter card in the slot Windows 95 automatically detects the card and installs the software for it 2 Enter the network information Ask your network administrator for the Workgroup name and other requested information 3 Click Close Windows 95 copies the necessary network files then prompts you to restart your computer 4 Click Yes Windows 95 restarts and prompts you to enter your name and password 5 Type your name and password and click OK To connect to another type of network refer to Windows Help your network adapter documentation and ask your network administrator for assistance Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Learning the Basics 1 1 1 Swapping Drives in the SelectBay Networks and Suspending the Computer If you re connected to a network don t suspend the computer Not all networks and
362. ur changes in effect and restarts the computer or returns you to the system prompt depending on the changes you made To close TSETUP without saving your changes press Esc When TSETUP asks you to confirm your action press N TSETUP returns you to the system prompt MEMORY This group shows how the computer s memory is allocated Memory Type Description Total Displays the total amount of memory installed Base Displays the amount of conventional memory available to the computer Extended Displays the amount of extended memory available Shadow BIOS ROM Displays the amount of memory available for Shadow BIOS ROM Shadow BIOS ROM copies shadows the computer s BIOS functions from ROM into faster RAM to improve system speed These values are calculated by the system and cannot be changed Part IT Technical Reference 406 TSETUP DISPLAY DISPLAY Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart Option Settings Usage Restart This group configures the Liquid Crystal Display LCD and monitor port output Display Adaptor VGA Compatible default Automatically turns on the computer s internal display adapter You cannot change this setting N A LCD Display Mode Color default Monochrome Controls whether the computer displays images in color or in black and white Y VGA Segment Address E000h C000h E4
363. use with the convenience of never having to remove your hands from the keyboard For more information see Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device on page 27 The AccuPoint buttons work with the AccuPoint The larger primary button acts as the left button on a mouse The smaller secondary button acts as the right mouse button For more infor mation see Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device on page 27 The front panel provides a palm rest The lights on the indicator panel provide information about vari ous system functions The next section discusses the indicator panel lights Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 2 Finding Your Way around the System Find Out Where Everything s Located The Indicator Panel Power speed light Cursor control mode light Disk light AC power light Caps lock light Numeric mode light Battery light The indicator panel The power speed light glows when the computer is on and shows the speed at which the computer is processing information Green indicates high speed and orange indicates low speed Al The caps lock light glows when you press the Caps Lock key When this light is on pressing a letter key on the keyboard pro duces an upper case capital letter For more information see The Character Keys on page 88 The cursor control mode light glows when the cursor control gt overlay is on When the overlay is on pressing an overlay key moves the curso
364. uter 306 If Something Goes Wrong Problems When You Turn the Computer On 2 Click End Task then click Cancel You disable sleep mode in the MaxTime Control Panel or TSETUP Follow these steps to disable sleep mode using the MaxTime Control Panel 3 Click Start then point to Settings 4 Click Control Panel Windows 95 opens the Control Panel 5 Double click the MaxTime icon 6 The MaxTime Control Panel opens with the Power Set tings tab on top 7 Select Custom Settings from the Power Usage Mode drop down list box 8 Click Modify Custom Settings 9 The MaxTime Control Panel displays the Modify Custom Settings dialog box 10 Move the Sleep Mode slider to Disabled 11 Click OK 12 Click OK to exit the MaxTime Control Panel If the problem continues contact the manufacturer of the program Problems When You Turn the Computer On These problems might occur when you turn the power on The computer won t start Make sure you attached the power cord properly or installed a charged battery Press and hold the power button for a few seconds Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 307 Problems When You Turn the Computer On The computer starts but when you press a key on the keyboard or touch the AccuPoint nothing happens You are probably in Resume Mode and have a software or resource conflict When this happens turning the power on returns you to the problem instead of restarting the syste
365. uter Let s Start at the Very Beginning 39 Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM lta TOSHIBA Wir f TOSHIBA Windows 95 fm TranXit 2 01 2 disks tm TOSHIBA User s Guide 2 disks isk lay Drivers v 2 99 1 disk Installation Disks A sample list of disk images 5 To create a complete set of program diskettes click Select All If you don t want to create a complete set of diskettes now select only the program s for which you want to create diskettes 6 Label the diskettes with the names shown on the screen or click Print Labels to print the labels automatically If you choose to print the labels automatically make sure the computer is connected to a printer and you have enough printer diskette labels 7 Click Make Disks Master Disk Creator displays the MDC Disk Creation Confir mation screen 8 Insert the appropriately labeled blank diskette into the dis kette drive 9 Inthe MDC Disk Creation Confirmation screen select a Write method and click Create Disk Master Disk Creator begins copying files to the diskette and displays a meter monitoring the copying process Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 40 Let s Start at the Very Beginning Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM 10 When Master Disk Creator prompts you to press the disk eject button to remove the diskette YN If the diskette drive light is on do not remove a diskette sr0P Doin
366. uter Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 37 Running the Computer on Battery Power The battery may not start charging immediately under the follow ing conditions The battery is extremely hot or cold To ensure that the battery charges to its full capacity wait until it reaches room tempera ture 50 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit 10 to 30 degrees Celsius K Ww The battery is almost completely discharged Leave the power connected and the battery should begin charging after a few minutes Once a battery pack is fully charged we recommend you operate your computer on battery power until the battery pack discharges completely Doing this extends battery life and helps ensure accurate monitoring of battery capacity There are also optional battery chargers available from Toshiba See Charging More than One Battery at a Time on page 158 for more information about battery chargers The main battery charges the backup and RTC batteries In normal use the main battery keeps the other batteries ade quately charged Occasionally the backup and RTC batteries may lose their charge completely especially if you ve had the computer turned off for a long time To recharge The main battery or the backup battery plug the computer in and leave it turned off for seven hours The RTC battery plug the computer in and turn it on for at least twenty four hours Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 138 Taking Your C
367. vices as video capture and the decompression of MPEG compressed multimedia data audio and video To cap ture video you need to purchase a ZV PC Card and insert it into the Type II PC Card slot on your computer Toshiba sells a ZV PC Card which may be available from your dealer Using ZV PC Cards in your Satellite Pro 430 Series computer requires the CardWizard software to be loaded Audio and video data flow from the hard disk a compact disc the Internet or another source across the system bus to the PC Card controller The controller passes them to the MPEG decoder on the PC Card which delivers uncompressed video data back to the PC Card controller The PC Card controller then sends a decompressed video stream directly to the video graphics controller which displays it on your screen It sends decompressed audio data directly to the audio sound chip which controls the speakers By bypassing the CPU and system bus a ZV PC Card can deliver high performance video data at 30 frames per second Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 6 The Wide World of Multimedia Playing Back Sound Video and Animation Files Play Back Programs Windows 95 comes with three programs for playing multimedia files CD Player is used to play an audio CD The section Playing an Audio CD on page 163 explains how to use this program Media Player is used to play back audio video and animation files Volume Control lets you adjust
368. w Your Computer CAUTION Learning the Basics 1 0 1 How to Prepare Diskettes for Use The write protect tab at the left corner of the diskette should cover the square hole Formatting a disk erases all information currently on the disk Do not format a disk unless you re sure it s blank or contains only unimportant files Double click My Computer Windows 95 opens the My Computer window Click the A icon with the secondary button then click Format Windows 95 opens the Format dialog box No label Display summary when finished Copy system files The Format dialog box 5 Make sure the options in the Format dialog box are set cor rectly especially the Capacity option You cannot format 720KB diskettes for 1 44MB or vice versa Click Start Windows 95 formats the diskette displaying the Format Results screen when it s finished Click Close Press the disk eject button and remove the diskette from the drive Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 1 02 Learning the Basics Taking Care of Diskettes 9 To format another diskette insert it into the drive and repeat steps 6 through 8 10 When you ve finished formatting diskettes click Close to exit the Format dialog box 11 Close the My Computer window Taking Care of Diskettes To protect the data on your diskettes KR K Ww K2 Ww K2 Kod K Ww Store your diskettes in a suita
369. w the TAP system compo nents display in the Toshiba Advanced Dialog Interface or the Windows 95 window style The images in the TAP Window Styles dialog box are exam ples of the two windows styles from which you can choose They do not contain active controls If you try to access this dialog box and your computer s display is set to 256 colors or lower the system displays an error message To change your system s color display follow the instructions in the error message This dialog box provides the following options Option Usage Toshiba Advanced When this option is selected the TAP components Dialog Interface display with the Toshiba Advanced Dialog Inter face graphic styles sounds and animation Sounds Displays the Sounds dialog box refer to The Sounds Dialog Box on page 379 Part IT Technical Reference The Toshiba Access Panel The Options Button 379 Option Usage Animation Displays the Animation dialog box refer to The Animation Dialog Box on page 382 Standard Windows 95 Displays TAP components in the Normal Settings Windows 95 style OK Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Cancel Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Apply Applies your changes the TAP The Sounds Dialog Box Sounds HE Eee ae effects a Sound Scheme Default I Edit Schemes _taneet The Sounds dialog box This dialog box allows you to select a sound scheme to us
370. with the Start Up Options tab on top Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Taking Your Computer on the Road 1 47 Changing Batteries Start Up Options Poweron Timer Security Miscellaneous Start Up Sequence O Floppy disk first then hard disk Hard disk first then floppy disk Start Up Mode Boot Resume B Trigger suspend resume when panel closes opens TOSHIBA Cancel y Defaults The Start Up Options tab of the Toshiba System Control Panel 4 Inthe Start Up Mode section click Resume 5 Click OK to save your settings and close the Toshiba Sys tem Control Panel Changing Batteries CAUTION When your battery runs out of power you have two options plug in the computer or change the battery if you have charged spare When handling battery packs do not drop or knock them Also be careful not to damage the casing or short circuit the terminals Changing the battery requires you to open up part of the computer Be careful when following these steps To replace the battery follow these steps 1 Save your work 2 Turn the computer off or suspend it according to the instructions in Starting Again Where You Left Off on page 145 3 Remove all cables connected to the computer 4 Turn the computer upside down Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 4 8 Taking Your Computer on the Road Changing Batteries Batt
371. wn in Setting Up Windows 95 to Work with Your Printer on page 92 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer If Something Goes Wrong 3 3 5 Fixing Device Related Problems You may have connected the printer with the computer on Disable Resume Mode turn off the computer and turn off the printer Turn the printer back on make sure it is on line then turn the computer back on Try printing another file For example you could create and attempt to print a short test file using Notepad If a Notepad file prints correctly the problem may be in your original file You may have selected an incorrect Parallel Port Mode To change this option setting refer to The Toshiba System Control Panel on page 395 The printer won t print what you see on the screen Modems Many programs display information on the screen differently from the way they print it See if your program has a print preview mode This mode lets you see your work exactly as it will print Contact the software manufacturer for more information A modem fax modem or fax voice modem is a serial device This section lists common modem problems The modem won t receive or transmit properly Make sure the RJ 11 cable the one that goes from the modem to the telephone line is firmly connected to the modem s RJ 11 jack and the telephone line socket Check the serial port settings to make sure the hardware and soft ware are referring to the same COM port in
372. work through the lessons in this chapter the taskbar will change to reflect what youre doing The icons provide shortcuts to programs documents files folders system features and components To learn how to create and use these icons refer to your Windows 95 documentation Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Getting to Know the Desktop 5 3 Lesson 2 Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device One special icon is the Recycle Bin You use the Recycle Bin to delete files and remove objects from the desktop You ll learn more about the Recycle Bin in Lesson 11 Removing Objects from the Desktop on page 68 The Toshiba Access Panel displays gauges which monitor the current battery capacity and lets you launch applications set up configurations and configure the system s power usage settings When you turn the computer on the first time the panel is in Auto hide mode it disappears when you re not using it To view the panel move the cursor to the right edge of the desktop Lesson 2 Using the AccuPoint Pointing Device The AccuPoint is your basic tool for moving around and working in Windows 95 This lesson teaches you some of the things you can do with the AccuPoint Follow these steps 1 Push gently against the left side of the AccuPoint Notice how the arrow pointer moves to the right edge of the desktop 2 Pusha bit harder against the right side of the AccuPoint Notice that the pointer moves faster as you inc
373. ws K Ww Black keys are available keys not yet assigned K Ww Colored keys are assigned blue is the default color K kod Dark gray keys are not assignable K Ww Keys with a small triangle on the upper left corner open either a program folder or a custom folder To view an existing key assignment position the pointer over the key on the Fn esse keyboard A pop up hint displays which pro gram file or folder is associated with the key If a key is unassigned the hint reads No Assignment Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 2 2 Making Life Easier Starting Programs Faster with Fn esse Assigning Keys You can assign a file program folder or custom folder to a Fn key combination by Clicking the key on the Fn esse keyboard pointing to Assign To then clicking File Program Folder or Custom Folder Dragging a program or file icon from the Windows Explorer and dropping it onto a key on the Fn esse keyboard Clicking a file or folder with the secondary button then choos ing Assign to Fn key from the shortcut menu that appears The following sections discuss the first two methods listed above Assigning a Key to a Program or a File To assign a key combination the task of opening a program or file and its associated program follow these steps 1 2 Open Fn esse Click the desired key in the Fn esse keyboard Fn esse displays a shortcut menu Point to Assig
374. ws Explorer on top of other windows on the desktop and highlights the menu bar to show it is the active window Part I Getting To Know Your Computer 6 2 Getting to Know the Desktop Lesson 6 Resizing and Reshaping Windows 2 Click the minimize button at the top right of the Explorer window Explorer disappears from the desktop However it s still open as you can see from the taskbar Minimizing program windows is a good way to clean up the desktop without actually closing programs 3 Click the maximize button at the top right of the Paint window The Paint window expands to the full size of the screen except for the taskbar Notice that the maximize button has changed It s now called the restore button Maximizing a program is a good way to work when you re only using that program and don t want any distractions on the screen 4 Click the restore button Paint returns its previous size and location Notice that the restore button has changed back into the maximize button For the next few steps assume that you want to be able to see both the Paint and Windows Explorer at the same time 5 Move the pointer to the right side of the Paint window The pointer changes to a two headed arrow 6 Click and drag the edge of the window until it takes up just less than half the width of the desktop 7 Click the title bar of the Paint window and while holding the primary button drag the window to the left side o
375. ws for Workgroups Your computer comes with an electronic book that documents Windows for Workgroups It is called Windows QuickStart 3 11 Edition To open this book follow these steps 1 Open the Toshiba Utilities program group 2 Double click the Windows QuickStart 3 11 Edition icon Windows opens the book to the table of contents Reading a Selected Topic To read a section of the Windows QuickStart 3 11 Edition Select a part of the book click its index tab or click Contents and select the section from the list displayed To move to the beginning of the table of contents click Contents K Ww To move up or down in a section click and drag the scroll box or click the up and down arrows at the right side of the screen K Ww To move forward or backward one section at a time click the left and right arrow icons at the bottom of the screen K Ww To use the alphabetical index select Index and click a topic name K Ww To get help on the Help menu click Help Contents or press F1 Part III Appendixes Using Windows for Workgroups 47 3 Getting Help With Windows for Workgroups Using Bookmarks Just as you would with a printed book you can mark your place with a bookmark Creating a New Bookmark To create or define a bookmark follow these steps 1 On the Bookmark menu click Define or click the yellow bookmark icon in the lower right corner of the screen The dialog box automati
376. xes pendix E Introducing Windows for Workgroups 0005 465 Running Programs Described in the Guide 468 Turning the Power Off sssto lu buat A eege at ta atte hte 470 Using Optional Devices in Windows for Workgroups 471 Getting Help With Windows for Workgroups 472 Using Windows for Workgroups If you selected Windows for Workgroups when you first started your computer it may seem that there is nothing in this guide for you This is not the case Many of the instructions for Windows 95 procedures are very similar to those you use in Windows for Workgroups This appendix tells you how to carry out procedures described in this guide if you re using Windows for Workgroups Introducing Windows for Workgroups This section gives a brief introduction to Windows for Work groups For more information click Help then click Contents to access on line help 465 466 Using Windows for Workgroups Introducing Windows for Workgroups Starting Windows for Workgroups When you turn your computer on it loads the MS DOS operating system and displays the command prompt for example C gt To start Windows for Workgroups type c windows win and press Enter Windows for Workgroups loads and displays the Program Man ager window What s on the Screen Program Manager is the gateway to your programs and all the other features of Windows for Workgroups This section describes the fea
377. y and remove the CD Make sure the CD ROM tray is clean Any dirt or foreign object can interfere with the laser beam Examine the disc to see whether it is dirty If necessary wipe it with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral cleaner Replace the disc in the drawer Make sure it is lying flat label side uppermost Close the CD ROM tray carefully making sure it has shut completely You press the CD ROM eject button but the CD ROM tray doesn t slide out Make sure the computer is connected to a power source and turned on The CD ROM drive eject mechanism requires power to operate If you need to remove a compact disc and cannot turn the com puter on for example if the battery is completely discharged use a narrow object such as a straightened paper clip to press the manual eject button This button is in the small hole next to the CD ROM eject button on the right side of the computer Some discs run correctly but others do not Check the type of compact disc you are using The drive supports ISO 9660 and CD Plus data CDs audio CDs and photo CDs If the problem is with a data CD refer to the software s documen tation and check that the hardware configuration meets the pro gram s needs The color of the material used to make the disc can affect its reli ability Silver colored CDs are the most reliable followed by gold colored CDs Green colored CDs are the least reliable Part I Getting To Know Your C
378. youre ready to make the diskettes refer to Running Microsoft Create System Disks on page 37 You must create your own set of Microsoft Windows 95 dis kettes If your hard disk ever crashes you ll need the diskettes to reinstall Windows 95 on your system If this occurs and you haven t made these diskettes you ll have to buy a new copy of Microsoft Windows 95 Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Let s Start at the Very Beginning 3 5 Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM Complete the Initial Start up Procedure Windows 95 completes its setup procedure and displays the Wel come to Windows 95 screen This screen provides the following options The Windows 95 Tour gives you a brief overview of Windows 95 For a more complete introduction see Getting to Know the Desktop on page 51 Select What s New for answers to common questions about Windows 95 Online Registration lets you register Windows 95 with Microsoft Once you ve finished looking at any or all of the above options click Close to finish the initial start up procedure and open Windows 95 Create Master Diskettes or Purchase the CD ROM When you buy a program at a computer store you receive a set of program diskettes or a CD ROM containing the files necessary to install the program on your computer s hard disk You can also use the files to reinstall your software if necessary However your computer comes with Windows 95 and a
379. ys the current resource sta tus in a bar graph format When this option is selected the Memory Resource Gauge displays the percentage of resources remaining Saves your changes and closes the dialog box Discards your changes and closes the dialog box Applies your changes to the Toshiba Access Panel The Percent Remaining Gauge Properties Dialog Box Display 21x r Display Modules Bar graph EE Percent remaining r Low Battery Indicators Change color WM Flach when critical TOGHIBA cred are The Percent Remaining Gauge Properties dialog box This dialog box lets you choose how the Percent Remaining Gauge displays Part IT Technical Reference 36 The Toshiba Access Panel The Dashboard Option Bar graph Percent remaining Change color Flash when critical OK Cancel Apply Usage Displays the remaining battery charge as a bar graph Displays the percentage of total battery charge remaining When this option is selected the Percent Remain ing Gauge changes color to indicate the battery charge green indicates the charge has not reached either battery alarm threshold yellow indicates the charge has passed the low battery alarm threshold and red indicates the charge has passed the critical battery alarm threshold When this option is selected the Percent Battery Remaining Gauge flashes when the charge has passed the critical batt
380. ystem Windows 95 loads the desktop Part I Getting To Know Your Computer Chapter 14 Problems that are Easy to Fix ccc ce ect eter cena eee 304 Problems When You Turn the Computer On 306 Windows 95 Isn t Working 0 00 cece eee eee eee ee 309 Resolving a Hardware Conflict lt b csGin sotas eda s cee dk es 314 Fixing Device Related Problems 000005 319 Develop Good Computing Habits 00000 336 If You Need Further Assistance 000 338 If Something Goes Wrong Some problems you may encounter when using the Satellite Pro 430 Series computer are relatively easy to identify and solve Oth ers may require help from your dealer or the manufacturer of a software program This chapter aims to help you solve many problems yourself with out needing additional help It covers the problems you are most likely to encounter Read the section headings on the opposite page then turn to a sec tion that covers the type of problem you are having Each section describes a problem and provides a solution Read the section and see if it describes your problem If so follow the steps for solving it If all else fails contact Toshiba You will find information on Toshiba s support services at the end of this chapter 303 30 4 If Something Goes Wrong Problems that are Easy to Fix Problems that are Easy to Fix The more you work with your computer the m

User Manual - minus zero degrees

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents